Bldg. Spec and Volume 3 Completed (Autosaved) (Autosaved) (Autosaved) (Autosaved) (Autosaved) (Autosaved) 1

Building Specifications
EXCAVATION, FILLING AND GRADING
1-1 EXCAVATION
The Contractor shall make all necessary excavation for foundations to establish grades indicated on
drawings without extra compensation including all other excavations required and necessary for the proper
prosecution of the work.
1. Cut slope for permanent excavations shall not be steeper than 1-½ horizontal to 1 vertical, and
slopes for permanent fills shall not be steeper than 2 horizontal to one vertical unless a
substantiating data will justify steeper slopes are submitted.
2. Deviation from the foregoing limitations for slopes shall be permitted only upon presentation of a
soil investigation report acceptable to the supervising Engineer.
3. Trim the excavation to the required depth, lines and grades and other incidental excavations to
level up the footing plus compacting and tamping which are included in the building Contract.
4. The materials to be excavated shall include: any rock, earth and other materials of any nature
and description encountered in abstaining the indicated lines and grades.
5. If the required safe bearing power of the soil is not obtained at the excavation depth indicated on
the drawings, the excavations shall be continued until such safe bearing power is reached.
6. Piers and walls shall be lengthened accordingly and likewise, the footings shall be revised to suit
the new conditions for which the Contractor shall be paid at the unit price bid for concrete work.
7. No fill other surcharge loads shall be placed adjacent to any buildings or structure unless such
building or structure unless such building or structure is capable of withstanding the additional
loads caused by the fill or surcharges.
8. Footings or foundations that may be affected by excavation shall be underpinned adequately, or
otherwise, protected against settlement and/or against lateral movement.
9. Fills to be used to support the foundations shall be placed in accordance with accepted
engineering practices. A soil investigation report and a report of satisfactory placement of fill,
both, shall be acceptable to the supervising Architect or Engineer.
10. Additional payment for excavation will be computed per unit bid price and/or at established unit
price for same as follows:
a. All materials of every nature and description, which in the Owner’s opinion will require the
use of air operated hammers, wedging, or drilling and blasting.
b. For additional excavation to safe-bearing power soil as required in % based upon work
required between indicated grades and authorized grades.
PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE
SCOPE OF WORK
This Item shall consist of furnishing, placing and finishing concrete in buildings and related structures,
flood control and drainage, and water supply structures in accordance with this Specifications and conforming
to the lines, grades, and dimensions shown on the Plans.
3-1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Acronyms
The following acronyms for applicable standards/publications are referred to in this Specifications.
a. ASTM – American Society of Testing Materials
b. ACI – American Concrete Institute
c. PCI – Pre-stressed Concrete Institute
d. AWS – American Welding Society
e. AISC – American Institute of Steel Construction
2. Standard Specifications and Codes
The work covered by this Section unless otherwise specified or detailed, shall be governed by the
Building Code requirements for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318), Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding
Society. The latest edition of all standards Specifications or Codes will be used.
3. Coordination
The concrete work shall be coordinated with the work of other trades to allow reasonable time to set
sleeves, inserts and other accessories which must be in position before concrete bases and pads or
mechanical equipment shall be placed to comply with approved shop drawings for the equipment.
4 Workmanship
The Contractor shall be responsible for any additional cost which may result from concrete surfaces
which are not finished to the required profile or elevation.
5. Samples
The Contractor shall submit samples of cement and aggregates proposed for use in the concrete
work for approval, enumerating names, sources and description of materials.
Page 1 of 120
3-2 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Portland Cement.
a. Portland cement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C-150 Type for normal Portland
cement; Type III for High Early Strength Portland Cement.
b. Cement shall be any standard commercial brand in 40 kilograms per bag such as: Filipinas,
Union, Republic, Apo or other locally available equivalent.
c. This shall conform to the requirement of ITEM 700, Volume II ( Blue Book), Hydraulic
Cement.
2. Concrete Aggregates
Concrete aggregate shall conform to the requirements of subsection 311.2.2 & 311.2.3 under Item
311 of Volume II, ( Blue Book ) & ASTM C 33 for lightweight aggregates, except that aggregates
failing to meet these specifications but w/c have been shown by special that or actual service to
produce concrete of adequate strength & durability may be used under method (2) of determining the
proportion of concrete, where authorized by the Engineer. Except as permitted elsewhere in this
section, the maximum size of the aggregate shall be not larger than one – fifth (1/5) of the narrowest
dimensions between sides of forms of the member for w/c the concrete is to be used nor larger than
three – fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars or
pre tensioning strands.
Sand shall be clean, hard, coarse river sand or crushed sand free from injurious amount of clay loam
and vegetable matter and shall conform to ASTM C-33 or C-330
Aggregate Tests
Samples of the fine & coarse aggregates to be used shall be selected by the Engineer for tests @
least 30 days before the actual concreting operation are to begin. It shall be the responsibility of the
contractor to designate the source or sources of aggregate to give the Engineer sufficient time to
obtain the necessary samples & submit them for testing. No aggregate shall be used until official
advice has been received that it has satisfactorily passed all test, @ w/c time written authority shall be
given for its use.
Water
Water used in mixing concrete shall conform to the requirement of subsection 311.2.4 under Item
311, Part E, of Volume II ( Blue Book )
3. Coarse Aggregate
Gravel shall be river run gravel or broken stones. The maximum size shall be 1/5 of the nearest
dimension between sides of forms of the concrete, or ¾ of the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing
bars, or between re-bars and forms which ever is smaller.
4. Mixing Water
Water used in mixing concrete shall be clean and free from injurious amount of oils, acids, alkali,
organic materials or other deleterious substances.
5. Admixture
All air-entraining admixtures if used, shall conform to ASTM C-260. Water reducing admixtures,
retarding admixtures, and water reducing and accelerating admixtures, if used, shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C-494.
3-4 PLAIN CONCRETE
General Requirements:
1. Plain Concrete, other than fill, shall have a minimum ultimate compressive strength at 28 days of 140
kilograms per square centimeter or 2,000 pounds per square inch and material proportioning, and
placing shall conform to the requirement of this section.
2. Concrete made with lightweight aggregate may be used with strengths less than 140 kg. per square
centimeter if it has been shown by tests or experience have sufficient strength and durability.
3. The thickness of plain concrete walls may be 5 centimeters (2 inches) less than the required by 6.17
for plain masonry wall but in no case less than 18 centimeters and the ratio of unsupported height or
length whichever is the lesser to thickness shall not be greater than 22.
4. Concrete shall consist of Portland Cement, fine aggregates, water, and where specified, Admixtures,
proportioned mixed placed, cured and finished as hereinafter specified.
5. The following special types of concrete shall be used where indicated on the detailed drawings or as
specified.
a. Lean Concrete
b. Concrete with integral waterproofing
c. High early strength concrete may be used subject to the approval of the supervising Architect
or Engineer.
Page 2 of 120
6. All provisions of the Specifications shall apply the seven (7) day compressive strength required for
normal concrete. Admixture used in concrete shall be produced by a reputable manufacturer’s printed
directions.
a. Plasticizing Admixture - Concrete admixture shall be free from chlorides and shall conform
to ASTM C-494-651. The admixtures shall be used in all concrete mixtures in accordance
with the manufacturer’s specifications.
b. Calcium Chloride – Shall not be used under any circumstances
3-5 PROPORTIONING OF CONCRETE
1. The contractor shall employ, at his own expense, an approved testing, laboratory which shall design
the mix for each type of concrete required by the specifications and drawings to obtain strength as
determined by test cylinder at least 15% higher than required. Strength requirements shall be as
noted on the drawings.
2. The adequacy of the mix design shall be verified by a test on a minimum of 6 cylinders, 3 tested at 7
days; 3 at 28 days, in accordance with ASTM C-192 and G-39 and by Slump Tests in accordance
with ASTM C-143.
3. The testing laboratory shall submit 5 copies of the mix design and the test results to the Owner or his
duly authorized representative for approval before any concrete is placed.
4. If at any time during construction, the concrete resulting from the approved mix design proves to be
unsatisfactory for the reason such as too much water, lack of sufficient plasticity to prevent
segregation, honeycomb, etc. or insufficient strength, the Contractor shall immediately notify the
testing laboratory and the supervising Engineer.
5. The laboratory shall modify the design, subject to approval by the supervising Architect or Engineer
until a satisfactory concrete is obtained.
6. Stone Concrete- minimum compressive cylinder strength of concrete fc’ at 28 days are as follows:
a. fc’ = 20.70 MPa suspended beam, slab and columns.
b. fc’ = 20.70 MPa for footings and walls.
7. The Water Content shall not exceed 28 liters per 40 kilograms per bag cement, and the slump test
shall not exceed 10 cm. in all cases unless otherwise changed by Supervising Architect or Engineer.
8. Lean Concrete – Lean concrete mix to be designated to produce concrete with a 28 days strength of
13.79 MPa, slump and size shall be subjected to approval depending on where it is mixed.
3-6 DETERMINING CONCRETE PROPORTIONS

The determination of the proportions of cement, aggregate and water to attain the required strengths
shall be made by one of the following methods, but lower water cement ratios may be required for
conformance with the quality of concrete.
Method – 1 without Preliminary Test

1. Where preliminary test data on the materials to be used in the concrete have not been obtained, the
water cement ratio for a given strength of concrete shall not exceed the value shown in Table 3-1.
2. When strength in excess of 281 kilograms per square centimeters (4000 pounds per square inch) are
required or when light weight aggregates or admixtures for the purpose of air-entraining are used,
the required water cement ratio shall be determined in accordance with Method-2.
Method – 2 For combination of materials previously evaluated or to be established by trial

mixtures.
1. Water cement ratio for strength greater than that shown in Table 3-1 (Maximum Permissible Water
Cement Ratio) may be used provided that the relationship between strength and water cement ratio
for the materials to be used has been previously established by reliable test data and the resulting
concrete satisfies the requirements of concrete quality.
2. Where previous data are not available, concrete trial mixtures having proportions and consistency
suitable for the work shall be made using at least three different water cement ratios (or cement
content in the case of lightweight aggregates) which will produce a range of strengths encompassing
those required for the work.
3. For each water cement ratio (cement content) at least three specimens for each age to be tested
shall be made, cured and tested for strength in accordance with ASTM C-39 and C-192.
4. The strength test shall be made at 7,14 and 28 days at which the concrete is to receive load, as
indicated on the Plans. A curve shall be established showing the relationship between water cement
ratio and compressive strength.
5. The maximum permissible water cement ratio for the concrete to be used in the structure shall be
that shown by the curve to produce an average strength to satisfy the requirements of the strength
test of concrete, provided that the water cement ratio shall be no greater than that by concrete quality
when concrete that is to be subjected to the freezing temperatures which weight shall have a water
cement ratio not exceeding 6 gallons per bag and it shall contain entrained water.
6. Where different materials are to be used for different portions of the work, each combination shall be
evaluated separately.
Page 3 of 120
TABLE 3-1 MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WATER CEMENT

RATIOS FOR CONCRETE (METHOD – 1)
Specified Maximum permissible water cement ratio

Comprehensive Non air-entrained concrete Air-entrained concrete
Strength at US gal. Per Absolute US gal. Per Absolute
28 days, psi 42.6 kg. Bag Ratio by 42.6 kg. Bag Ratio by
fc’ of Cement Weight of cement Weight
2500 7-1/4 0.642 6-1/4 0.554
3000 6-1/2 0.576 5-1/4 0.465
3500 5-3/4 0.510 4-1/2 0.399
4000 5 0.443 4 0.354
3-7 CONCRETE TEST
A. Testing Laboratory
1. The Contractor shall employ at his own expense, an approved Testing Laboratory which shall make
compression and Slum Tests and immediately submit 5 copies of the test reports to the supervising
Architect or Engineer.
2. Ready mixed concrete companies may use their own laboratories provided that testing is done with
the supervision of the Owner or his authorized representatives.
B. Compression Slump Test

Compression and Slump Tests shall be made for every 50 cubic meters of concrete or fraction
thereof; but not lees than 1 set of tests shall be made from any one batch of concrete and all 3 tests shall be
made from the same batch.
C. Compression Tests
Make 3 standard 15 cm. X 30 cm. Cylinder and test in accordance with ASTM C-31 and C-39. Test
one (1) cylinder at the age of 14 days and one (1) cylinder in reserve for 28 days test. If the 28 days test does
not meet the requirements, make additional cylinder as required to check strength of concrete in the
construction. These cylinders are to be cured in the field in the same manner as to the concrete in the
construction is cured.
D. Slump Test
For each representative quantity of concrete mentioned above, two slump tests shall be made in
accordance with ASTM C-143.
E. Test Report
The testing laboratory shall submit 4 copies of its test cylinder reports which are to include, as far as
applicable, the following information’s:
a. Location of the structure where the concrete is used, design number, concrete design
strength, type and manufacturer of Portland cement.
b. Amount of any Admixtures used, Slump Tests, date of sampling, cylinder application number,
days cured in the field, and days cured in laboratory.
c. Age at the time of testing, crushing stress, type of failure, who made the cylinders, who
shipped the cylinders to the laboratory and whether concrete strength meets the
specifications.
3-9 MIXING CONCRETE

The mixing and measuring equipment shall be approved by the supervising Architect or Engineer.
Unless otherwise authorized, concrete shall be machine mixed at the site or by ready-mixed concrete.
A. Site Mixed Concrete

Provide a batch mixer type equipped with accurate timing and measuring devices and operate in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Mixing Time
1. For each batch, after all solid materials are placed inside the mixing drum, and water is introduce
before ¼ of the mixing time has elapsed, shall not be less than 1 minute or mixers having a capacity
of one (1) cubic meter or a fraction thereof for additional concrete.
2. The concrete mixer shall revolved at no less than 14 or more than 20 revolutions per minute. Speed
greater than 20 revolutions per minute and less than 14 revolutions per minute are usually found to
be unsatisfactory.
3-10 READY MIXED CONCRETE
1. All ready mixed concrete shall conform with the requirements of ASTM C-94, placed in forms within
one hour after adding water or not more than ½ hours if a retarder is used. It shall be kept constantly
agitated during the transit period.
Page 4 of 120
2. Pouring of concrete should not be started until after the forms and reinforcement for the whole unit
are properly laid and installed, cleaned, inspected and approved.
3. Construction joints shall be rough-in and clean thoroughly before any pouring starts. Wet and slush
surface with cement mortar.
3-11 HANDLING AND PLACING CONCRETE
1. Immediately after the concrete is mixed, it shall be conveyed by approved pushcart or buggies to
designated locations, and carefully deposited in such manner as to prevent the separation of
ingredient or displacement of the reinforcements.
2. Keep temporary runways built in such a manner that run-way supports will not bear upon
reinforcement of fresh concrete. Conveying or hauling of concrete by the use of long inclined chutes
or pipes shall not be permitted.
3. Dumping concrete into carts or buggies with a free fall of more than one (1) meter will not be
permitted. Hardened splashes or accumulation of concrete on forms or reinforcements shall be
removed before the work continues.
4. When placing operations would involved dropping of the concrete more than 1.50 meters high, it shall
be deposited through a sheet metal or other approved conveyors.
5. As for practicability, the conveyors shall be kept full of concrete during the placing and their lower
ends shall be kept buried in the newly placed concrete.
6. After the initial set of the concrete, the forms shall not be jarred, and no strain shall be placed on the
ends of the projecting reinforcing bars. Foundation shall be free from water during concreting and
construction joints shall be determined by the supervising Architect or Engineer.
7. Concrete in columns shall be placed in one continuous pouring operation and allowed to set 12 hours
before caps are placed. Likewise, concrete in beams and slabs in superstructures shall be poured in
one operation.
3-12 RE-TAMPERING
The Contractor shall mix only such quantities that are required for immediate use. Mixture which
developed initial setting, shall not be used. Concrete t
hat has partially hardened shall not be re-tampered for use.
3-13 CURING AND PROTECTION

1. All concrete work shall be protected from drying out after removal of forms by covering with
waterproof paper, burlap, with a coating of approved membrane curing compound having moisture
retention equal to 90% based on ATM C-309 and C-156, applied in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions for use.
2. Membrane curing compound shall not be used where floor hardener, membrane waterproofing,
damp-proofing, resilient floor tile or other floor or wall covering set in adhesive, concrete-fill or setting
beds, paint, plaster or other applied finishing or surfaces treatment are to be subsequently applied.
3. Wet burlap as often as required to keep concrete wet throughout each day for a period of at least 7
days where normal Portland cement is used and 3 days where high early strength cement is used.
3-14 METAL REINFORCEMENT

1. Steel Bars
1. Reinforcing bars shall conform to ASTM Specifications A-615. All mild steel for columns,
shear wall, footings and footing beams shall be high grade deformed bars. Fy = 413.7 MPa.
2. For 10 mm and smaller bars use intermediate grade deformed bars. Fy = 275.8 MPa
3. If reinforcing bars are to be welded, these specifications shall be supplemented by
requirements assuring satisfactory weld ability.
4. Bar and rod mats for concrete reinforcement shall conform to ASM Specifications A-184 and
Wires for concrete reinforcement shall conform too ASTM A-82 Specifications.
5. Welded wire fabric for concrete reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A-185 except that the
weld shear strength requirements shall be extended to include a wire size differential up to
and including six gauges.
6. Wire and strand shall conform to ASTM A-416. Structural steel shall conform to ASTM A-26
and Steel pipe for composite column shall conform to ASTM Specification A-377.
Reinforcing steel bars shall conform to the requirements of the following Specifications:
Deformed & Plain Billet Steel ( ASTM A 615 )

Bars for concrete Reinforcement AASHTO M 31
Deformed Rail – Steel & Plain

Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A 616
Deformed A X b – Steel & Plain

Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM 617
If reinforcing bars are to be welded, these ASTM specifications shall be supplemented by

requirements assuring satisfactory weld ability.
Bar and rd mats for concrete reinforcement ASTM A 187
Cold – Draw Steel Wire for ( ASTM A 82 )

Concrete reinforcement AASHTO M 32
Page 5 of 120
Welded steel wire fabric ( ASTM A 185 )

For concrete reinforcement AASHTO M55
Except that the weld shear strength requirement of those specification shall be extended to include a wire size
differential up to & including six gages.
Wire & Strands for pre stressed ASTM A 416

Concrete ASTM A 421
Used in making strands for post – tensioning shall be cold – drawn & either stress – relieved in the case of
uncoated strands, or hot dip galvanized in the case of galvanized strands.
High strength alloy steel bar for post – tensioning shall be proof stressed to 90% of the granted tensile
strength. After proof stressing, the bars shall conform to the following minimum properties :
Tensile strength fs’ 1000MPa

Yield strength ( 0.2 offset ) 0.90 fs’
Elongation at rupture in 20 diameter 4 percent
Reduction of area at rupture 25 percent
Structural Steel ASTM A 36
Steel Pipe for concrete – filled pipe columns ASTM A 53
Cast – Iron Pipe for composite columns ASTM A 377
Accessories
Provide bar support and other accessories necessary to hold reinforcing bars in the proper
positions while concrete is being placed. Bar supports which come in contact with forms for concrete
exposed to view in the finished structure shall be galvanized or stainless subject to approval.
2. Mill Certificate and Test

a. The Contractor shall furnish 2 copies of the Manufacturer’s certificate of mill tests of all reinforcing
steel.
b. The Contract shall, employ at his own expense an approved testing laboratory which shall
conduct testing of all reinforcement sizes of each bulk under the supervision of the supervising
Architect or Engineer.
4. Shop Drawing
a. Each reinforcing steel detail and placement drawings shall be submitted for approval. Any
material fabricated before the final approval of the shop drawings will be done at the
Contractor’s risk, but no material shall be installed until final approval of the “Shop
Drawings”
b. All shop drawings shall be in accordance with the Manual Standard Practice for Detailing
Reinforced Concrete Structure ACT-315
3-15 PLACING OF REINFORCEMENT
1. All reinforcement shall be placed according to the approved drawings. The Contractor shall provide
sufficient bay supports, ties, anchors and other accessories to hold all bars securely in place.
2. Unless detailed on drawings, all stirrups shall be held in place by bar spacers. Reinforcing steel shall
be cleaned of oil, grease, scale, rust or other coatings which will impair bond.
3. All bars shall be bent cold.
4. All welded splices shall be done by certified welders having welder’s certificate and shall be submitted
and approved by the supervising Architect or Engineer before any welding works shall be started.
5. The welding of bars shall conform to AWS D-12.1 Recommended Practices for welding Reinforcing
Steel.
3-16 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
General Conditions
1. Forms shall conform to the shape, lines and dimensions shown on the drawings. They shall be
substantial and designed to resist the pressure and weight of the concrete.
2. Forms shall be properly tied and braced or shored so as to maintain their position and shape. Forms
shall be sufficiently tight and strong to prevent leakage of mortar.
3. Where required by the Owner, Shop drawings of formwork, shall be submitted for approval before
fabrication and erection of such formwork.
4. Provide temporary openings where necessary to facilitate cleaning and inspection before depositing
concrete.
5. Before construction, all form materials are subject to approval. The type of form used shall be in
accordance with the finish requirements as specified or as shown on the detailed drawings.
6. Forming shall start at the first floor level with new materials. Forms for exposed concrete may be
reused only of the surface has not absorbed moisture and has not splintered, warped or peeled,
subject to the approval of the supervising Architect or Engineer.
7. Forms shall be coated with non-staining form oil before setting reinforcement. The form oil shall not
contain chemical that will impair the strength of the concrete
8. Side forms of footings may be omitted and concrete be placed against the next excavation only when
approved by the supervising Architect or Engineer.
Page 6 of 120
9. All exposed corners shall be square. Extra care shall be exercised while stripping the forms. Corners
shall be protected against chipping or other damages that may be caused by the working forced.
10. Removal of forms or shoring is subject to approval by the supervising Architect or Engineer, and
under no circumstances shall bottom form and shoring be removed until after the members have
required sufficient strength to support their weight and the load thereon. Forms shall remain in place
for a minimum time as follows:
Columns, Shear and bearing walls - 3 days

Stairs (bottom forms) - 21 days
Beams and Slabs (bottom form) - 21 days
3-18 OTHER FORMS

Exposed exterior surfaces or building where Architectural finishing is required and as shown on
detailed drawings, the following conditions shall be observed:
1. Forms shall be designed and constructed to facilitate early removal without damage to exposed
surfaces of the concrete, free of offsets, and square corners true to lines and profiles as detailed.
2. Form ties will-not be permitted through forms for surfaces which will be exposed. Formworks shall not
be used twice unless otherwise approved by the supervising Architect or Engineer.
3. Exposed and Interior Surfaces treated plywood forms or moisture resistant plywood shall be laid
vertically or horizontally in large area with joints so arranged and treated properly as required to
provide smooth concrete surfaces.
3-19 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES

Form ties shall be submitted for approval. It shall be so designed as to leave no metal closer than 19
mm to the surface of the concrete or to leave a hole greater than 22 mm in diameter on the face of the
concrete.
3-20 FINISHING OR FORMED SURFACE

Remove forms and form tie ends then fill holes with 1:2 Portland Cement mortar mixed to match the
concrete. All defective areas below grade line not exposed to view shall be patched with Portland Cement
mortar mixed to match the concrete mixture as directed by the supervising Architect or Engineer.
1. Exposed exterior surfaces of the building where special finish is indicated, - Concrete shall be placed
and finished as herein before specified and as required to provide even dense surface of uniform
color, free from marks, aggregate, pockets, honeycomb or other imperfections so that after treatment
of the finished surfaces will not be required.
2. Any concrete which is not formed on level or alignment, or shows defective surfaces shall be
considered as not conforming with the intent of this Specifications and shall be removed at the
expense of the Contractor, unless the Owner or his authorized representative grants permission to
patch or otherwise correct the defective areas.
3. Permission to patch any such area shall not be a waiver of the right of the Owner to require complete
removal of the defective works.
4. Exposed Interior Finishes – Patch all defective and remove all fins, form joint marks, rough spots and
other defects by rubbing with a suitable tools until such defects and rough areas are completely
removed and surfaces free from imperfections so as to produce dense, smooth, uniform finish with
the desired texture and design.
5. Silicone water repellent, shall be applied to all exterior exposed concrete surface above grade which
are not to be painted.
3-21 FINISHING OF SLAB
1. Finish floor and roof slabs shall be level plane surfaces unless otherwise specified on the drawings,
with a tolerance of 3 mm in 3-0 meters. Surfaces shall be slope towards the drains as required
2. Resilient flooring, Ceramic Tile or Marble, base slabs which are to receive these finishes or other
finished requiring “Thin-Set” installation shall be floated and toweled with a steel trowel to provide a
smooth surface as required to receive the flooring.
3. For roofing membrane waterproofing, the working processes is thee same as that for Resilient
Flooring except steel toweling which may be omitted.
4. Exposed concrete finish surface where no finishing applied as called for on the drawings shall be
finished with a steel trowel as required to produce a hard, dense finish free from surface
imperfections.
5. Dry materials should not be use on the surface to be finished. Apply hardener and sealer in
accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.
3-24 CONCRETE FLOOR ON FILL
Concrete floors and steps on fill shall be laid on a prepared foundation which shall be placed as
follows:
1. Earth or sand fill shall be laid to a uniform grade as shown on the detailed drawings, fill shall be
placed in layers not to exceed 15 centimeters thick, for each layer being thoroughly wetted and rolled
or tamped.
2. Earth or sand fill shall be made as soon as the concrete of the walls and foundations has set
sufficiently to permit the filling load and pressure. On top of this fill shall be placed 10 cm. Layer of
gravel which shall be rolled or tamped.
3. All of these sand and gravel foundations specified above shall be kept wet for at least 30 days after
rolling or tamping so as to allow settlement before the floors are placed.
4. Concrete floors shall be laid in alternate strips about one (1) meter in width by 6 meters minimum
length, but following pattern shown on drawings. The construction joints shall coincide with the groove
Page 7 of 120
in case such items are called for in the cement finish. After the concrete has set, the form shall be
removed and the remaining strips, laid.
5. All concrete shall be of such consistency as to require tamping to bring the water to the surface.
Tamping shall be done mechanically.
6. Concrete floor and steps on fill or in ground shall be reinforced if indicated in the drawings. The size
and spacing of the reinforcing steel shall be in accordance with the drawing or Specifications.
3-25 HANDLING AND PLACING OF CONCRETE
Concrete during and immediately after depositing, shall be thoroughly compacted. The compaction
shall be done by mechanical vibration subject to the following provisions:
1. The vibration shall be internal unless special authorization of the other method is given by the
supervising Architect or Engineer or as provided herein.
2. Vibrators shall be of a type and design approve by the supervising Engineer. They shall be capable of
transmitting vibration to the concrete with frequencies of not less than 4,500 impulses per minute.
3. The intensity of vibration shall be as such as to visibility affect a mass of concrete of 25 mm., slope
over a radius of at least 50 centimeters.
4. The Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of vibrators to properly compact each batch
immediately after it is placed in the forms.
5. Vibrations shall be applied at the point of deposit and in the area of freshly deposited concrete. The
vibrator shall be inserted into and withdrawn from the concrete slowly and gradually.
6. The vibration shall be of sufficient duration and intensity to compact the concrete thoroughly but shall
not be continued so as to cause segregation. Vibration shall not be continued at any one point to the
extent that localized areas of grout are formed.
7. Vibrators shall be thoroughly manipulated so as to work the concrete around the reinforcement and
embedded fixtures and into the corners and angles of the forms.
8. Application of vibrators shall be at points uniformly spaced and not farther apart than twice the radius
over which the vibration is visibly affected.
9. Vibration shall not be applied directly or through the reinforcement sections of layers of concrete
which have hardened to a degree that the concrete ceases to be plastic under vibration.
10. It shall not be used to make concrete flow in the forms over distances so great as to cause
segregation and vibration shall not be used to transport concrete.
3-26 GRADATION OF AGGREGATES
1. Fine and Coarse aggregates used in concrete, shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of
the “Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates” ASTM 033-67m with a minimum frequency of
one (1) set of 6 and one (1) set of 7 tests per 1,000 cubic meter source, as follows:
At least one sample of fine and coarse aggregates used in concrete shall be tested in accordance
with the requirements of the “Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates” ASTM 033-67.
2. Aggregates failing to meet these specifications, but which have been shown by approved laboratory
tests to produce concrete of the required quality may be used where authorized by the Architect or
Engineer.
3. Aggregates shall be quarried or washed in fresh water and shall contain not more than one twentieth
1/20 of (1%) percent salt by weight.
3-27 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
1. Portland Cement
a. Cement delivered in bags shall be stored immediately upon receipt at the work site in a
weather proof structure which shall be air tight as practicable with suitable wooden floors
which shall be elevated above the ground at a distance sufficient enough to prevent the
absorption of moisture.
b. Bags shall have guaranteed constant cement content and shall be provided with proper
labels showing the number of consignment and the date of site delivery.
c. The bag shall be stacked close together to reduce circulation of air but should not be stacked
against outside walls but in such a way that they will be easily accessible for inspection and
testing and shall be used in the order of their delivery.
d. Cement that has been in storage longer than six months will be tested by standard mortar
tests or other tests as deemed necessary by the Owner to determine its suitability and such
cement shall not be used without the express approval of the Owner.
e. Bags shall not be stored to a height greater than two (2) meters. All cement must be free from
lumps or evident for deterioration.
f. Cement delivered in bulk shall be stored in properly designated elevated airtight and
waterproofed silos or bins, provided at the Contractor’s expense. The silos shall be adequate
in size to ensure continuity of work at all times.
g. The site shall be kept perfectly dry. Bag cement shall be transported closed and effectively
protected from weather by adequate coverings. Bulk cement shall be transported in closed
container.
2. Aggregates
Page 8 of 120
a. All aggregates shall be stored in bunkers provided with proper floors or tightly laid wood
planes sheet metals, or other hard and clean surface. Fine and coarse aggregates of different
sizes shall be stored in separate bunkers or piles in such a manner as to prevent
aggregation, inclusion and contamination by dirt and other injurious foreign materials.
b. Stockpiles of coarse aggregate shall be built in horizontal layers not exceeding 1.20 meters in
depth to minimize segregation. Should the coarse aggregate become segregated, it should
be re-mixed to conform to the grading requirements given herein before.
3. Reinforcing Steel Bars
Reinforcing steel bars shall be transported and stored at the site in such a way as to prevent damage
or deterioration of the steel by rust or coating with grease, oil, dirt and other objectionable materials. Storage
shall be in separate piles or racks so as to avoid confusion or loose of identification after bundle are broken.
3-28 REBAR SPACING AND COVER
1. Reinforcing Bars
Reinforcing bars shall be fixed one to the other by means of adequate steel wire ties to form rigid
reinforcement cages or nets. The reinforcement shall be fixed in the form by approved concrete distance
blocks, space bars, links and stirrups, and all to be provided at the Contractor’s expense. Reinforcing bars
shall be spaced according to the approved working drawings and the distance between bars shall not be less
than those recommended in ACI-318.
2. Concrete Cover
The concrete cover of reinforcing bars shall be as recommended in ACI 318 unless otherwise
specifically indicated on the drawings.
3. Anchorage Length
Plain bars shall be provided with end hook unless otherwise specified. The lengths of the anchorage
of reinforcing bars shall be at least those recommended in ACI 318.
4. Splices
Splices in bars shall be avoided as far as possible and shall be staggered in any one structural
member. They shall conform with the recommendations in ACI 318. In no case shall splices be made at
critical points of maximum stress.
3-29 PATCHING
1. Immediately after the forms have been removed and work has been examined by the Owner, and
his permission given, all loose materials shall be removed.
2. All holes, stones pockets and other surfaces which were in contact with forms treated with
cement retarding materials shall be removed with wire brush or other approved methods until a
rough bonding surface of exposed aggregate is obtained.
3. Any surface considered by the supervising Engineer to be insufficiently roughened shall be
further roughened by an approved mechanical means. Surfaces shall be thoroughly washed
down with water.
4. Honey combed and other defective areas must be chipped out to solid concrete, the edge cut as
straight as possible and at right angles to the surface of slightly undercut to provide a key at the
edge of the patch.
5. Shallow patches may be filled with mortar similar to that used in the concrete. This should be
placed in layers not more than 12 mm thick and each layer given a scratch finish to improve bond
with the succeeding layer.
3-30 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
1. Once started, concreting shall be continued without interruption and shall only be stopped at
properly indicated and prepared construction joints.
2. The position of construction joints shall be decided in advance so that the amount of concrete
required to be placed at any one time does not exceed the capacity of the mixing plant.
3. In all cases where the positions of construction joints have not been indicated on the drawings,
they must be approved by the Architect or Engineer.
4. Except where inclined joints are specified, all joints shall be formed to vertical or horizontal
planes. Vertical joints shall be formed against a properly constructed stop-board.
5. As a general rule, joints in columns shall be made as near as possible to a beam haunch and
joint in beams and slabs shall be made at positions shown on the drawings.
6. Construction joints shall be wire-brushed while the concrete is still green, roughened or hacked to
expose the aggregate across the whole area of the joint.
7. Before fresh concrete is placed, the roughened surface shall be swept clean of all loose
materials, thoroughly wetted and covered with a 12 mm thick layer of mortar composed of cement
and sand in the same ratio as the cement and sand in the concrete mix.
8. Special care shall be taken to ensure that the first layer of fresh concrete is thoroughly rammed
against the existing layer.
Page 9 of 120
9. The cost of all measures necessary to form construction joints, whether shown on the Drawings
or not, shall be deemed to be included in the Contractor’s rates for concrete.
Construction Requirements
Notation : The notations used in these regulations are defined as follows :
F’c = compressive strength of concrete

Fsp = ratio of splitting tensile strength to square root of compressive strength.
Concrete Quality
All plans submitted for approval or used for any project shall clearly show the specified strength, fc’ of
concrete of the specified age for w/c each part of the structure was designed.
Concrete that will be exposed to sulfate containing or other chemically aggressive solutions shall be
proportioned in accordance w/ “Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Concrete ( ACI 613 )” &
Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural lightweight Concrete ( ACI 613 A ). “
Concrete Proportions & Consistency
The proportions of aggregate to cement for any concrete shall be such as to produce a mixture w/c will work
readily into the corners & angles of the form & around reinforcement w/ the method of placing employed on
the work, but w/o permitting the materials to segregate or excess free water to collect on the surface. The
methods of measuring concrete materials shall be such that the portions can be accurately controlled & easily
checked @ any time during the wok.
Sampling & Testing of Structural Concrete
As work progress, at Least one (1) set of sample consisting of three (3) concrete cylinder test specimens, 150
x 300 mm shall be taken from each class of concrete placed each day, & each set to represent not more than
75 cu.m of concrete.
Consistency
Concrete shall have a consistency such that it will be workable in the required position. It shall be such a
consistency that it will flow around reinforcing steel but individual particles of the coarse aggregate when
isolated shall show a coating or mortar containing its proportionate amount of sand. The consistency of
concrete shall be gauged by the ability of the equipment to properly placed it & not by the difficulty of mixing
water shall be determined by the Engineer & shall not be varied w/o his consent. Concrete as dry as it is
practical to place w/ the equipment specified shall be used.
900.3.6 Strength Test of Concrete
When strength is a basis for acceptance, each class of concrete shall be represented by at least five test ( 10
specimens ). Two specimens shall be made for each test @ a given age, & not less than one test
shall be made for each 150 cu. Yd of structural concrete, but there shall be at least one test for each days
concreting. The Building Official may require a reasonable number of additional tests during the progress of
the work.
Samples from w/c compression test specimens are molded shall be secured in accordance w/ ASTM C 172.
Specimens made to check the adequacy of the proportions for strength of concrete or as a basis for
acceptance of concrete shall be made & laboratory – cured in accordance w/ ASTM C 31. Additional test
specimens cured entirely under field conditions may be required by the Building Official to check the
adequacy of curing & Protection of the concrete. Strength tests shall be made in accordance w/ ASTM C 39.
The age for strength tests shall be 28 days or, where specified, the earlier age @ w/c the concrete is to
receive its full load or maximum stress. Additional test may be made at earlier ages to obtain advance
information on the adequacy of strength development where age – strength relationships have been
established for the materials & proportions used.
To conform to the requirements of this Item :
1. For structures designed in accordance w/ the working stress design method of this chapter, the
average of any five consecutive strength tests of the laboratory – cured specimens representing each
class of concrete shall be equal on or greater than the specified strength, fc’, & not more than 20
percent of the strength test shall have values less than that specified.
2. For structures designed in accordance w/ the ultimate strength design method of this chapter, & for
pre stressed structures the average of any three consecutive strength test of the laboratory cured
specimens representing each class of concrete shall be equal to or greater than the specified
strength, fc’ & not more than 10 percent of the strength tests shall have values less than the specified
strength. When it appears that the laboratory – cured specimens will fail to conform to the
requirements for strength, the Engineer shall have the right to order changes in the concrete sufficient
to increase the strength to meet these requirement. The strengths of the specimens cured on the job
are intended to indicate the adequacy of protection & curing of the concrete & may be used to
determine when the forms may be stripped, shoring removed, or the structure placed in service.
when, in the opinion of the Building Official, the strengths of the job – cured specimens, the contractor
may be required to improve the procedures for protecting & curing the concrete, or when test of field
Page 10 of 120
– cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in protection & curing, the Engineer may require test in
accordance w/ ASTM Specification C42 or order load tests as outlined in the load tests of structures
for that portion of the structure where the questionable concrete has been placed.
900.3.7 Splitting Tensile Test of Concrete
To determine the splitting ratio, Fsp, for a particular aggregate, test of concrete shall be made as
follows :
1. Twenty four (24) 15 cm. dia. By 30 cm long ( 6 in. dia. By 12 in. long ) cylinders shall be
made in accordance w/ ASTM C 192, Twelve @ a compressive strength level of
approximately 210 kilograms per square centimeter (3000 psi.) & twelve at
approximately 280 kilograms per square centimeter (4000 psi) or 350 kilograms per
square centimeter (5000 psi). After 7 days moist curing followed by 21 days drying @ 23
C (73F) and 50 percent relative humidity, eight of the test cylinders @ each of the two
strength levels shall be tested for splitting strength & four for compressive strength.
2. The splitting tensile strength shall be determine in accordance w/ ASTM C 496, and
compressive strength in accordance w/ as C 39.
The ratio, Fsp, of splitting tensile strength to the square root of compressive strength
shall be obtained by using the average of all 16 splitting tensile test & all 8 compressive
tests Minimum strength, concrete other than fill, shall have a minimum compressive
strength @ 28 days of 140 kilograms per square centimeter (2000 psi).
900.3.8 Batching
Batching shall conform to the requirements of item 405, Structural Concrete.
900.4 Concrete Surface Finishing : General
This shall be in accordance w/ item 407. Concrete Structures.
900.5 Curing Concrete ( see subsection 407 )
900.6 Acceptance of Concrete
The strength of concrete shall be deemed acceptable if the average of 3 consecutive strength test results
is equal to or exceed the specified strength & no individual test result falls below the specified strength
by more than 15 %.
Concrete deemed to be not acceptable using the above criteria may be rejected unless contractor can
provide evidence, by means of core tests, that the quality of concrete represented by the failed test result
is acceptable in place. Three (3) cores shall be obtained from the affected area & cured & tested in
accordance w/ AASHTO T 24. Concrete in the area represented by the cores will be deemed acceptable if
the average of cores is equal to or @ least 85 % & no sample core is less than 75 % of the specified
strength otherwise it shall be rejected.
900.7 Method of Measurement
The quantity of concrete to be paid shall be the quantity shown in the Bid Schedule, unless changes in
design are made in w/c case the quantity shown in the Bid Schedule will be adjusted by the amount of
the change for the purpose of payment. No deduction will be made for the volume occupied by the pipe
less than 101 mm ( 4” ) in diameter not for reinforcing steel, anchors, weep holes or expansion materials.
900.8 Basis of Payment
The accepted quantities of structural concrete completed in place will be paid for @ the contract unit
price for cubic meter as indicated on the Bid Schedule.
0
Pay Item & Description Unit of Measurement
Structural Concrete Cubic Meter
Such prices & payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, including metal water stops,
joints, joint fillers, weep holes, and rock backing & timber bumpers, for all form & false work, for mixing,
placing, furnishing, and curing the concrete; and for all labor, materials, equipment, tools & incidentals
necessary to complete the item. Except that reinforcing steel metal pipes & drains, metal conduits &
ducts, & metal expansion angle shall be paid for as structural steel that when the proposal does not
include an item for structural steel these miscellaneous metal parts shall be paid for as reinforcing steel.
Page 11 of 120
CONCRETE MASONRY
4-1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

The concrete masonry Contractor shall examine all drawings, specifications and all conditions that
has relations and may affect his work performance in the execution of the Contract.
Where any deviation on the Plans Specifications is to be made, the Owner shall be notified and his
written approval shall be obtained before proceeding with the work.
4-2 SCOPE OF WORK
1. Furnishing of all necessary materials, tools, equipment, labor, and appliances necessary to
complete the execution of the concrete masonry work as shown on the drawings and herein
specified.
2. All preparations for masonry work necessary to receive and adjoin other work, including
provisions for inserts and attachments as noted in the plans and specifications which shall be
installed under the terms of this work.
3. Coordination with all other trades in laying out and execution of the concrete masonry work.
Giving the work his personal supervision and keeping a competent foreman on the job at all
times.
4. Arranging for adequate bracing, forming and shoring required in conjunction with and in the
course of constructing the concrete masonry although not provided for under other sections.
5. Furnishing of all reinforcing steel for concrete masonry work and their placement including those
not provided for under other sections but necessary for proper prosecution of the work.
6. Arranging for the necessary storage space and protection for material at the job site.
7. Providing assistance and facilities for all inspections by the Owner or his authorized
representative as required in the course o execution of the work
8. Arranging for furnishing test specimens and samples of materials as may be required.
The following materials to be used under this section of the specifications shall conform to the
concrete masonry standards as indicated.
1. Cement to conform with ASTM C-150

2. Sand or fine aggregate shall be clear, sharp and well graded, and free from injurious amount of
dust, lumps, shale, alkali, surface coatings and organic matter.
3. Lime: Hydrated lime shall conform with ASTM C-207
4. Quicklime shall conform with ASTM C-5 Specifications.
Quicklime shall be slaked and then screened through a 16 mesh sleeve.
5. After slaking, screening and before using, it shall be stored and protected for not less than 10
days. The resulting product shall weigh not less than 1330 kilogram per cubic meter.
6. Hollow load bearing masonry units shall be type I Class A or B unit conforming with ASTM C-90-
70 and the Philippine Bureau of Standard No. 15-2, series of 1979.
7. Solid load bearing masonry units shall be class A units conforming to ASTM C-145. All load
bearing masonry units shall have a minimum compressive strength of not less than 5.50 MPa
(800 psi) based on 5 individual units when tested in accordance with the methods set forth in
ASTM C-140-70 or as tested by the Bureau of Research and Standard, DPWH.
8. Masonry units shall have been cured for not less than 14 days if steam-cured, or 28 days if air-
cured when placed in the structure.
4-4 CONCRETE HOLLOW BLOCKS
1. For walls and partitions shown on the detailed drawings requiring concrete hollow blocks, the
Contractor either uses concrete or ceramic hollow blocks upon approval of the Architect or
Engineer.
2. The load bearing of hollow blocks shall have a minimum compressive strength of 6.89 MPa (1000
psi) computed from the average of five (5) units based on the average gross area, and a
minimum of 5.41 MPa (800 psi) for the individual unit respectively, all based on gross area.
Visual Inspection
All units shall be sound and free from cracks or other defects that would interfere with the proper
placing of the unit or impair the strength or permanence of the construction.
Sampling of Specimen
In sampling the blocks for the strength, absorption and moisture content determination, ten (10)
individual units shall be selected from each lot of 10,000 units or fraction thereof and 20 individual units each
lot of more than 10,000 units.
Sampling
For lots more than 10,000 units, 10 individual units shall be selected from each 50,000 units or
fraction thereof, contained in the lot. For non-bearing type of CHB, no sampling for test shall be required for
less than 500 units to be used in the job.
Page 12 of 120
Testing
Units shall be tested in accordance with the standard method of testing Masonry units of the
American Society of Testing Materials ASTM designation C-140 and or by the Bureau of Materials and
Quality Control, DPWH. No blocks shall be used unless results of tests are known and duly approved by the
supervising Architect or Engineer.
Reinforcement
All units shall be laid a mortar composed of one part Portland cement and there parts of sand.
Reinforcement shall be done in accordance with the structural plans as to size, spacing and other
requirements.
4-5 MORTAR AND GROUT
Cement to be used for mortar and grout shall be: Type 1, 2, 3 or Type 4 Portland Cement conforming
to ASTM C-150
1. Plastic cement shall have less than 12% of the total volume in approved types of plastic agents
and shall conform to all of the requirements for Portland Cement per ASTM C-150, except to the
limitations in insoluble residue, air entrainment, and addition subsequent to calcinations.
2. Mortar shall be freshly prepared and uniformly mixed in the proportion of 1 part Portland Cement
1.4 part maximum lime putty or hydrated lime, loose sand not less than 1-1/2 and not more than 3
times the sum of the volume of cement and lime used, and shall conform to ASTM C-270.
3. Grout for pouring shall be of fluid consistency and mixed in the proportion by volume; 1 part
Portland Cement, 2-1/2 part minimum to 3 parts maximum damp loose sand where the grout
space is less than 7.5 cm in its least dimension.
4. Grout for pouring shall be fluid consistency and mixed in the ratio by volumes; 1 part Portland
Cement, 2 parts minimum to 3 parts maximum amp loose sand, 2 parts coarse aggregate where
the grout space is not more than 7.5 cm. In its least dimension.
5. Grout for pumping shall be of fluid consistency and shall have not less than 7 bags of cement in
each cubic meter of grout. The mix design shall be approve by the supervising Engineer.
6. Fluid consistency shall mean; as fluid as possible for pouring without segregation of the
constituent parts.
7. Aggregate for mortar shall conform to ASTM C-144.
8. Aggregate for grout shall conform to ASTM C-404
4-6 A
ADMIXTURE
1. The use of Admixtures shall not be permitted in mortar or grout unless substantiating data is
submitted to and approved by the supervising Architect or Engineer.
2. The use of Admixtures shall not be permitted in mortar without reducing the lime content.
3. Insert coloring pigments may be added but not to exceed 6% by weight of the cement.
4. The use of uncontrolled fire clay, dirt and other deleterious materials is prohibited
5. Water to be used shall be fresh, clean and free from deleterious quantities of acids alkali and
organic materials.
4-7 REINFORCING STEEL
1. The minimum requirements for deformed steel bars shall conform to ASTM A-305.
2. Wire reinforcement shall also conform with ASTM A-82.
3. Reinforcement shall be clean and free from loose, rust, scales and any coatings that will reduce bond.
4-8 CONSTRUCTION
A. Workmanship
1. Masonry work shall not be started when the horizontal and vertical alignment of the foundation has a
maximum total error of 25 mm OR 2.5 centimeters.
2. All masonry work shall be laid true to line, level, plumb and neat in accordance with the plans and to
the satisfaction of the Owner.
3. Units shall be cut accurately to fit all plumbing ducts, openings electrical works, etc., and all holes
shall be neatly patched.
4. Extra care shall be taken to prevent visible grout mortar stain.
5. No construction supports shall be attached to the wall except where specifically permitted by the
supervising Architect or Engineer.
B. Masonry Unit
1. Masonry unit shall be sound, dry, clean and free from cracks when placed in the structure.
2. All masonry units shall be stored on the job and kept off the ground and protected from the elements
of weather.
3. Wetting the units shall not be permitted except when hot dry weather exists causing the units to be
warm to the touch, and then the surface only may be wetted with a light fog spray.
4. Proper masonry units shall be used to provide for all window, doors, bond beams, lintels, plasters,
etc., with a minimum of unit cutting.
Page 13 of 120
5. Where masonry units cutting necessary, all cuts shall be neat and true to line.
6. Mixing of Mortar and Grout Mortar shall be mixed by placing 1.2 of the water and sand in the
operating mixer, then add the cement, lime and the remainder of the sand and water.
7. Mortar should be re-tampered with water as required to maintain high plasticity. Re-tampering on
mortar boards shall be done only by adding water within a basin formed with mortar and the mortar
re-worked into the water.
8. Any mortar which is unused after 1-1/2 hours from the initial mixing time shall not be used.
9. After all ingredients are in the batch mixer, they shall be mechanically mixed for not less than 3
minutes. Hand mixing shall not be employed unless specifically approved.
C. Bonding
Concrete masonry units shall be laid with the thicker edge of the core up to provide a wider mortar
bed.
1. Both face core and ends of all blocks should receive a full bed of mortar.
2. Cross web should be mortared.
3. For bonding masonry to the foundation, the top surface of the concrete foundation shall be clean with
laitance removed and aggregate exposed before masonry construction can be started.
4. Where no bond pattern is shown, the wall shall be laid up in straight, uniform coarse with regular
running bond.
5. Intersecting masonry walls and partitions shall be bounded by the use of steel ties at 60 centimeter
on center.
D. Reinforcement
1. Dowels shall be grouted into a core in vertical alignment, even though it is an adjacent cell to the
vertical wall.
2. Reinforcing bars shall be straight except for bends around corners and where bends or hooks are
detailed on the plans.
3. Reinforcing steel shall be lapped 30 bar diameters minimum where spliced bars shall be separated by
one bar diameter or wired together.
4. Vertical bars shall be held in position at the top and bottom and at intervals not exceeding 192
diameter of the reinforcement.
5. Horizontal reinforcing bars shall be laid on the webs of the units in continuous masonry courses,
consisting of bond-beam or channel units, and shall be solidly grouted in place.
6. Vertical reinforcing steel shall have a minimum clearance of 6 mm from the masonry, and not less
than one bar diameter between bars.
7. Wire reinforcement shall be completely embedded in mortar or grout. Joints with wire reinforcement
shall be at least twice the thickness of the wire.
8. Wire reinforcement shall be lapped at least 16 cm. At slices and shall contain at least one cross wire
each piece of reinforcement in the lapped distance.
E. Grouting
Reinforcing steel shall be secured in place and inspected before grouting starts.
1. Mortar dropping should be kept out of the grout space.
2. All grout shall be puddle or vibrated in place.
3. Vertical cells to be filled with grout shall have vertical alignment to maintain a continuous
unobstructed core space.
4. Cells containing reinforcement shall be solidly filled with grout and pours shall be stopped 3.8
centimeter below the top of a coarse to form a key at pour joints.
5. Grouting of beams over openings shall be done in continuous operation.
6. The tops of unfilled cell columns under a horizontal masonry beam shall be covered with metal latch
or special units used to confine the front fill to the beam section.
7. All bolts, anchors, or inserts in the wall shall be solidly grouted in place.
8. Spaces around metal door frame and other built-in items shall be filled solidly with grout of mortar.
4-9 REJECTION
In case the shipment fails to conform to the specified requirements, the Contractor may sort it, and
new specimen shall be selected by the Owner or his supervising Engineer for the retained lot and tested at
the expense of the Contractor. In case the second set of specimens fails to conform with the test
requirements, the entire lot shall be rejected.
MASONRY FINISH
(A) CEMENT PLASTER
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The Contractor shall furnish all cement plaster materials, labor, tools and equipment required in
undertaking cement plaster finish as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specifications.
5F-1 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 14 of 120
Manufactures materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer’s original unbroken packages or
containers which are labeled plainly with the manufacturer’s name and trademark.
1. Cement – Cement shall be Portland Hydraulic Cement of any approved brand.
2. Hydrated Lime – shall conform with the requirements as defined in Hydraulic Cement of any
approved brand.
3. Fine Aggregates – Fine Aggregates (sand) shall be clean, washed and sharp river sand, free from
dirt, clay, organic matter or other deleterious substances.
Sand derived from crushed gravel or stone may be used with the supervising Architect or Engineer’s
approval but in no case, shall such sand be derived from stone unsuitable for use as coarse aggregates.
5F-2 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
a. Mixture
1. Mortar mixture for brown coat shall be freshly prepared and uniformly mixed in the proportion by
volume of one Portland Cement, three (3) parts sand and one fourth (1/4) part hydrated lime.
2. Finish coat shall be pure Portland Cement properly graded and mixed with water to approved
consistency and plasticity.
B. Surface Preparation
1. After removal of forms, reinforced concrete surfaces shall be roughened to improve adhesion of the
cement plaster.
2. Surface to receive cement plaster shall be cleaned of all projections, dust, loose particles, grease and
bond beakers.
3. Before any application of brown coat is started, all surfaces that are to be plastered shall be wetted
thoroughly with clean water to produce a uniformly moist condition.
4. Brown coat mortar mix shall be applied with sufficient pressure starting from the lower portion of the
surface to fill the grooved and to prevent air pockets in the reinforced concrete/masonry work and
avoid mortar mix dropping.
5. The brown coat shall be lightly scratch before surface has properly set and allowed to cure.
6. Finish coat shall not be applied until after the brown coat has seasoned for 7 days and corrective
measures had been done by the Contractor on surfaces that are defective.
7. Just before the application of the finish coat, the brown coat surface shall be evenly moistened with
clean water.
8. Finish coat shall be floated first to a true and even surface, then toweled in a manner that will force
the mixture to penetrate into the brown coat.
9. Surfaces applied with finish coat shall then be smooth with paper or foam in a vertical motion to
remove trowel marks, checks and blemishes.
10. All cement plaster finish shall be 10 mm thick minimum on vertical concrete and or masonry walls.
Wherever indicated on the Plans to be “Simulated Red Brick Finish, the Contractor shall render brick
design on plaster surface before brown coat had properly set and then allowed to dry.
Cement plaster shall not be applied directly to:

a. Concrete or masonry surface that had been coated with bituminous compound and,
b. Surface that had been painted or previously plastered.
3. Workmanship
a. Cement plaster finish shall be true to details and plumbed. Finish surface shall have no
visible junction marks where one day'’ work adjoins the other.
b. Where directed by the Architect or Engineer or as shown on the Plans vertical and horizontal
groove joints shall be 25 mm wide and 10 mm depth.
5F-3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

a. All cement plaster finish shall be measured in square meters or part thereof for work actually
completed in the building.
b. The Work quantified and determined as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at
the Contract Unit Price which price constitute full compensation including labor, materials,
tools and equipment and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
(H) PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER FINISH
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The Contractor shall furnish all materials, tools, equipment and labor required in undertaking the
proper application of plain cement plaster finish as provided where plastering is noted on the drawings and
schedules.
Plastering work shall be properly coordinated with the work of other trades.
1. The work of other trades shall be adequately protected from damages during the plastering
operations. Finishing work shall be protected with a covering of heavy craft, waterproof paper or other
approved protective covering with lapped and sealed joints.
2. Scaffolding shall be amply strong, well braced, tied securely and inspected regularly. Overloading of
scaffolding will not permitted.
5H-1 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 15 of 120
1. Portland Cement shall conform with the standard specifications of the ASTM 1-150, type-1, latest
edition.
2. Hydrated lime shall conform with the standard specifications of the ASTM C-6, latest edition.
3. Sand shall be hard, sharp, well washed, siliceous, clean and free from deleterious material.
4. Water shall be fresh, clean and free from organic matter, acids and alkali.
5H-2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Manufactured materials shall be delivered with unbroken packages or container which are plainly
labeled with the manufacturer’s name and brand. All cement materials shall be kept dry until ready for use.
They shall be stored off the ground, under cover and away from sweating walls and other damp
surfaces.
5H-3 MIXTURE
1. Plaster materials, specified on a volume basis, shall be measured accurately in an approved

containers that will insure the specified proportion.
2. Measuring materials with shovels or shovel count will not be permitted.
3. Mortar for brown coat shall be mixed in the proportion by volume of 1 part Portland cement 3 parts
sand, and ¼ part hydrated lime.
4. Mortar for finish coat shall be the same as specified for brown coats, except that the proportions of
sand shall be increased to not more than 4 parts.
5H-4 APPLICATION
All surfaces to receive plaster shall be cleaned of all projections, dust, loose particles, grease bond
breakers and other foreign matter.
1. Plaster shall not be applied directly to concrete of masonry surfaces that have been painted or
previously plastered.
2. Before the plastering work is started, masonry surfaces shall be wetted thoroughly with a fog spray of
clean water to produce a uniformly moist condition.
3. Brown coat – shall be applied with sufficient pressure to fill the grooves in hollow block or concrete to
prevent air pockets and secure a good band.
4. The brown coat – shall be lightly scratched and broomed. Each coat of cement plaster shall be kept
moist for 48 hours after application and then allowed to dry.
5. Finish Coat – shall not be applied until after the brown coat has seasoned for 7 days.
a. Dust before the application of the finish coat.

b. The brown coat shall again be evenly moistened with a fog spray.
c. The finish coat shall be floated first to a true and even surface then troweled in a manner that
will force the sand particles down into the plaster.
d. Plastered surfaces shall be smooth and free from rough areas, troweled marks, checks and
blemishes.
e. Thickness of the plaster shall be 10 mm (3/8”) to 12 mm (1/2”) on vertical concrete and on
masonry.
5H-5 WORKMANSHIP
Plaster work shall be finished level, plumb, square and true to line within a tolerance of 3 mm (1/8”) in
3.00 meters without waves, cracks, blisters, pits, crazing, discolorations, projects and other imperfections.
1. Plaster work shall be formed carefully around angles, contours, and well-up to screeds.
2. Special care shall be taken to prevent sagging and consequent dropping of mortar during
applications.
3. There shall be no visible junction marks in the final coat where on day work adjoins the other.
5H-6 PATCHING, PAINTING AND CLEANING
1. Upon completion of the building, and when directed, all loose, cracked, damage or defective parts
shall be cut out and re-plastered in a satisfactory and approved workmanlike manner.
2. All painting and patching of plastered surfaces and plaster work abutting or adjoining any other finish
work, shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner.
3. Plaster drops or spatter shall be removed from all surfaces. Exposed plastered surfaces shall be left
in a clean, unblemished condition ready to receive paint or other finish.
4. After the work has done, all protective coverings of cement finishes shall be removed from the floors.
All rubbish and debris shall be removed from the building.
CARPENTRY AND JOINERY WORKS
SCOPE OF WORK
The work to be done under this Item consist of furnishing all required materials, fabricated woodwork,
tools, equipment and labor and performing all operations necessary for the satisfactory completion of all
carpentry and joinery works in strict accord with applicable drawings, details and these Specifications.
A. Lumber
Lumber of the different species herein specified for the various parts of the structure shall be well
seasoned, sawn straight, sun-dried or kiln-dried and free from defects such as loose and unsound knots,
pitch, pockets, sapwood, cracks and other imperfections impairing its strength, durability and appearance.
Page 16 of 120
B. Grades of Lumber and Usage
1. Stress grade Lumber – is seasoned, close-grained and high quality lumber of the specified specie,
free from defects and suitable for sustaining heavy load.
2. Stress grade lumber shall be use for wooden structural members subject to heavy loads, and for sub-
floor framing imbedded or in contact with concrete and masonry.
3. Select grade lumber – of the specified specie is generally of high quality of good appearance, without
imperfections, and suitable for use without waste due to defects and suitable also for natural finish.
4. Select grade lumber shall be used for flooring, sidings, fascia and base boards, trims, molding.
Millwork, railings, stairs, cabinet work, shelves, doors, windows and frame of openings.
5. Common grade lumber – has minimum tight medium knot larger than 25 mm in diameter, with
minimal imperfections, without sapwood, without decay, insect holes, and suitable for use with some
waste due to minor defects and suitable also for paint finish.
6. Common grade lumber shall be used for light frameworks for walls and partitions, ceiling joist and
nailers.
C. Lumber Species and Usage
Unless otherwise specified on the Plans, the following lumber species shall be used as indicated:
1. Yacal (Stress grade) for structural member such as posts, girders, girt, sleepers door and window
frames set or in contact with concrete or masonry.
2. Guijo (select grade) for door and window frames set in wooden framework, for stair, for roof framing
supporting ceramic or cement tiles, for floors and other wooden structural parts.
3. Apitong (common grade) for roof framing supporting light roofing materials such as galvanized iron,
aluminum or asbestos sheet, for wall framing, ceiling joists, hangers and nailers.
4. Tanguile (select grade) for doors and windows, fascia and base boards, trims, moldings, mill work,
railings, stairs, cabinet, shelves, flooring and sidings.
5. Narra (select grade) for stairs railings, flooring boards, cabinet work, mill work, doors and windows
when indicated or when indicated in the plan.
D. Moisture Content
1. Rough Lumber for framing and siding boards shall be air-dried or sun-dried such that its moisture
content shall not exceed 22 percent.
2. Dressed lumber for exterior and interior finishing for doors and windows, millwork, cabinet work and
flooring boards shall be kiln dried having no moisture content in excess of 14 percent at the time of its
installation.
E. Substitution in Lumber Specie
1. Any lumber equally good for the purpose intended may be substituted for the specified kind subject to
the prior approval of the supervising Architect or Engineer. Provided that the substitution shall be
equal or better specie acceptable to the supervising Architect.
2. In case of substitution with better specie, no additional cost therefore shall be allowed to the
Contractor.
F. Plywood
Plywood shall be of good grade and made of laminated wood strips bonded together with water
resistant resin glue.
1. The laminated glue core shall be finished both faces with select grade tan guile, red lauan veneers or
equivalent not less than 2 mm thick, similarly bonded to the core.
2. The plywood of not less than 19 mm thick shall be free from defects such as split in veneer, buckling
or warping and shall conform to the requirements of the Philippine Trade Standards 631-02.
3. Thickness of a single layer of laminate shall not be less than 2 mm. The laminate shall be
superimposed in layers with grains crossing at right angles in successive layers to produce stiffness.
4. The face veneers shall be rotary cut from selected grade timber. The laminate and face veneers shall
be bonded with water resistant resin glue, hot pressed and pressure treated.
5. Ordinary tan guile, red lauan, palosapis or equivalent grade with good quality face veneers, 6 mm
thick shall be used for double walling and ceiling not exposed to moisture.
6. Waterproof or marine plywood shall be used for ceiling exposed to moisture such as at toilets and
eaves, and ceiling to be finished with acrytex.
G. Lawanit or Hariflex
1. Lawanit or Hardiflex when required in the plan shall be 6 mm and 8 mm thick respectively, tempered
or oil impregnated for moisture/water resistance.
2. Texture of Lawanit or Hardiflex shall be subject to the approval of the supervising Architect or
Engineer.
H. Materials Other than Lumber
1. Plastic Sheet
When required for counter top, plastic sheet such as formica shall not be less than 1.50 mm thick and
shall have hard, durable and glossy surface resistant to stain, abrasion and heat. Color and design shall be as
selected from the manufacturer’s standard and approval with water for extended period.
Page 17 of 120
2. Glue
Shall be from water resistant resins which, upon hardening, shall not dissolved nor lose its bond or
holding power even when soaked with water for extended period.
Glue in powder form shall be in sealed container and shall be without evidence of lumping or
deterioration in quality.
3. Fasteners
Nails, screw, bolts and straps shall be provided and used where suitable for fixing carpentry and
joinery works. All fasteners shall be brand new and of adequate size to ensure rigidity of connections.
Nails of adequate size shall be steel wire, diamond-pointed steel with shank and bright finish.
Screw of adequate size shall be cadmium or bass plated steel with slotted head.
Lag Screw of adequate size, for anchoring heavy timber framing in concrete or masonry, shall be
galvanized steel.
Bolts and Nuts shall be of steel having yield point of not less than 245 Mpa. Bolts shall have square
heads and provided with standard flat steel washers and hexagonal nuts. And provided with standard
flat steel washers and hexagonal nuts.
Threads shall conform to American coarse thread series. The threaded portion shall be long enough
such that the nut can be tightened against the bolted members with out any need for blocking.
The threaded bolt shall be finished smooth for ease of engaging and turning of nut.
Wrought Iron Straps or Angles, when required in conjunction with bolts or lag screws to provide
proper anchorage shall be of the shape and size shown on Plans.
7-2 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
1. Quality of Materials
All materials to be incorporated in the carpentry and joinery works shall be of approved quality as
specified. Before using all materials shall have been inspected and accepted by the supervising Architect or
Engineer.
2. Storage and Protection of Materials

a. Lumber and other materials shall be protected from dampness during and after delivery at the
site.
b. Materials shall be delivered well in advance of actual need and in adequate quantity to
preclude delay in the work.
c. Lumber shall be piled in orderly stack at least 15.0 cm. above the ground and at sheltered
place where it will be of least obstruction to work.
3. Shop Drawing
Complete Shop Drawings with essential dimensions and details of construction, as may be required
by the supervising Architect or Engineer in connection with carpentry and joinery work, shall be submitted for
approval before proceeding with the work.
4. Rough Carpentry
Rough carpentry covers timber structural framing for roof, flooring, siding, partition and ceiling.
a. Framing shall be stress grade or common grade lumber of the specie specified. Rough
carpentry shall be done true to lines, levels and dimensions. It shall be squared, aligned,
plumbed and well fitted at joints.
b. Trusses and other roof framings shall be assembled, fitted and set to exact location and slope
indicated on the Plans.
c. Fasteners, connectors and anchors of appropriate type, size and number shall be provided
and fitted where necessary.
d. Structural members shall not be cut, bored or notched for the passage of conduits or pipes
without prior approval of the supervising Architect or Engineer.
e. Members damages by such cutting or boring shall be reinforced by means of specifically
formed and approved steel plates or shapes. Otherwise, damaged structural members shall
be removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the Architect or Engineer.
f. Timber framing in contact with concrete or masonry shall be treated with termite proofing
solution and after drying coated with bituminous paint.
5. Finished Carpentry
Finished carpentry covers work on flooring, siding and ceiling boards, stairs, cabinets, fabricated
woodwork, millwork and trims.
a. Framing lumber shall be select grade, free from defects and where exposed in finished work,
shall be selected for color and grain.
Page 18 of 120
b. Joints of framing shall be tenoned, mortised or doweled where suitable, closely fitted and
secured with water resistant resin glue. Exterior joints shall be mitered and interior angles
coped.
c. Panels shall be fitted to allow for construction or expansion and insure that the panels remain
in place without warping, splitting and opining of joints.
d. Exposed edges of plywood or plywood for cabinets shall be provided with select grade
hardwood strips, rabbetted as necessary, glued in place and secured with finishing nails. To
prevent splitting, hardwood for trims shall be drilled before fastening with nails or screws.
e. Fabricated woodwork shall be done preferably at the shop. It shall be done true to details and
profiles indicated on the Plans.
f. Where set against concrete or masonry, woodwork shall be installed after curing is
completed.
g. Exposed wood surfaces shall be free from disfiguring defects such as raised grains, stains,
uneven planning, sanding, tool marks and scratches.
h. Exposed surfaces shall be machine or hand sanded to an even smooth surface, ready for
finish.
6. Fasteners
a. Nails – Shall not be driven closer together than one half their length unless driven in bored
holes, or closer to the edge of the timber than one quarter their length.
b. Nails shall penetrate by at least half their length into the timber farthest from the head. End
distance, edge distance and spacing of nails shall be such as to avoid splitting of the wood.
c. Lag Screw – shall be set into pre-bored lead holes and not driven. The lead hole for the hank
shall have the same diameter as the shank and the same depth as the unthreaded portion of
the shank.
d. The Lead hole for the threaded portion shall have a diameter equal to about 75% of the
diameter of the shank and the same length as the threaded portion.
e. Lengths of bolts – shall be enough to extend through the nut and an allowance for nut
tightening.
f. All nuts shall be accessible for servicing by wrenches.
g. Bolts shall be set into drill holes suitably sized enough for snug fit.
7. Pressure Treated Lumber and Plywood
a. Lumber, plywood and ply board specified a treated with wood preservative shall be pressure
treated with water borne preservative as Wolman Salt, Boliden Salt or Tanalith H-R.
b. Pressure treatment shall meet the standards set by the American Wood Preservers
Association per publication C 2-77, or the Philippine Trade Standards PTS 243-02.00 as to
penetration and amount of chemicals retained in the treated lumber.
c. Final retention of chemicals in the wood shall be a minimum of 5.6 lg/m3
d. Pressure treated lumber shall be accompanied by a certification of pressure treatment from
the wood preserving plant as to the pressure treatment, sizes and quantity of wood treated.
e. Notwithstanding the presentation of said certification, the supervising Architect or Engineer
may require physical inspection and undertake boring to ascertain penetration of preservative
into the wood.
f. Each boring should show penetration of not less than 2.5 centimeters.
8. Rat Proofing
a. Enclosed hollow spaces between wooden flooring and ceiling and between double sidings or
partitions shall be made rat proof in accordance with Department of Health Requirements.
b. Hollow space between wooden flooring and ceiling shall be rendered rat-proof by laying
continuous strips of galvanized iron sheet or 10 mm wire mesh, about 25 cm wide and
centered along floor plates or sills of partitions and exterior walls.
c. The rat proofing strips shall be sandwiched between floor joist/plates and sills of partitions or
sidings. The strips shall be nailed to the top of joists as well as to underside of sills and floor
boards
d. This part of the rat proofing may be omitted whenever it is clear that an equally effective
protection is provided by concrete or tile floors or by the upper surface of reinforced concrete
or steel directly supporting the sidings.
e. All exterior openings between adjoining floor joist and girders or beam that might give rats
direct access into the hollow space inside, shall when not closed by fascia board or the like,
be covered with strips of the same rat proofing material of sufficient size to close entirely the
opening in question.
f. Double sidings or partitions as well as furred posts are made rat proof by lining the inner face
of the board or panel sheeting with continuous vertical strips of the aforementioned rat
proofing material up to a height of at least 30 cm from the base of the partition, siding or
furred post. The lower edge of the rat proofing sheet shall be in contact with the floor
throughout its entire length.
HARDWARE
SCOPE OF WORK
Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installing all building hardware required to ensure rigidity of
joints or connections of the different parts of the structure and equipment in a satisfactory operating condition
Page 19 of 120
parts of the structure such as doors, windows, cabinets, lockers, drawers and other similar operating parts as
indicated on he plans and in accordance with this Specifications.
8-1 GENERAL CONDITIONS
1. The contractor shall provide all rough hardware required for the completion of the work, including
nails, spikes, bolts, log screws, etc., and shall provide and fit in place all finishing hardware
hereinafter specified – put on in the most improved manner with screws to match the finish.
2. The contractor shall provide and fit in place all hardware not herein specifically mentioned but
necessary to leave the work complete. All such hardware should there be any, shall conform in every
respect to the balance of the hardware herein specified.
3. Finishing hardware, suitable to the service required to fully equip in the most satisfactory operative
condition, for all doors, windows transom sashes, screen doors and windows, closet, built-in cabinets
counters, drawers, lockers and other operating members through out the project shall be furnished
and installed or fitted b the Contractor.
4. Where the exact types of hardware specified are not adoptable to the finishing, shape or size of
members requiring the hardware, suitable types having as applicable the same operation and quality
as the corresponding individual types specified shall be furnished.
A. Rough Hardware
All rough hardware such as nails, screws, lag screws, bolts and other related fasteners required for
carpentry work shall be first class quality and locally available.
B. Finishing Hardware
All finishing hardware consisting of locksets, latches, bolts and other devices, door closers, knobs,
handles, hinges and other similar hardware shall be first class quality available locally and conforming with
the following Specifications.
1.Door Locksets
Door locks appropriate for particular functions shall be of durable construction, preferably the product
of reputable manufacturer for consistent quality and master keying.
2. Cylindrical lockset for swing wood door shall of sturdy construction & knobs, latch, strike & pin tumbler
assembly shall be cast brass or bronze. The spring & spindle shall be assembly shall be cast brass or bronze.
The spring & spindle shall be steel, zinc coated. The pins & the key, shall be nickel – silver. The latch, w/ a
minimum throw of 16 mm, shall be retracted by knob from either side except when the outside knob is locked
by key in the outside knob or by the turn / push button on the inside knob.
3. Mortise lock for swing door shall have cast bronze latch bolt w/ steel compression spring, cast bronze
dead bolt w/ hardened steel inserts wrought bronze or brass knobs heavy gauge & cold formed steel
operation levers. The pin tumbler cylindrical assembly shall be cast bronze or brass & fitted w/ 5 spring
pressed nickel silver pins. Mortise lock used in conjunction w fire exits bolts shall have armored fronts.
4. Unit of monolock for swing door shall be factory assembled in one piece, w/ knobs & escutcheons
attached, ready for installation, All parts of unit lock shall be non – ferrous metal. Frame shall be one piece
cast bronze or extrude brass, front shall be flat for door 35 mm thick & beveled for door 45 mm thick, & latch
bolt shall be extruded brass w/ 5 spring – pressed pins & keys shall be nickel silver.
5. Dead lock for sliding door shall be mortise or surface mounted type to suit particular application.
6. Mortise type dead lock shall have cast bronze case, front, latch bolts, strike & cylinder. Operation of dead
bolt shall be by drop handles from either side. When locked by key from outside, or by thumb knob from
inside, drop handle will not operate the dead bolt.
7. Surface type deadlock shall have cast bronze case, strike & cylinder. Interlocking vertical bolt shall be
hardened steel operated by key from outside & thumb turn from inside. Strike shall be angle type.
8. Deadlock for swinging door shall be tubular design w/ mechanism made of heavy gauge cold = rolled
steel, zinc coated & dischromated. Dead bolt, strike & pin tumbler cylinder shall be bronze. Dead bolt, w/ @
least 25 mm throw, shall be operated by key from outside & thumb from inside.
8. Lock for door of emergency / fire exit ( panic hardware ) shall be cast bronze or brass & heavy duty locking
device coupled w/ a horizontal crossbar. Latch shall be operated by key from outside & by crossbar from
inside. Locking device shall be surface or mortise type suitable for a particular application. Inactive leaf of
double doors or emergency / fire exit shall be fitted w/ vertical rod actuated by crossbars, such vertical rod
providing two point locking, bottom & overhead.
9. Lock for drawers & cabinets shall be bronze or brass w/ latch operated by key through a pin – tumbler
cylinder 22mm in diameter. Back plate of the lock shall be provided w/ four screw holes for mounting.
10. Hasp lock, when required as indicated on the Plans shall be hinge hasp w/ integral padlock. The hinge
hasp shall be zinc coated wrought
Page 20 of 120
a. All door closer shall be cast bronze provided with a key valve or cap valve for making
necessary adjustment.
b. The following table shall serve as guide in determining door closer sizes.
Door Maximum Width Size of Closer

76 cm. - Size 2
90 cm. - Size 3
107 cm. - Size 4
120 cm. - Size 5
137 cm. - Size 6
Use larger size where unusual conditions exist.
11. Hinge
Hinge unless otherwise indicated on the Plans shall be brass coated wrought iron steel for interior
doors and wrought bronze for exterior doors with non rising loose steel pins with button tips and mounting
screws of the same materials.
12. Sliding Door Hardware

a. Track is of rolled steel formed steel or extruded aluminum.
b. Bearing is of plain steel balls or steel rollers.
c. Wheels to be steel, brass, rubber o plastic as the case maybe.
13. Make
a. The plate numbers herein given designates the quality and style as to the type, design,
operation, materials and finish or hardware designated.
b. Any other hardware equally good, may be substituted only in cases of urgent necessity and
subject to the written approval of the supervising Architect or Engineer.
14. Finish
Unless otherwise shown or specified on plans, exposed surfaces shall have the following Standard
Finishes.
a. Polished, bright brass or Bronze. Bronze surfaces exposed on exterior of building not
specified to have US 26 finished.
b. US 26 polished chromium plated over nickel or brass. Brass or bronze surfaces exposed in
toilets, lavatory and shower rooms and all others in the interior of the building.
c. USP Prime coated for painting. Ferrous metal surfaces, unless zinc coated.
15. Fastenings
Fastenings of suitable size, quality and type shall be provided to secure hardware in position.
Machine screws and expansion shields shall be provided for securing items of hardware to concrete, brick tile
or masonry instead of wood screws.
16. Exposed Items of Hardware

a. After hardware has been properly fitted, all expose items such as knobs platters, pulls, locks,
etc., shall be removed until final coat of painters finish has been applied and then hardware
installed.
b. Other items of hardware, unless to be painted over that are not to be removed before painting
shall be properly marked or completely covered until final coat of painter’s finish has been
applied, after which such protective cover shall be removed.
8-3 PLACING ORDER OF HARDWARE
1. The contractor shall place his order for all hardware early in order to avoid delay in the job.
2. No request for extension of time shall be entertained by the Owner due to this delay and
3. No substitution of hardware shall be allowed due to negligence of contractor on this matter.
a. DOOR knobs, and Latch Strikes
1. All lock and latch strikes shall be installed in door frames at the same height from the floor.
2. Door knobs shall be located so that the center of the knob is 95 centimeters from the finished floor
and or as directed by the supervising Architect or Engineer.
B. Butt Hinges
1. Each panel of hinged doors shall be hung on two (2) butts for doors 1.50 m. or less in height.
2. three 93) butts, over 1.50 m. high and not over 2.10 m. Four (4) butts above 2.10 m. in height
3. Doors of a greater height than 2.10 m. unless otherwise specified shall be hung on an additional one
butt for each65 centimeters or fraction thereof.
Thickness of door Width of Door Size of Butt Hinges

21 or 25 mm (7/8-1”) - 90 cm. - 63 mm (2-1/2”)
28 mm (1-1/8”) - 90 cm. - 75 x 75 mm (3”x3”)
35 mm (1-3/8”) - 90 cm. - 88 x 88 mm (3-1/2)
44 mm (1-3/4”) - 90 cm. - 100 x 100 mm (4”x4”)
56 mm x 63 mm. - 90 cm. - 125 x 125 mm (5”x5”)
Page 21 of 120
The shower doors shall be governed by the above schedule for hinges.
4. Where the size of the butt hinges is not sufficient to allow door to clear door trim in open position,
same shall be increased.
C. Counters, Shelves, Cabinets, Lockers, etc.
1. Other hardware not covered by previous specifications for all wooden counters, shelves, cabinets,
drawers, cabinets doors, closet doors, cup board, or wall cabinet, glass showcases, storage shelves,
work tables, lockers and all other woodwork and interior finishing of similar nature indicated on plans
are included in this contract.
2. it shall be done in accordance with detail drawings and full size details which shall be requested by
the Contractor from the supervising Architect or Engineer, well ahead of their installation.
3. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary hardware for all the above work, complete and
suitable to he service required to fully equip them in very satisfactory operative condition in strict
accordance with this section of the Specifications and the applicable drawings
4. All modifications in hardware required be reason of construction indicated, shall be made o provide
specific operative functional requirements.
5. All hinge that are needed shall be steel brass plated and of the size suitable for the purpose. Use
Hager, Stanly, Kwikset or corbin or an approved equivalent.
6. All necessary hardware for all woodwork specified above such as bolts, automatic catches, cylinder
locks, drawer pulls, cabinet and closet door pull knots, push or cover plates, strikes, holder,
indicators, push or pull bars, drawer locks, etc., shall be cast bronze or brass chromium finished in
accordance with the specifications.
7. Their sizes shall be suitable for the purpose approved by the Owner or in accordance with those
shown and specified in the full size details.
8. Schedule of all hardware to be purchased by the Contractor shall be submitted first to the supervising
Architect or Engineer for approval before ordering them.
All hardware shall be brought to the job in original package. Samples shall accompany schedules.
D. Butt Hinges Make
For all doors on Butt Hinges, unless otherwise specified, use bottom stop butts, hanger, Sanley,
Kwikset or approved equivalent highly polished and plated with non raising pin for door opening outside.
E. Bar Doors
Provide and fit a set “Lawson Universal” gravity pivot type hinges No.4604 nickel polished finish for
each bar door in all toilet rooms. Approved equivalent, locally made of this type will be acceptable.
F. Cabinet Door Catch and Pull

1. Each cabinet door sash shall be provided its a door pull, Corbin No. 4374, extruded brass, chrome
finish, or approved equivalent.
2. cabinet doors with locks shall be provided with elbow catches, Corbin No. 01634 cast bronze or
approved equal on the inactive sash.
3. Cabinet doors not provided with locks shall be provided and fitted with fraction catches.
4. Sliding cabinet doors shall be provided with drawer pulls of the flush type, cast brass or bronze.
G. Drawer Pull and Locks

1. Each drawer shall be provided with pulls of the type specified for cabinet doors.
2. The Contractor shall provide and set complete, ready for operation, one pin tumbler cylinder lock of
the medium of standard type, for each door in accordance with the schedule below.
3. U.S. Standard finishes as specified shall apply to all locks used “Russwin, Yale, Corbin, Waiser,
Schlage of the Standard type, or the approved equivalent.
4. The trade mark and plate numbers given herein are to designate only the quality, type, operation,
materials, a style or design required.
5. Schedule of Locksets: (In this Item, specify the name of door lock as to the brand, serial number,
color, and what particular door is to be installed such as: main door, rest room, toilet, etc.)
H. Master Key and Grand Master Key
1. All door lock shall be Master keyed as stated on the above schedule of lockset and grand master
keying for the whole building.
2. Before placing the purchase order for door locks, it shall comply with the manufacturers requirements
regarding the master keying for the locks.
3. The keying for this project shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Owner:
4. Supply of keys:
D-1 Grand Master Key - 6 each

D-2 Master Key - 3 each
D-3 Keys for each lock - 3 each
As specification writer, you can make your own specification as to the number, qualify and type. This
is only a guide how you will prepare your specifications.
5. Other doors not included in this schedule, but necessary to leave the works complete, shall be
provided and fitted complete, by the Contractor with one lockset suitable to the service required and
depending under which type and finish of each door lock, shall be classified by the Architect or
Engineer.
GLASS AND GLAZING
Page 22 of 120
SCOPE OF WORK
This Item consist of furnishing all glass and glazing materials, labor, tools, plant and equipment
required in undertaking the proper installation as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this
Specification.

All glass and glazing materials shall be delivered at jobsite with labels affixed indicating quality, make,
type and thickness. Each glass in glazed position shall resist a design pressure of 244 kilograms per square
meter.
A. Plate Glass
Plate glass shall be manufactured from float glass that is mechanically rounded and polished and
sealed with a coating of silver and a uniform film of electrolytic copper plating, then applied with protective
coating of paint to seal out moisture from the silver. Use where good vision is required.
B. Float Glass
These basic types of glass shall be manufactures by floating continuous ribbon of molten glass into a
bath of molten tin where it is reheated to obtain a flat fire polished finish and annealed slowly to produce a
transparent float glass eliminating grinding and polishing.
Variation of this basic types are:
Grade AA- Intended for use were superior quality is required.

Grade A- Intended for selected glazing.
Grade B- Intended for general glazing.
Greenhouse quality- Intended for greenhouse glazing where quality is not very important.
C. Glazing Materials
1. Glazing materials for glass installation may be:
a. Bulk compound such as mastic that are elastic and non-skinning compound.
b. Putties- wood sash putty, or metal sash quality.
c. Sealant- shall be chemically compatible with setting blocks, edge blocks and sealing tapes.
2. Performed Sealant such as:

a. Synthetic polymer- shall be base sealant that is resilient or non-resilient type.
b. Performed Gasket- shall be compression or structural type.
3. Setting and Edge Blocks shall be compression or structural type.
4. Accessories like glazing clips, shims spacer strips etc. shall be made from non-corroding metal
accessories.
D. Schedule of Glass and Mirrors
1. Use 5.6 mm (7/32”) thick sheet glass of locally manufactured clear quality for the following: (unless
otherwise indicated on the Plans as frosted)
a. Aluminum windows and doors, notwithstanding plate glass indicated elsewhere.
b. Jalousie window glass slats
c. Fixed glass louvers
d. Glass panels for partitions and counter door panels, if any
e. Sliding glass doors for cabinets.
2. All glass panels or cabinets, except sliding doors shall be clear glass of locally manufactured float
glass quality, 4.7 mm (3/16”) thick.
3. They shall be clear, except where indicated on the Plans as frosted, diffused or opaque. Same shall
be used for wooden sashes.
4. Unless otherwise noted, clear glass that are locally manufactured shall be used for steel windows:
Use 3.1 mm – 1/8” thick for areas exceeding 60 m2
Use 4.7 mm thick for areas exceeding 60 m2
5. All comfort rooms whether shown or not, the Contractor shall provide and fit securely in place at the
most convenient height above each lavatory one mirror, made from local glazing quality polished
plate glass 6 mm thick with beveled edges and brass chromium plated frame 12 mm thick waterproof
Tan guile marine plywood backing, all in accordance with full size details. Sizes are as follows.
a. Over single lavatories - - 60 cm. X 75 cm

b. For two lavatories - - - 120 cm. X 75 cm.
c. For the three lavatories - - 180 cm. X 75 cm.

1. Safety precaution and procedure shall be observed in determining the sizes and in providing the
required clearances by measuring the actual opening to receive the glass.
2. Movable items or parts shall be kept in a closed and locked position until after the glazing compound
has thoroughly set.
Page 23 of 120
3. All glass sheets shall be bedded, back puttied, secured in place and face puttied. Secure glass in
aluminum frame with non-corrosive clips except where glazing beads are required.
4. Apply putty in a uniformly straight line, with accurately formed bevels and clean cut corners, then,
remove excess putty from glass and frames.
5. Set glass in hollow metal doors and in meal frames of interior partitions in felt channel insets or
bedded in putty to prevent any rattle.
a. Secure glass in wood doors and wooden frames with glazing stops.
b. Secure stops on doors with screws.
6. Glass breakage caused in executing the work or by faulty installation shall be replaced by the
Contractor without extra cost.
7. Improperly installed glass which does install fully meet the requirements of its grade, will not be
accepted and shall be replaced without extra cos.
8. The Contractor shall provide and install complete set ready or use mirrors in all comfort rooms and
elsewhere shown on the Plans. The size and location for each mirror shall be as indicated on the
Plans or as directly by he Architect.
A. Workmanship
1. All glass shall be accurately cut tot fit openings and set with equal bearing on the entire width of
plane.
2. Putty shall be neatly run in straight lines parallel with inside of glazing rebate.
3. Corners shall be carefully made. All excess putty shall be removed and surfaces left clean.
4. Apply a thin layer of putty to rebate and set glass. Apply putty by pressing into a even bed secured.
5. Place spring wire or angle glazing clips and run face putty. Remove excess putty from other side flush
with edge of rebate.
B. Cleaning
Cleaning all glass on both sides after putty has been applied completely. Do not disturb edge of putty
with scraper. At completion of work leave glass and glazing works free from cracks and rattles and clean on
both sides.
1012.3.4 Samples
The Contractor shall submit for approval duplicate sample ( 150 mm x 250 mm ) of each bearing
manufacturer’s label & a can of each type of putty.
This item shall be measured by actual area of glass sheets installed respective of the quality type &
thickness in square meters. The quantified unit of measurement shall be those accepted to the satisfactory of
the Engineer.
The quantities item prescribed in sub – section 1012.4 shall be paid for the unit bid price w/c payment
constitute full compensation for all glass & glazing materials & other facilities, labor & incidentals necessary to
complete this item.
Payment will be made under :
Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
1012 ( a ) Float Glass sq.m.

1012 ( b ) Ordinary window & sheet glass sq.m.
1012 ( c ) Plate Glass ( mirror ) sq.m
TILEWORKS
(A) WOOD TILES
SCOPE OF WORK
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installing of wood tiles on the area indicated on the Plans and
in conformity with this specification.
A-1 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Wood tile flooring shall be Narra, Tan guile, of other approved specie kiln dried of having not more
than fourteen percent (14%) moisture content and of the best quality manufactured locally.
2. Wood tile shall have a minimum dimension of 15.0 x 15.0 x 20.0 cms. Two-ply pieces shall be
prefabricated by the manufacturer into rectangular, square or other block shapes as designed and
secured together by wood splints, set into ends or sides.
Page 24 of 120
3. Adhesive shall be waterproof glue. The consistency of the adhesive shall suit local conditions at the
time of laying out and the quality of the adhesive shall be such as to bind the wood tiles permanently
to the sub-floors.
A-2 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
No tile work shall be starred until plastering of the interior wall surfaces has been completed and
dried; windows and glazing installed; and exterior doors are mounted and completely operational.
A. Installation
1. Before wood tiles are laid, the sub-floors shall be perfectly dry, thoroughly cured, level and true to
lines and elevation as required on the Plans.
2. Wood parquet tiles shall be installed by the manufacturer because this type of job being a specialty
trade need to assure the type of adhesive to be used; the proper equipment and tools; the guarantee
of quality an workmanship and other considerations of which, the following installation instructions
shall be followed strictly.
a. Provide adequate cross ventilation as a drying aid during the installation of the wood tile.
b. Clean thoroughly the area over which wood tile will be installed and make certain that the
surface over which the material will be held is dry.
c. Plan and mark carefully the installation layout.
d. Spread enough adhesive to permit the laying of 3 to 3 wood tile blocks at a time beginning at the
starting lines marked
e. Lay the wood tile on surface coated with adhesive and apply hard pressure to set the materials
firmly. After laying, dampen the gummed paper the pill it off.
f. Adjust when necessary, any individual fillets without decreasing the spacing between individual
fillets.
g. Allow a drying period of 24 hours; then smooth surface using an electric sanding with the proper
number of sand paper grit.
h. Seal all defects exposed upon the process of sanding if manageable, otherwise, the defective
wood tiles shall be removed and replaced with new wood tiles without extra cost.
i. Whenever necessary, scrape carefully with a hand scraper tool and thoroughly sandpaper
smooth works near to walls, corners and other parts which can not be reach by the electric
sanding machine.
B. Precautions
1. Wood tiles shall be laid so as to provide a free open space for expansion around the sides of the
room.
2. such space be equal to 5 mm for each meter in width and or length of room.
3. Clearance between trims and floor shall be at least 1.6 mm. And expansion joints at door ways shall
be covered by saddle.
C. Guarantee
1. The Contractor shall furnish a written notice that work under this Item will be free from defects for a
period of one year from the date of final acceptance of the work.
2. Defects such as cracking, loosening, lifting, cracking bulging, splitting, undue warping and shrinkage
shall be adjusted at the expense of the Contractor.
3. This guaranty will not apply to defects covered by failure of the work of others, if such defects were
impossible to detect at the time of the examination of other works, or defects caused by other than
the wear and tear of normal service.
A-3 MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT
1. All works performed under this Item shall be measured in square meters based on actual wood tile
installed.
2. The quantified area determined and as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the unit
Bid of Contract Unit Price which payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
1019 (a) Narra wood tile sq. m.

1019 (b) Tanguile wood tile sq. m.
1019 (c) Other specie as specified sq. m
(C) CERAMIC TILES
SCOPE OF WORK
Page 25 of 120
This Item shall consist of furnishing all Ceramic Tiles and cementations materials, tools and
equipment including labor required in undertaking the proper installation of walls and floor tiles as shown on
the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
C-1 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Ceramic Tiles
1. Ceramic tiles and trims shall be made clay, or a mixture of clay and other materials which is called the
body of the tile classified by ASTM C-242 as to their degree of water absorption.
2. Ceramic tiles and trims are manufactured either by dust pressed process or by plastic process in
which the clays are made plastic by mixing with water, shaped by extrusion or in molds and then
fired.
B. Glazed Tiles and Trim
1. Glazed tiles and trims shall have an impervious face of ceramic materials fused on to the body of the
tiles and trims.
2. The glazed surface may be clear white or colored depending on the color scheme approved by the
Architect.
3. Standard glaze may be bright (glossy) semi-matte (less glossy) matte (dull) or crystalline (mottled and
textured), good resistance to abrasion.
4. Glazed tiles shall be used for walls. Crystalline glazed tiles may be used for floors provided that these
are used as light duty floors.
C. Unglazed Tiles and Trims
1. Unglazed tiles shall b hard dense tile of homogeneous composition. Its color and characteristics are
determined by the materials used in the body, the method of manufacture and the thermal treatment.
Unless otherwise specified used unglazed tiles for all floors as indicated on the Plans.
2. Trims are manufactured to match wall tile color, texture and to coordinate with it in dimension.
3. These are shaped in various ceramic trim units such as caps, bases, coves, bull-nose, corners,
angles, etc. that are necessary for edging or making a transition between intersecting surfaces
C-2 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Tile work shall not be started until roughing-ins for plumbing, electrical and other trades have been
completed and tested. The work of all other trades shall be protected from any kind damages.
A. Surface Preparation
1. Mortar mix for scratch coat and setting bed shall consist of one part Portland cement ¼ part lime 3
parts sand by volume.
2. Surface to receive tile must be level, true o elevation, dry, free from dirt, oil and other kinds of
ointments.
3. Allow at least seven days curing of scratch coat and setting bed. Installation work shall not be allowed
to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
4. Thoroughly dampen surfaces of masonry or concrete before scratch coat is applied.
5. On masonry surface apply first a thin coat with pressure, then bring it out sufficiently to compensate
for the major irregularities of the surface to a thickness not less than 10 mm at any point.
6. Evenly rake the scratch coat to provide good mechanical key before the mortar mix has fully
hardened.
B. Installation of Ceramic Glazed Wall Tiles
Ceramic tiles shall be soaked in clean water prior to installation for a minimum of one hour.
1. Determine and mark layout of ceramic tiles as to joint location, position of trims and fixtures so as to
minimize cutting less than one half size of the tile.
2. thoroughly dampen surface of wall but not to saturate the surface.
3. Apply a bond coat mix with consistency of cram paste 1.5 mm thick to the wall surface or to the back
of the tile to be laid.
4. Lay the tiles true o profile then exert pressure and tamp tile surface before the bond coat mix has
initially set.
5. Continue with the next tile full tile to be laid and pressed firmly upon the setting bed tamped until flush
and in place of the other tiles.
6. Intersections and returns shall be formed accurately using the appropriate trim.
7. All lines shall be kept straight and true to profiles, plumbed and internal corners rounded using the
appropriate trims.
C. Installation of Verified Unglazed Floor Tiles
1. Before tile is laid to the Floor, surface shall be tested for levelness or uniformity of slope by flooding it
with water. Area where water ponds are filled and leveled, shall be tested again before the setting
bed is applied.
Page 26 of 120
2. Established the lines of borders and center of the walls a the field work in both directions to permit the
pattern to be laid with a minimum cutting of tiles.
3. Clean concrete sub-floor then moisten but do not soak. Then, sprinkle dry cement over the surface
and spread the mortar on the setting bed.
4. Apply and spread mortar mix for setting bed and tamp to assure good bond over the entire area to be
laid with tile.
5. Pitch floor to drain as shown on Plans or as directed by the architect or Engineer.
6. Allow the setting bed to set sufficiently, then spread a bond coat over the surface and lay the tile.
D. Grouting and Pointing
1. Before grouting of joints, tiles shall have been laid in place for at least 24 hours. Grouting mortar
shall be white Portland cement or blended with pigments to acquire the color appropriate for the
ceramic tiles.
2. Grouting mortar shall be applied over the tile by float or squeegee stroke diagonally across the joints.
3. Remove excess mortar with a wet sponge stroked diagonally or in a circular motion after 12-15
minutes.
4. Follow with a barely damp or dry sponge o remove remaining haze while smoothing all grouted joints.
E. Cleaning
1. Cleans ceramic tile surfaces thoroughly as possible upon completion of grouting.

2. Remove all grout haze, observing tile manufacturers recommendations as to use of acid or
Chemical cleaners.
3. Rinse tile thoroughly with clean water before & after using chemical cleaners.
4. Polish surface of tile w/ soft cloth.
1018.3.5 Protection from Construction Dirt
a. Apply a protective coat of neutral cleanser solution diluted w/ water in the proportion of 1:4 or 1
liter cleanser concentrate to 1 gallon water.
b. In addition, cover tile flooring w/ heavy – duty no staining construction paper, taped in place.
c. Just before final acceptance of the work remove paper & rinse protective coat of neutral cleaner from
tile surface. Do not let protective paper get torn or removed.
All works performed under this item shall be measured in square meters for areas actually laid w/
ceramic tiles & accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Ceramic tile work determined & provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for based @ the unit bid
price & payment constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, tools, equipment & other
incidentals necessary to complete this item.
Payment shall be made under :
1018.2.1.1 Glazed tiles & trims sq. m

1018.2.1.2 Unglazed tiles sq. m
Item 1020 – Vinyl Floor Tiles
1020.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all vinyl tiles & fitting accessories, adhesive materials, labor , tools
equipment & the satisfactory performance in undertaking the proper installation of vinyl tile flooring as shown
on the plans & in accordance w/ this Specification.
1020.2 Material Requirements

1020.2.1 Vinyl Tiles
Vinyl tiles shall be of first grade quality measuring 300 mm x 300 mm x 3 mm thick, fully homogeneous,
flexible, resilient & resistant to alkali moisture, grease & oil. The color & design pattern of vinyl tile shall be
uniformly distributed throughout the thickness of the tile.
1020.2.2 Adhesive
Adhesive shall be best suited for tropical application & compatible w/ the vinyl tiles to be installed.
1020.2.3 Seal Polish

Seal polish shall be plastic emulsion suited for the particular type of floor as recommended by the vinyl tile
manufacturer.
1020.3 Construction Requirements

1020.3.1 Installation
Page 27 of 120
1020.3.1.1 General : Installation of the tile shall not commence until the work of other trades, including
painting has been completed. The Contractor shall carefully examine all surfaces over w/c the tiles are to be
set. Floor surfaces that are to receive vinyl tile shall be clean thoroughly, dry, smooth, firm & sound & free
from oil, paint, wax, dirt & any other damaging material.
1020.3.1.2 Tile Laying Design

The tile laying design shall be indicated on Plans & in the colors selected & approved by the Engineer for
each area. All joints shall be parallel to wall lines. Where line patterns of tile run perpendicular to lines of other
tiles, they shall be laid truly @ right angles.
1020.3.1.3 Adhesive
Adhesive shall be applied in accordance w/ the adhesive manufacturer’s printed directions, unless specified
or directed otherwise Smoking, the use of open flames & other sources of ignition are strictly prohibited in the
area where solvent containing adhesive are being used or spread.
1020.3.1.4 Application of the Tile

Start in the center of the room or area & work from the center towards the edges. Keep tile lines & joints
square, symmetrical, tight & even; & keep each floor in a true, level plane except where indicated as sloped.
Vary edge width as necessary to maintain full size tiles in the field but no edge tile shall be less than one half
the field tile size, except where irregular shaped rooms make it impossible.
1020.3.1.5 Cutting
Cut vinyl floor tile to & fit around all permanent fixtures, pipes & outlets. Cut edges, fit & scribe to walls &
partition after flooring has been applied.
1020.3.1.6 Edge Strips

Provide edging strips where flooring terminates @ points higher @ doorways where thresholds are provided.
Edge strip shall be extruded aluminum butty type & beveled @ exposed edges. The top surface of the metal
strips shall be finished flush w/ the tiles. Secure strips @ the end & between @ about 200 mm apart w/
screws. Submit samples of metal strips for approval before application & installation.
1020.3.1.7 Cleaning & Waxing

After the vinyl tiles & accessories are laid & set, it shall be cleaned w/ a cleaner as recommended by the
manufacturer & a cost of approved seal polish.
1020.3.1.8 Protection
After the floor has been waxed, they shall be carefully protected against damage, either w/ heavy building
paper or by keeping traffic off the floors until the area is ready for service.

The actual area in square, linear meters or number of Quantities shall be the basis of payment based on the
unit bid or contract unit price.
1020 Vinyl Floor Tile sq. m or linear meter or No. of places
1023 – Granolithic Marble Work
1023.1 Description
The contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment & incidentals necessary to install granolithic marble
flooring where shown the Plans & specified herein.
1023.2 Material Requirement
The contractor shall submit 300 mm x 300 mm samples of granolithic marble flooring. Included shall be the
details of where & how the divider strips shall be installed.
1023.2.1 Marble Chips ( Granules )
Marble chips shall be standard quarry products of the size & necessary to match the approved samples.
1023.2.2 Portland Cement
White & ordinary Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C 150 Type 1 : & relevant Philippine National
Standard.
1023.2.3 Divider Strips
Divider strips shall be the brass angle type of 3 mm thickness spaced @ 600 mm on centers.
Page 28 of 120
The extent of granolithic flooring areas shall be as indicated in the finish schedule & as shown on the Plans.
The divider strips shall be installed at least 24 hours, prior to application of the granolithic mix w/ the tops
protruding to a minimum of 8 mm above the projected finish floor elevation. Place the granolithic mix & trowel
to level surface. Trowelled surface shall be seeded w/ additional chips it required.
1023.3.2 Curing
The granolithic topping shall be cured a least six ( 6 ) days before grinding or until such time when it has set
sufficiently hard to permit machine grinding or rubbing w/ coarse carborandum grit w/o disclosing any surface
aggregate.
1023.3.3 Surfacing
After curing all granolithic topping surface shall wet & ground w/ electric grinding machine to a smooth & even
surface. Where it is not possible to use electric grinding machine, surface shall be hard – rubbed. Use No. 24
abrasive grit stone for the initial rubbing, then followed by No. 40 abrasive grit stone rubbing, after w/c a light
grouting of white Portland cement paste ( gout ) of creamy consistency as the matrix used in the foreign
matters. It shall be thoroughly wetted w/ potable water before application of scratch coat.
1022.3.2 Type of Mixture
a) For stucco used as acoustical treatment the proportion shall be part cement & three parts acoustical fiber
measured by volume or as recommended by the acoustical fiber measured by volume or as
recommended by the acoustical manufacturer. For exterior & interior walls w/o acoustical treatment the
portion shall be one (1) part cement blended w/ two parts marble dust in the case where white cement is
used but for ordinary gray cement use one ( 1 ) part cement & two parts washed sand w/ ½ part lime
measured by volume.
1022.3.3 Installation or Application Methods
a) Stucco mixture can be applied w/ the use of hard brooms made from coconut material.
b) It can also be applied using sandblasting equipments operation manually or electrical driven machine
compressor.
c) For an impressive architectural ( appearance ) effect the applied surface is slightly troweled before
stucco mix has began to set this surface finish is also called anay finish.
1022.3.4 Workmanship
Stucco finish shall be properly applied true to details, squared & plumbed.
PLUMBING
SCOPE OF WORK
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, tools, equipment and fixtures required as shown on
the Plans for the satisfactory performance of the entire pluming system including installation in accordance
with the latest edition of the National Plumbing Code, and this specification.
All piping materials, fixtures and appliances fitting accessories whether specifically mentioned or not
necessary to complete this Item shall be furnished and installed.
A. Plastic Pipes
1. Unless otherwise specified or shown on drawings all tube pipes to be use this project shall be plastic
or synthetic materials.
2. For rigid of connections, the following shall be used: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC); Chlorinated Polyvinyl
Chloride (CPVC); Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride); Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS);
Polypropylene (PP) and Styrene Rubber Plastic (SR). (uPVC
3. For flexible connections either of the following shall be used: Polyethylene (PE) and Polybutylene
(PB).
4. The PE and PB tubes are in coil form available up to 150 meters long in coil form shall be used for
underground water connections.
5. Plastic pipe shall be of quality made by reputable manufacturers free from defects, and shall be true,
smooth and cylindrical, their inner and outer surfaces being as nearly concentric as practicable.
6. They shall be in all aspect, sound and perfectly molded free from laps, pin holes or other
imperfections and shall be neatly dressed with its end finished reasonably square to their axes.
7. Pipes and fittings for sanitary and potable water lines as approved alternate shall be un plasticized
Polyvinyl chloride Pipes and fittings (uPVC).
8. Pipes and fittings shall be made of virgin materials conforming to Specification requirements defined
in ASTM D-2241 and PNS 65: 1986.
Page 29 of 120
9. Fittings shall be molded type and designed for solvent cement joint connection for water lines and
rubber O-ring seal joint for sanitary lines.
B. Septic Tank
1. The septic tank shall be provided as shown on the Plans including all pipe vents and fittings.
2. Various construction materials such as concrete masonry work shall conform to the corresponding
Items of this Specification.
3. Inlet and outlet pipes shall conform to the latest edition of the National Plumbing Code.
B. Plumbing Fixtures and Fittings
1. All fittings and trimmings for fixtures shall be chromium plated and polished brass unless otherwise
approved.
2. Exposed traps and supply pipes for fixtures shall be connected to the roughing-in, piping system at
the wall unless otherwise indicated on the Plans.
3. Built in fixtures shall be watertight with provision of water supply and drainage outlet, fittings and trap
seal.
4. Unless otherwise specified, all plumbing fixtures shall be made of vitreous china complete with
fittings.
a. Water closet shall be vitreous china, free standing toilet combination, round front bottom
outlet siphon vortex or wash-down bowl with extended rear self and closed coupled tank with
cover complete with fittings and mounting accessories.
b. Lavatory shall be vitreous china, wall hung with rear overflow and cast in soap dishes, pocket,
hanger with integral china brackets, complete with twin faucets, supply pipes, -trap and
mounting accessories.
c. Where indicated on the Plans, the counter top model make and color shall be approved by
the designing Architect.
d. Urinal shall be vitreous china, wall hung wash-out urinal with extended shields and integral
flush spreader, concealed wall hanger pockets, 19 mm top spud complete with fitting and
mounting accessories. Model make and color shall be approved by the designing Architect.
D. Bathroom and Toilet Accessories
1. Shower head and fitting shall be movable, cone type with execution arm complete with stainless steel
shower valve and control lever. All exposed surface to tube chromium finish.
2. Grab bars shall be made of tubular stainless steel pipe provided with safety grip and mounting flange.
3. Floor drains shall be made of stainless steel beehive type, measuring 10 cm x 10 cm. And provided
with detachable stainless strainer, expanded metal lath type.
4. Toilet paper holder shall be vitreous china wall mounted. Color shall reconcile with the adjacent
fixture and facing tiles.
5. Soap holder shall be vitreous china wall mounted. Color shall reconcile with the adjacent tile works.
6. Faucets shall be made of stainless steel for interior use.
7. Hose bibs shall be made of bronze cast finish.
E. Special Plumbing Fixtures
1. Kitchen sink shall be made of stainless steel self rimming, single compartment complete with supply
fittings, strainers traps, dual control lever and other accessories.
2. Laboratory sink shall be made of cash iron metal with white porcelain finish with single compartment,
flat rim edge, 75 x 53 cm. Complete with supply fittings, strainer, trap and other accessories.
3. Scrub-up sink shall be made of cast iron white porcelain finish with 3 compartment X-ray processing
tank, drain plug, open sanding drain19 mm inlet spud complete with stand and mounting accessories.
4. Built in appliances such as urinal, lavatory and slop sink shall be installed as indicated on the Plans.
Exposed surfaces to be tile wanes coating complete with fitting accessories required as practiced in
this specially trade.
5. Squat Bowl(s) shall be vitreous china, wash down with integral foot treads, pail flush type. Color,
make and type to be approved by he designing Architect.
6. Grease Traps shall be made of cash bronze with detachable cover and mounting accessories.
F. Roof Drains, Overflow Pipes and Steel Grating
1. The Contractor shall provide fit and or install necessary drains with strainers where shown on the
Plans.
2. Each drain with strainer shall fir the size of the corresponding downspout or roof leader over which it
is to be installed and in conformity with the following schedule.
a. Scupper drains (for balconies, parapet) shall be made of bronze base with flashing. Flange
threaded outlet and convex with integral flashing clamp bolted to flange.
b. “Josam” type drains shall be made of bronze base semi-dome with large free area, flashing
clamp and integral gravel stopper, for roof decks, canopies, g
c. utter and elsewhere indicated on the Plans.
d. Downspout when encased in concrete, unless otherwise shown on the Plans shall be
polyvinyl chloride (PVC), whether indicated or specified requirements as herein described.
e. Overflow pipes shall be made of galvanized iron pipe measuring at least 13 mm diameter and
spaced at 20 centimeters on center.
f. Steel grating shall be made of wrought iron metals of design on shop drawings approved and
surfaces to be coated with shop finish.
Page 30 of 120
G. Fire Protection System
1. Fire hose cabinets shall be locally available consisting of 38 mm diameter valve hose rack with 30
mm nipple rubber hose cable with square nozzle 38 mm diameter brass, chromium plated.
2. Fire Standpipe system shall consist of risers and hose valves. Standpipe shall be extra strong black
iron.
3. Valves to be used shall be a high grade cast bronze mounted with standing 79.40 kg. working
pressure.
4. Fire extinguisher shall be portable, suitable for Class A, B, C, fires, mounted inside the cabinet.
Cabinet shall be full flush mounting door with aluminum trim for glass plate.
5. Frame and box shall be made of gauge 14 galvanized iron sheet with white interior and red exterior
baked enamel finish over the well prepared primer.
6. Cabinet shall be wall mounted and size to accommodate the define components.
7. Yard hydrant where shown on the Plans shall match the Integrated Fire Department requirements.
Outlet shall be single 63 mm diameter gate valves with chain connected caps.
8. Built in appliances such as urinal, lavatory and slope sink shall be installed as indicated on the Plans.
Exposed surfaces to be tile wainscoting complete with fitting accessories required as practiced in this
specially trade.
The Contractor before any installation work is started shall carefully examine the Plans and
investigate actual structural and finishing work condition affecting all his work. Where actual condition
necessitates a rearrangement of the approved pipe layout, the Contractor shall prepare Plan(s) of the
proposed pipe layout for approval by the supervising Architect or Engineer.
A. Installation of Soil, Waste, Drain and Vent Pipes
1. Soil Pipe – All soil and drainage pipes shall be sloped at 2% or 2 cm. per 1.0 meter run but in
no case flatter than one (1%) percent.
2. Horizontal lines – shall be supported by well secured heavy strap hangers.
3. Vertical lines – shall be secured strongly by hooks to the building frame and a suitable bracket
or chairs shall be provided at the floor from which they start.
4. All main Vertical Soil and Waste Stacks – shall be extended full size to and above the roofing
line to act as vents except otherwise indicated on the Plans.
5. Vent Pipes – in roof spaces shall be run as close as possible to under side of roof with
horizontal piping slope down to stacks without forming traps. Vertical vent pipes may b
connected into one main vent riser above the highest vented fixtures.
6. Where an end circuit vent pipe from any fixtures is connected to a vent line serving other
fixtures, the connections shall be at least 120 cm. above the floor on which the fixtures are
located.
7. Horizontal waste line receiving the discharge from two or more fixtures shall be provided with
end vents unless separate venting of fixtures is noted on the Plan.
8. All changes in pipe sizes such as soil and waste lines shall be made with reducing fittings or
recessed reducers.
9. All changes in directions shall be made by appropriate use of 45 degrees Y; half Y’ long sweep;
quarter bends or elbows for soil and waste lines where the change in direction of flow is from
the horizontal to the vertical and discharges from water closet.
10. Where it becomes necessary to use short radius fittings in other locations, the approval of the
supervising Architect or Engineer shall be obtained prior to installation of said fittings.
11. Cleanouts at the bottom of each soil stack, waste stack, interior downspout, and where else
indicated shall be the same size as the pipe lines.
12. Vent pipes shall be flashed and made water tight at the roof with ferrule lead sheet.
13. Trap – Each fixtures and place of equipment requiring connection to the drainage system
except fixtures and continuous waste shall be equipped with a trap. Each trap shall be placed
as near to the fixtures as possible.
B. Water Pipes, Fittings and Connections
1. The water supply piping shall be extended o all fixtures, outlets, and equipment from the gate valves
installed in the branch near the riser.
2. The cold water system shall be installed with a slope towards a main shutoff valve and drain. Ends of
pipe and outlets shall be capped or plugged and left ready for future connections.
3. All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements and shall be worked into place without springing of
forcing.
4. All piping above the ground shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise
indicated on the Plan.
5. All service pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept at sufficient distance from other work to permit
finished covering not less than 12 mm from such work or from finished covering on the different
service.
6. No water piping shall be buried in floors, unless specifically indicated on the Plan. Changes in pipe
directions shall be made with reducing fittings.
7. Pipe drain indicated on the drawings shall consist of 12 mm globe valve with renewable disc and
installed at low points on the cold water piping so that all piping shall slope 10 cm. in 30 meters.
8. all pipes to be threaded shall be reamed before threading. All screw joints shall be made with graphite
and oil or with an approved graphite compound applied to make threads only.
Page 31 of 120
F. Fixtures, Equipment and Fastenings
1. All fixtures and equipment shall be supported and fastened in a safe and satisfactory workmanship as
practiced.
2. All fixtures required to be wall mounted on concrete or concrete hollow block wall shall be fasten with
brass expansion bolts.
3. Expansion bolts shall be 6 mm diameter with 20 mm threads into solid concrete, fitted with tubing or
sleeves of proper length to acquire extreme rigidity.
4. Inserts shall be rigidly secured, anchored and properly concealed and flushed in the walls.
5. Bolts and nuts shall be horizontally mounted and exposed. It shall be provided with washers and
chromium plate finish.
F, Pipe Hangers, Inserts and Supports
1. Pipe hangers shall be wrought iron or malleable iron pipe spaced no more than 1.50 meters apart for
horizontal runs of pipe.
2. Chains, straps, perforated turn-buckles or other approved means of adjustment except the turn-
buckles may be omitted for hangers on soil or waste lines or individual toilet rooms to maintain stacks
when spaced does not permit.
3. Trapeze hangers may be used in lieu separate hangers on pipe running parallel to and closed to each
other.
4. Inserts shall be cast steel of the type to receive machine bolt or nut after installation. Insert permit
adjustment of the bolts in one horizontal direction and shall be installed before the pouring of
concrete.
5. Wrought iron clamps or collars to support vertical runs of pipe shall be spaced not more than 3.0 m.
apart or as indicated on the Plan.
G. Plates and Flashing
1. Plates to cover exposed pipes passing through floor finished, walls, or ceiling shall be fitted with
chromium plated cast brass plates or chromium plated cast iron or steel plates on ferrous pipes.
2. Plates shall be large enough to cover and close the hole around the area where pipes passes. It shall
be properly installed to insure permanence.
3. Roof areas penetrated by vent pipes shall be rendered water tight by lead sheet flashing and counter
flashing. It shall extend at least 15 cm. above the pipe and 30 cm along the roof.
H. Protection and Cleaning
1. During installation of fixtures and accessories and until final acceptance, fixtures shall be protected
with strippable plastic or other approved means to maintain fixtures in perfect conditions.
2. All exposed metal surfaces shall be polished clean and free of grease, dirt or other foreign materials
after the completion.
3. Upon completion, thoroughly clean all fixtures and accessories to leave the work in a polished
condition.
I. Inspection, Warranty Test and Disinfections
1. All pipes, fittings, traps, fixtures, appurtenances and equipment of the plumbing and drainage system
shall be inspected and approved by the supervising Architect or Engineer to assure compliance with
all requirements of applicable Codes and Regulations referred to in this Specifications.
J. Drainage System Test
2. The entire drainage and venting system shall have all the necessary opening which can be plugged
to permit the entire system to be filled with water to the level of the highest stack vent above the roof.
3. The system shall hold this water for a full 30 minutes during which time there
4. Shall be no drop greater than 10 mm.
5. Where only a portion of the system is to be tested, the test shall be conducted on the same manner
as described for the entire system.
K. Water Test on system
1. Upon completion of the rough-in and before connecting fixtures, the entire cold water piping system
shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure 1-1/2 times the expected working pressure in the system
during operation and remained tight and leak proofed.
2. Where piping system is to concealed, the piping system shall be separately in manner similar to that
described for the entire system and in the presence of the Architect or Engineer or his duly
designated representative.
L. Defective Work
All defective work, materials replaced and tested will be repeated until satisfactory performance is attained.
1. Any material replaced for the satisfactory performance of the system made shall be at the expense of
the Contractor.
2. Caulking of screwed joints or holed will not be permitted.
M. Disinfection
Page 32 of 120
1. The entire water distribution system shall be thoroughly flushed & treated w/ chlorine before it is
operated for public use.
2. Disinfection materials shall be liquid chlorine or hypochlorite & shall be introduced in a manner
approved as practiced or approved by the Engineer into the water distribution system.
3. After a contact period of not less than sixteen hours, the heavenly chlorinated water shall be
Flushed from the system w/ potable water.
4. Valves for the water distribution system shall be opened & closed several times during the 16
hours chlorination treatment is done.
1002.3.8 As – Built Drawings
Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall submit two sets of prints w/ all as – built changes
shown on the drawings in a neat workmanship manner. Such prints shall show changes or actual installation
& conditions of the plumbing system in comparison w/ the original drawings.
The work done under this item shall be quantified per length & / or number of units as provided in the Bill
of Quantities, tested & accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The quantified items, installed in place shall be the basis for payment, base from the unit bid price for w/c
prices & payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials & incidentals necessary to
complete this item.
Payment shall be made :
Pay item Number Description Unit of Measurement
1002 ( a ) Cast Iron Soil Pipes & Fittings pieces / length
1002 ( b ) Galvanized Iron Pipes & Fittings pieces / length
1002 ( c ) Plumbing Fixtures set
1002 ( d ) Roof Drain w/ Strainer set
ELECTRICAL
SCOPE OF WORK
The work under this Division consist of furnishing all materials, equipment, tools, labor and all other
services necessary to complete and make ready for operation the Electrical Power and lighting System
described below and or indicated in the Electrical Plans in accordance with the latest edition of the Philippines
electrical Code and this Specification and General Conditions of the Contract.
Material Requirements
All materials shall be brand new & shall be of the approved type meeting all the requirements of the
Phil. Electrical Code & bearing the Phil. Standard Agency (PSA) mark.
1. Furnishing and installation of underground service entrance, conduits and conductors, and all items
required by local utility power company’s policy, rules and regulations.
2. Furnishing and installation of panel boards at location indicated on the plan and electrical riser layout,
including all accessories required.
3. Furnishing and installation of feeder and branch circuit conductors with the necessary conduits,
approved type of fittings and devices as indicated in the electrical plans.
4. Furnishing and installation of all of utilization devices, outlets and wall switches with properly installed
cover plate.
5. Furnishing of all lighting fixtures, conduits, including service entrance duct, terminal cabinet and utility
boxes.
15-2 CODES, REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS
1. The installation and equipment shall conform to good engineering practices and in particular comply
with the requirements laid down in the following documents or its equivalent which are mandatory ad
modified only by specific agreement.
Philippines Electrical Code - PEC

Underwriter’s Laboratory, Inc. - UL
National Electrical Manufacturers
Association - NEMA
Local Utility Power Company - LUPC
Page 33 of 120
2. In addition to the requirements of these Codes and the Utility Power Company’s requirements, local
government regulations and suppliers Specifications if any, shall be followed.
15-3 DRAWING AND SPECIFICATIONS
1. The drawings and Specifications are meant to be complementary to each other, and what is called for
by one shall be binding as if called for both.
2. Any apparent conflict between the drawings and specifications, and any controversial or unclear points
in either shall be referred to the supervising Architect or Engineer for final interpretation and decisions.
3. On one copy of the plans, have a record showing all deviations that happened during the
construction.
4. Upon completion of work as described herein, the Contractor at his own expense shall furnish the
Owner 6 copies of the “As Built” plan for future references and maintenance purposes.
15-4 CORRELATION OF WORK
1. The Electrical Contractor shall confer with the General Contractor and Architect to determine how and
where his work fits with that of other crafts, after familiarizing himself with the plans and specification.
2. This shall be done at the beginning of construction. Should there be any existing doubts at any point,
ruling shall be secured from the supervising Architect or Engineer who shall be given time to inspect
the work covering this point and to prepare a detail in the form of drawings and written instructions as
required.
15-5 PERMITS AND INPECTIONS
1. The Contractor shall obtain at his own expense, all the necessary permits and certificate of Electrical
Inspection from the proper government authorities required for both the performance of his work
involved and the proper operation of the system upon completion of the work.
2. The Contractor shall at his expense, reproduce the electrical plans for his work to the necessary scale
and complete them with the information and requirements as required by the government authorities
concerned in issuing permits and Certificate of Electrical Inspection.
15-7 LAYOUT OF WORK
1. Electrical system layout indicated on the drawing are generally diagrammatic and the location of
outlets, devices, apparatus and equipment are only approximate.
2. The exact routing of conduits, location of outlets, devices, apparatus and equipment shall be
governed by structural and architectural conditions and limitations.
3. For the exact location, consult the supervising Architect or Engineer. This does not mean to permit
redesigning of the systems. All outlets are to be interconnected as indicated in the drawings.
4. The Owner reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of outlet and equipment
prior to rough-in, without involving additional expense.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible and pay charges for cutting and patching for piping lines where
sleeves or slots were not installed or where incorrectly located.
15-8 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
1. All materials to be installed be unused, brand new and shall conform with the standards of the
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. in every case where such a standard has been established for the
particular type of materials to be used.
2. Only skilled workmen using proper tools and equipment shall be employed during the entire course of
installation work.
3. All workmanship shall be of the best practices of the trade involved. The same job foreman shall be
assigned and maintained at the job site during the entire course of the job.
15-9 SERVICE METERING FACILITIES
1. The Contractor shall furnish and install a concrete pedestal pole size 30 cm x 30 cm x 5.5 0 m. in the
location shown in the plan and electrical diagram including line accessories and hardware in
accordance with the local power company’s standards.
2. It shall be the duty of the Contractor to request the local power company to install a proper type and
size of service metering instruments and all other necessary accessories, materials, equipment,
devices and fittings.
15-10 PANELBOARDS
1. The Contractor shall furnish and install the necessary panel boards multi-breaker type including the
breakers as indicated in the drawings.
2. Circuit breakers shall be tropical of the magnetic thermal type with ratings and number of poles as
indicated in the drawings.
3. All panel boards to be used shall be flush mounted when located in areas that are visible to the
general public and may be surface mounted when located in machine room or areas where they are
not visible to the public.
4. All panel boards shall be set plumb and symmetrical with the surrounding objects. Panel boards shall
be installed in a perfectly fit cabinet of appropriate size provided with a stop in-door trim and good
quality cylinder lock.
Page 34 of 120
15-12 CONDUIT WORK
1. Standard PVC conduit pipe system is required for this project.

2. Conduit runs shall be concealed in drop ceiling and or embedded in concrete structure where
concealment is not possible.
3. No conduit of less than 15 mm normal diameter shall be installed for this project. Two or more
conduits shall not be installed in lieu of a larger size.
4. Conduit run shall be continuous from outlet and no running thread shall be in any conduit run. Conduit
shall be cut square and properly reamed.
5. All joints shall be screwed enter knockouts of conduit boxes, pull boxes, panels and cabinet squarely.
Lock-nuts shall be screwed tight to insure continuity of raceway grounding.
6. Bonds and offset shall be avoided where possible, but where necessary it shall be made with
approved conduit bending apparatus.
7. Conduits which have been deformed or crushed in any manner should not be installed.
8. The Contractor shall plug with lead or closed with approved pipe caps the ends of all conduit which
are to be left empty within the cabinets and conduit boxes so as to prevent the entrance of white ants
and dirt within the conduit system.
9. This lead or cap shall be placed that can be easily removed when so desired and at the same time
serve the purpose intended.
10. Pull wire shall be inserted in the empty ducts before they are close with lead or caps and shall be left
therein for future use.
11. When no shown on the plans, conduit sizes shall correspond to the conduit sizes on tables of the
Philippine Electrical code latest edition.
12. Conduits shall be standard rigid steel, zinc coated or galvanized. Intermediate metal conduit may be
used if shown or specified on the approved Plans. PVC conduits if require shall be Schedule 40.
Enamel coated steel conduits & conduits w/ rough inner surfaces are not acceptable.
13. All conduit boxes shall be Code gauge steel & galvanized. Outlet boxes shall be galvanized pressed
steel of standard make. In general, outlet boxes shall be @ least 100 mm square or octagonal, 53mm
deep & 16mm minimum gauge.
14. All conduit fittings such as locknut & bushing shall be galvanized of standard make.
15. No conduits shall be used in any system smaller than 12 mm diameter electric trade size nor shall
have more than four (4) 90-degree bends in any one run & where necessary, pull boxes shall be
provided. All ends of conduits w/c are left empty in cabinets & conduit boxes shall be plugged w/ lead
or approved pipe caps so as to prevent the entrance of white ants & dirt w/n the conduit system. Pull
wires shall be inserted in the empty ducts before they are closed w/ lead or pipe caps & shall be left
therein for future use. On exposed work, all pipes & outlets boxes shall be secured by means of
galvanized metal clamps w/c shall be held in place by means of machine screws. When running over
concrete surfaces, the screws shall be held in place by means of expansion sleeves for big pipes &
rolled lead sheet for small pipes. All pipes shall be run @ right angles to & parallel w/ the surrounding
walls. No diagonal run shall be allowed & all bends & offsets shall be avoided as much as possible.
Conduits shall be supported @ 1,500 mm intervals maximum.
16. Provide conduits boxes for pulling & splicing wires & outlet boxes for installation of wiring devices. As
a rule, provide junction boxes or pull boxes in all runs greater than 30 meter in length, for horizontal
runs. For outer lengths, provide boxes as required for splices or pulling. Pull boxes shall be installed
in inconspicuous but accessible locations.
17. Support boxes independently of conduits entering by means of bolts, red hangers or other suitable
means.
18. Conduit boxes shall be installed plumb & securely fastened. They shall be set flush w/ the surface of
the structure in w/c they are installed where conduits are run concealed. All convenience & wall
switch outlet boxes for concealed conduit work shall be deep, rectangular flush type boxes. Four inch
octagonal flush type boxes shall be used for all ceiling light outlets & shall be of the deep type where
three or more conduits connected to a single box. Floor mounted outlet boxes required shall be
waterproof type w/ flush brass floor plate & brass bell nozzle.
19. All boxes shall be painted w/ antirust red lead paint after installation. All conduits shall be fitted w/
approved standard galvanized bushing & locknuts where they enter cabinets & conduit boxes.
Junction & pull boxes of code gauge steel shall be provided as indicated or as required to facilitate
the pulling of wires & cables.
15-14 WIRING METHODS
1. Wiring for all systems shall be type THW or TW conductors using plastic conduit pipes. Other types of
conductor shall be as indicated in the drawings.
2. Conduit shall be embedded in columns, walls and toppings of floors slabs to allow flush connections
and lighting system which may be exposed between joints incase a drop ceiling installed.
3. Proper fittings shall be provided at ends of conduits. Wiring installations through wooden double
partitions shall be in standard PVC conduits, and in all cases, the wiring installation shall be
concealed from view.
4. All conduit and conduit fittings shall be PVC and shall conform with the U.S. Underwriter’s
Laboratories Inc. Standard and Codes.
5. The minimum size of conduit to be used shall be 13 mm diameter. Sizes larger than 13 mm diameter
shall be indicated in the drawings.
6. Smallest size of conductor to be used shall be 2.0 mm 2, type TW or THW. TW wire shall be indicated
in the drawings.
7. Circuit homeruns for lighting shall be 3.5 mm 2 and 5.5 mm2 for the power or other wise indicated on
the plans.
Page 35 of 120
8. All splices, tape and junctions for all systems using conductors up to 14 mm2 shall be accomplished
by using electrical friction or rubber tapes.
9. Proper type of connections shall be employed to accommodate all splices and solderless type
terminals to be used for connection to Bush bar.
10. Taps and splices shall be properly protected with both plastic and friction electrical tapes to proper
insulation and protection for 600 volts.
11. Wiring from ceiling outlets to lighting fixtures recessed in dropped ceilings shall be done using type
TW conductors in RS or PVC conduits.
12. Proper size of boxes shall be used for switch and outlet receptacles.
13. Necessary fittings such as bushing, locknuts and anti-short fiber bushing shall be used at proper
places so required.
14. When no shown on the Plans, conduit sizes shall correspond to the conduit sizes as prescribed in the
Philippine Electrical Code table for “size of Conduit Pipes”
15-15 OUTLETS AND SWITCHES
1. All boxes for outlets and switches shall be PVC or galvanized iron approved products of reputable
manufacturers.
2. Enamel coating used in lieu of zinc coating shall not be permitted.
3. All ceiling outlet boxes intended for lighting outlets shall be of the 10 cm octagonal box. Larger boxes
when required shall be 5.3 cm deep.
4. Convenience and wall switch outlet boxes shall be of the 10 cm by 5.3 cm rectangular deep flush type
or 100 square cm junction box with gang raised cover as required to accommodate the wires therein.
5. All junction boxes, pull boxes and blank boxes shall be fitted with standard flat metal or plastic box
cover.
6. All boxes including junction and pull boxes shall be of sufficient size to provide free space for all
conductors enclosed in the box, in addition to the fittings such as switch mechanism and receptacles
that may be placed therein.
15-16 WALL SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
1. Suitable single pole, two-gang, three-gang and three –way switches of the flush tumbler type and
receptacles with proper bakelite cover plates shall be furnished and installed as indicated in the
drawings.
2. Wall switches intended to control lights on the 230 volts system shall be rated 15 amp. 250 volts.
3. Convenience outlets shall be flushed duplex type rated 20 amperes 230 volts 60 Hz., Ac.
15-17 GROUNDING INSTALLATION
1. The Contractor shall furnish and install all ground cables, connection ground rods and all other
materials required to provide a permanent effective grounding system.
2. Grounding, in general, shall conform with the provisions of the National Electrical Code and as
recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
3. All enclosures for electrical equipment regardless of voltage shall be grounded, including metal
frames of switchboard, motors, generators and steel poles. Each shall be grounded in a separate
grounding system.
4. Grounding cables shall be bare, copper of suitable size and of the approved type. Ground rods shall
be copper clad steel with diameter of 16 mm and length of 2.0 m.
5. Ground clamps shall be high compression, solderless cast design frame of high copper alloy bronze
with minimum thickness of 4.7 mm and hardware made from silicon bronze.
6. The clamps shall be of a shape and size to fit the points of application and type of connection to be
made from cable to rod, pipe and curved or flat surfaces. Connectors shall be suitable for direct burial
without danger of corrosion.
15-18 LIGHTING OUTLETS
All ceiling outlets shall be 10 cm. x 5 cm. octagonal boxes. Connection from fixtures to boxes shall be
accomplished by using type TW conductors on a flexible conduit.
15-19 LIGHTING FIXTURES
All lighting fixtures shall be furnished and installation by the contractor. They shall be as shown on the
drawings or specified on the schedule of lighting fixtures. For other details as to the types and model, consult
the architect or the engineer.
15-22 CONSTRUCITON REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall install the Power Load Center Unit Sub-station or Low Voltage Switchgear and
Panel boards at the locations shown on the approved Plan.
Standard panels and cabinets shall be used and assembled on the job. All panels shall be of dead
front construction furnished with trims for flush or surface mounting as required.
All works throughout shall be executed in the best practice in a workmanlike manner by qualified &
experienced electricians under the immediate supervision of duly licensed Electrical Engineer.
Page 36 of 120
Item 1100 – Conduits, Boxes & Fitting
1100.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the furnishing & installation of the complete conduit work consisting of electrical conduits, conduit boxes
such as junction boxes pull boxes, utility boxes, octagonal & square boxes, conduit fitting such as couplings ,locknuts & bushing & other
electrical materials needed to complete the conduit rough – in work of this project.
All materials shall be brand new & shall be of the approved type meeting all the requirements of the PHIL. Electrical Code &
bearing the Phil. Standard Agency (PSA) mark.
Conduits
Conduits shall be standard rigid steel, zinc coated or galvanized. Intermediate metal conduit may be used if shown or specified on the
approved Plans. PVC conduits if required shall be schedule 40. Enamel coated steel conduits & conduits with rough inner surfaces are
not acceptable.
Conduit Boxes
All conduit boxes shall be Code gauge steel & galvanized. Outlet boxes shall be galvanized pressed steel of standard make. In general,
outlet boxes shall be at least 100mm square or octagonal, 53mm deep & 16 mm minimum gauge.
Conduit Fittings
All conduit fittings such as locknuts & bushing shall be galvanized of standard make.
.
All works throughout shall be executed in the best practice in a workmanlike manner by qualified & experienced electricians under the
immediate supervision of a duly licensed Electrical Engineer.
Conduits
Conduits should be cut square with hacksaw & reamed. Bends shall be made w/ the required radius. In making bends only conduit
bending apparatus will be used. The use of a pipe tee or vise for bending conduits shall not be permitted. which have been crushed,
deformed or flattened shall not be installed. No running thread shall be allowed. Conduit runs crossing construction joints of the building
shall be provided with standard expansion fittings
of the approved type.
No conduits shall be used in any System smaller than 12 mm diameter electric trade size nor shall have more than four (40)90 degree
bends in any one run & where necessary, pull boxes shall be provide.
All ends of conduits which are left empty in cabinets & conduit boxes shall be plugged with lead or approved pipe caps so as
to prevent the entrance of white ants & dirt w/n the conduit system. Pull wires shall be insert in the empty ducts before they are closed
with lead or pipe caps & shall be left therein for future use.
On exposed work, all pipes & outlet boxes shall be secured by means of galvanized metal clamps which shall be held in
place by means of machine screws. When running over concrete surfaces, the screws shall be held in place by means of expansion
sleeves for big pipes & rolled lead sheet for small pipes. All pipes shall be run @ right angles to & parallel w/ the surrounding walls. No
diagonal run shall be allowed & all bends & offsets shall be avoided as much as possible. Conduits shall be supported @ 1,500mm
intervals maximum.
Conduit Boxes & Fittings
Provide conduit boxes for pulling & splicing wires & outlet boxes for installation of wiring devices. As a rule, provide junction boxes or pull
boxes in all runs greater than 30 metres in length, for horizontal runs. For other lengths, provide boxes as required for splices or pulling.
Pull boxes shall be installed in inconspicuous but accessible locations. Support boxes independently of conduits entering by means of
bolts, red hangers or other suitable means. Conduit boxes shall be installed plumb & securely fastened. They shall be set flush w/ the
surface of the structure in which they are installed where conduits are run concealed.
All convenience & wall switch outlet boxes for concealed conduit work shall deep, rectangular flush type boxes. For – inch octagonal
flush type boxes shall be used for all ceiling light outlets & shall be of the deep type where three or more conduits connect to a single
box. Floor mounted outlet boxes required shall be waterproof type w/ flush brass floor plate & brass bell nozzle. All boxes shall be
painted w/ antirust red lead paint after installation. All conduits shall be fitted w/ approved standard galvanized bushing & locknuts where
they enter cabinets & conduit boxes. Junction & pull boxes of code gauge steel shall be provided as indicated or as required to facilitate
the pulling of wires & cables.
Method of Measurement
The work under this item shall be measured either by lengths, pieces, pairs, lot & set actually placed
& installed as shown on the approved Plans.
Basis of Payment
All works performed & measured & as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for @ the unit
bid or contract unit price w/c payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials. tools &
(1) RSC Conduit Pipe – mm dia., w/ couplings length
(2) Locknut & Bushings pairs
(3) Condulet type pieces
Page 37 of 120
(4) Conduit pipe elbow pieces
(5) Connector pieces
(6) Conduit Clamp pieces
(7) PVC adapter pieces
(8) G.I. Wire G.A # 14 Kilos
(9) Hacksaw Blade pieces
( 10 ) PVC Tape 19 mm dia. x 227 g rolls
( 11 ) Rubber Tape 19 mm dia. x 227 g rolls
( 12 ) PVC Solvent Cement @ 400 cc cans
( 13 ) PVC End Ball pieces
( 14 ) Octagonal junction boxes pieces
( 15 ) Utility Boxes pieces
( 16 ) Metal Pull Box pieces
( 17 ) Square Box pieces
( 18 ) Telephone Cabinet set
( 19 ) Reinforced Concrete Pedestal Pole lot
( 20 ) Red lead Point lot
( 21 ) Weather head w/ type “F” condulet pieces
( 22 ) Grounding Rod copper weld 20 mm dia. x 3 m length
( 23 ) Apitong or Approved equal creosoted wood pole pieces
( 24 ) Anchor Rod – mm dia. pieces
( 25 ) Anchor Log – mm diameter pieces
( 26 ) Power load Studs w/ nuts pieces
1100.6 General Specifications
The work to be done under this division of specifications consists of the fabrication, furnishing, delivery &
installation, complete in all details of the electrical work, @ the subject premises & all work materials
incidental to the proper completion of the installation, except those portions of the work w/c are expressly
stated to be done by other fields. All works shall be done in accordance w/ the rules & regulations & w/ the
specifications.
1100.7 Specifications on :
1. Lighting fixtures & lamp

All lighting fixtures & lamps are as specified & listed on lighting fixture schedule.
For fluorescent lamp, it shall be 40 – watt rapid start cool – white. All fluorescent ballast shall be 230 volt, high
power factor, of good quality materials & approved by the Bureau of Product Standards ( BPS).
2. Material Requirements
All materials to be used shall conform to the BPS Specification.
3. Construction Requirements
All grounding system installation shall be executed in accordance w/ the approved plans.
Grounding system shall include building perimeter ground wires, ground rods, clamps, connectors, ground
wells & ground wires, taps as shown in the approved design.
1100.8 Auxiliary Systems
Page 38 of 120
All auxiliary systems such as telephone & intercom system, time clock system, fire alarm system & public
address/ nurse’s call / paging system installations shall be done in accordance w/ the approve design. All
materials to be used shall conform to the bureau of Product Standard (BPS) specifications.
1100.9 Important requirement regarding supervision of the work & submission of certificate of completion.
All wiring installation herein shall be done under the direct supervision of a licensed Electrical Engineer @
the expense of the Contractor. The contractor shall submit the certificate of completion duly approved by the
owner’s representative.
1100.10 Test & guarantee
Upon completion of the electrical construction work, the contractor shall provide all test equipment &
personnel & to submit written copies of all test results. The contractor shall guarantee the electrical installation
are done & in accordance w/ the approved plans & specifications. The contractor shall guarantee that the
electrical systems are free from all grounds & form all defective workmanship & materials & will remain so far
a period of one year from date & acceptance of works. Any defect shall be remedied by the Contractor @ his
own expense.
Item 1101 – Wires & Wiring Devices
1101.1 Description
This item shall consist of the furnishing & installation of all wires & wiring devices consisting of electric
wires & cables, wall switches, convenience receptacles, heavy duty receptacles & other devices shown on the
approved Plans but not mentioned in these specifications,

Wires & cables shall be of the approved type meeting all the requirements of the Philippine Electrical Code &
bearing the PSA mark unless specified or indicated otherwise, all power & lighting conductors shall be
insulated for 600 volts. All wires shall be copper, soft drawn & annealed, smooth & of cylindrical form & shall
be centrally located inside the insulation. All wiring devices shall be standard products of reputable electrical
manufactures. Wall switches shall be rated @ least 10A, 250 volts & shall be spring operated flush tumbler
type. Duplex convenience receptacles shall be rated 15A, 250 volts, flush, parallel slots. Single heavy duty
receptacles shall be rated 20A, 250 volts. 3 wire, flush polarized type.

Conductors or wires shall not be drawn in conduits until after the cement plaster is dry & the conduits are
thoroughly cleaned & free from dirt & moisture. In drawing wires into conduits, sufficient slack shall be allowed
to permit easy connections for fixtures, switches receptacles & other wiring devices w/o the use of additional
splices. All conductors of convenience outlets & lighting branch circuit homeruns shall be wired w/ a minimum
of 3.5 mm in size. Circuit homeruns to panel board more than 30 meters shall not be smaller than 5.5 mm. No
conductor shall be less than 2 mm in size. All wires of 14mm & larger in size shall be connected to panels &
apparatus by means of approved type lugs or connectors of the solder less type, sufficiently large enough to
enclose all strands of the conductors & securely fastened. They shall not loosen under vibration or normal
strain. All joints, taps & splices on wires larger than 14 mm shall be made of suitable solder less connectors of
the approved type & size. They shall be taped w/ rubber & PVC tapes providing insulation not less than that of
the conductors. No splices or joints shall be permitted in either feeder or branch conductors except w/n outlet
boxes or accessible junction boxes or pull boxes .All joints in branch circuit wiring shall be made mechanically
& electrically secured by approved splicing devices & taped w/ rubber & PVV tapes in a manner w/c will make
their insulation as that of the conductor, All wall switches & receptacles shall be fitted w/ standard Bakelite
face plate covers. Devices plates for flush mounting shall be installed w/ all four edges in continuous contact
w/ finished wall surfaces w/o the use of coiled wire or similar devices. Plaster fillings will not be permitted
Plates installed in wet locations shall be gasket. When more than one switch or device is indicated in a single
location, gang plate shall be used.

The work under this item shall be measured either by meters, rolls, pieces, set, actually placed & installed
as shown on the plans.

All work performed & measured & as provided for in this Bid of Quantities shall be paid for @ the unit Bid
or Contract Unit Price w/c payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools &
(1) Electric Wire meter of rolls

(2) Single pole tumbler switch pieces
(3) Two - gang tumbler switch pieces
(4) Three – gang tumbler switch pieces
(5) Three – way tumbler switch pieces
(6) Duplex Convenience receptacles set
(7) Heavy Duty Convenience receptacles set
(8) Standard Telephone outlet Bakelite cover
w/ 9.52 center hole pieces
Page 39 of 120
(9) Widow type air conditioning outlet 3 – prong

Polarized type pieces
(10) Bare copper wire meters
(11) Grounding clamps for electric wires pieces

(12) Messenger wire meters
(13) Guy wire meters
(14) Vibrating Bell set
(15) Traffic Light Control Panel set
(16) Traffic Light metal enclosures complete w/
Red & green light provided w/ reflectors &
152 mm diameter vibrating bell set
Item 1102 – Power Load Center, switchgear & Panel Boards
1102.1 Description
This item shall consist of the furnishing & installation of the power load center unit substation or low
voltage switchgear & distribution panel boards @ the location shown or the approved Plans complete w/
transformer, circuit breakers, cabinets & all accessories, completely wired &ready for service.
All materials shall be brand new & shall be of the approved type. It shall conform w/ the requirements of
the Philippine Electrical Code & shall bear the Philippine Standard Agency ( PSA) mark.
Power Load Center Unit Substation

The Contractor shall furnish & install an indoor – type Power Load Center Unit Substation @ the location
shown on the approved Plans if required. It shall be totally metal – enclosed, dead front & shall consist of the
following coordinated component parts:
High Voltage Primary Section:

High voltage primary incoming line section consisting of the following parts & related accessories:
( a ) One (1) Air – filled Interrupter Switch, 2 – position ( open – close ) installed in a suitable air filled metal
enclosure & shall have sufficient interrupting capacity to carry the electrical load. It shall be provided w/ key
interlock w/ the cubicle for the power fuses to prevent access to the fuses unless the switch is open.
( b ) Three (3)- power fuses mounted in separate compartments w/n the switch housing & accessible by a
hinged door.
( c ) One ( 1 ) set of high voltage potheads or 3-conductor cables or three single conductor cables.
( d ) Lightning arresters shall be installed @ the high voltage cubicle if required.
Items (a) & (b) above could be substituted w/ power circuit breaker w the correct rating & capacity.
Transformer Section
The transformer section shall consist of a power transformer e/ ratings & capacities as shown on the
plans. It shall be oil liquid = filled non – flammable type & designed in accordance w/ the latest applicable
standards.
The Transformer shall be provided w/ four (4) approximately 2 ½ % rated KVA taps on the primary
winding in most cases one (1) above & three (3) below rated primary voltage & shall be changed by means of
externally gang – operated manual tap changer only when the transformer is de – energized. Tap changing
under load is acceptable if transformer has been so designed.
The following accessories shall be provided w/ the transformer, namely: drain valve, sampling device,
filling connection, lifting lugs, diagrammatic nameplate, relief valve, thermometer & other necessary related
accessories.
The high-voltage & low-voltage bushings & transition flange shall be properly coordinated for field
connection to the incoming line section & low voltage switchboard section, respectively.
Low – Voltage Switchboard Section
The low – voltage switchboard shall be standard modular – unitized units, metal – built, dead front, safety type
construction & shall consist of the following:
( a ) Switchboard Housing
The housing shall be heavy gauge steel sheet, dead front type, gray enamel finish complete w/ frame
supports, steel bracing, steel sheet panel boards, removable rear plates, copper bus bars, & all other
necessary accessories to insure sufficient mechanical strength & safety. It shall be provided w/ grounding
bolts & clamps.
( b ) Secondary Metering Section
Page 40 of 120
The secondary metering section shall consist of one (1) ammeter, AC, indicating type ; one (1) voltmeter,
transfer switch for 3 phase; & current transformers of suitable rating & capacity.
The above – mentioned instruments shall be installed in one compartment above the main breaker &
shall be complete w/ all necessary accessories completely wired, ready for use.
( c ) Main Circuit Breaker
The main circuit breaker shall be draw –out type, manually or electrically operated as required w/ ratings
& capacity as shown on the approved Plans. The main breaker shall include insulated control switch if
electrically operated, manual trip button, magnetic tripping devices, adjustable time over current protection
and instantaneous short circuit trip & all necessary accessories to insure safe and efficient operation.
( d ) Feeder Circuit Breakers
There shall be as many feeder breakers as shown on the single line diagram or schematic riser diagram
& schedule of loads & computations on the plans. The circuit breakers shall be drawer out or molded case as
required. The circuit breakers shall each have sufficient interrupting capacity & shall be manually operated
complete w/ trip devices & all necessary accessories to insure safe & efficient operation. The number, ratings,
capacities of the feeder branch circuit breakers shall be as shown on the approved plans. Circuit breakers
shall each be of the indicating type, providing “ON” – “ OFF “ & “ TRIP “ positions of the operating handles &
shall each be provided w/ nameplate for branch circuit designation. The circuit breaker shall be so designed
that an overload or short on one pole automatically causes all poles to open.
Low – Voltage Switchgear
( For projects requiring low – voltage switchgear only )

The Contractor shall furnish & install a low – voltage switchgear @ the location shown on the plans. It
shall be metal – clad, dead front, free standing, safety type construction & shall have copper bus bars of
sufficient size, braced to resist allowable root mean square (RMS) symmetrical short circuit stresses, & all
necessary accessories, The low – voltage switchgear shall consist of the switchgear housing, secondary
metering, main breaker & feeder branch circuit breakers & all necessary accessories, completely wired, ready
for service.
Grounding System:
All non – current carrying metallic parts like conduits, cabinets & equipment frames shall be properly
grounded in accordance w/ the Philippine Electrical Code, latest edition.
The size of the ground rods & ground wires shall be as shown on the approved Plans. The ground
resistance shall not be more than 5 ohms.
Panel boards & Cabinets
Panel boards shall conform to the schedule of panel boards as shown on the approved Plans w/
respect to supply characteristics, rating of main lugs or main circuit breaker, number & ratings & capacities of
branch circuit breakers.
Panel boards shall consist of a factory completed dead front assembly mounted in an enclosing flush
type cabinet consisting of code gauge galvanized sheet steel box w/ trim & door. Each door shall be provided
w/ catch lock & two (2) keys. Panel boards shall be provided w/ directories & shall be printed to indicate load
served by each circuit.
Panel board cabinets & trims shall be suitable for the type of mounting shown on the plans. The inside
& outside of the panel cabinets & trims shall be factory painted w/one rust proofing primer coat & two finish
shop coats of pearl gray enamel paint.
Main & branch circuit breakers for panel boards shall have the rating, capacity & number of poles as
shown on the approved Plans. Breakers shall thermal magnetic type. Multiple breakers shall be of the
common trip type having a single operating handle. For 50 – ampere breaker or less, it may consist of single
– pole breaker permanently assembled @ the factory into a multi – pole unit.

The Contractor shall install the power Load Center Unit Substation or Low – Voltage Switchgear &
Panel boards @ the location shown on the approved Plans.
Standard panels & cabinets shall be used & assembled on the job. All panels shall be of dead front
construction furnished w/ trims for flush or surface mounting as required.

The work under this item shall be measured either by set & pieces actually placed & installed as shown
on the approved Plans.

All works performed & measured & as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for @ the Unit
Bid or Contract Unit Price w/c payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools &
(1) Panel board ( Circuit Breaker Type ) set
Page 41 of 120
(2) Panel board ( Safety Switch Type ) set
(3) Low – Voltage Switchgear (LVS) set

Complete w/ metering devices & accessories
(4) Power Fuses pieces
(5) Lightning Arresters pieces
(6) Air Breaker Switch set
(7) Enclosed ACB NEMA Type I set
(8) Enclosed ACB NEMA Type 3R set
(9) Automatic Transfer Switch set
( 10 ) Manual Transfer Switch w/o fuses pieces
( 11 ) Motor Controller set
Item 806 – Reclamation
806.1 Description
This item shall consist of introducing suitable filling materials obtained from dredging the sea or river beds
or obtained from authorized borrow areas situated beyond the right – of – way limits of the project @ locations
designated by the Engineer & placed as required w/in the area to be reclaimed & to the required elevation.
The materials shall be of a quality satisfactory for the purpose intended. Reclamation shall include the
clearing & grubbing of sites & the removal of all undesirable materials.
806.2 Materials Requirements
Filling materials shall consist of all types of earthen materials such as soil, gravel, sand, shells, corals,
cinders & rock of any geologic origin & any additional filler for blending w/c have distinctive properties readily
identified in the field & have distinct engineering characteristics of w/c practical use can be made. Materials
such as weeds, silt, muck & other superfluous or organic materials are not considered suitable materials for
reclamation.
806.3.1 By Dredging
Dredged material shall be secured from the dredging limits as shown on the plans or from other sources
recommended by the designated / assigned Engineer. The materials dredged shall be transported &
deposited @ the area to be filled or as directed by the Engineer, Suitable dredges & attendant plant w/ w/c to
dredge, transport & deposit the material shall be used.
Silt & mud shall not be allowed to accumulate @ the reclamation area but shall be allowed to flow freely
towards the spillway w/c the contractor shall construct for the purpose. Should mud pools be formed, the
Contractor shall be required to remove the mud accumulated.
806.3.2 By Borrow
Borrow material shall be secured from land sources recommended as borrow outside the limits of the
project or @ location / sites approved by the Engineer. Borrow material may be used to supplement the
materials obtained by dredging. Contractor shall construct & maintain haul roads. The contractor shall secure
borrow from sources other than those designated, provided that the materials & location are approved by the
Engineer, in w/c case, the Contractor shall, @ his own expense, secure the pit & construct & maintain the
haul roads together w/ the necessary right-of-way for such roads & the right of access thereto.
The materials shall be hauled & placed in positions on the reclamation indicated on the plans.
Borrow pits when practicable shall be so excavated that they will drain to the nearest natural outlet or to such
outlet as indicated on the plans or designated by the Engineer. Side slopes of borrow puts in all cases shall
be dressed to such slope as the Engineer may direct.
Compaction Requirement
The materials above MLLW whether obtained by dredging or from borrow pits shall be spread out &
compacted in layers not exceeding 300 mm preferably by at least six passes of a vibratory roller of at least 8
tone drawn by a tractor. The fill shall be compacted to not less than 90% of standard proctor requirement.
Page 42 of 120
In case there is a layer of very compressible clay of variable thickness underneath the areas to be
reclaimed, the filling immediately on top of the original sea or river beds shall be executed in thin layers not
exceeding one meter spread over a wide area to avoid bulging of the soft compressible clay, until the MLLW
elevation is reached. If in spite of this precaution, some clay eruption are observed on the fill
material, this clay will be removed down to the elevation of the original sea or river bed & replaced w/ good
material is composed of soft silt, muck or organic material, the Contractor shall remove such soft material
prior to filling or filling operation should be programmed so that the soft material can be pushed out of the
reclamation area as directed by the designated / assigned Project Engineer. The reclamation area shall be
filled to the finished elevation shown on the plan plus allowance for expected settlement. Filling of the
reclamation area & the construction of the bulkheads shall be given top priority over other construction
activities.
Reclamation fill will be measured by the volume in cubic meter by the cross section average end area
method in its completed position, placed, consolidated & for fill above water level compacted. The quantity
computed from actual cross sections to the finished grade shall be corrected by applying the anticipated
settlement for one year period after reclamation determined by laboratory test of the sample of soil borings to
get its volume measurement @ complete position. No shrinkage factor correction shall be applied to the
quantity as computed above. The basis of computation shall be the approved construction survey conducted
by the Contractor in the presence of the designated / assigned Project Engineer.
The accepted quantities as provided above shall be paid for @ the contract unit price per cubic meter of
fill in its completed position in the reclamation w/c price & payment except as otherwise provided shall be full
compensation for materials, labor, excavating, dredging, hauling, placing, compacting, equipment, tools, test
& incidentals necessary to complete the item.
Pay Item No. & Description Unit Measurement
Reclamation Cubic Meter
Item 805 - Dredging
805.1 Description
This item shall consist of the excavation of sea beds, river beds, bottoms of creeks or esteros, and other
bodies of water for the purpose of deepening or removing of silt or any unsuitable materials or soil layers up
to the deepening or removing of silt or any unsuitable materials or soil layers up to the required bottom
elevation & grade line & disposal of same @ areas indicated on Plans or as designated by the assigned
Project Engineer.
805.2.1 Construction Survey & Reference Elevation

All elevation shall be referred to the mean lower water (MLLW) elevation, 000.A construction survey shall be
undertaken by the Contractor under the control of the designated / assigned Engineer to serve as basis for
the computation of the actual volume of dredged materials.
805.2.2 Equipment
The contractor shall furnish all the necessary dredging equipment to assure satisfactory prosecution of the
work.
805.2.3 Execution of the Work

The dredging work shall be undertaken by the Contractor starting from the downstream section or w/in the
limits indicted on the plans & in accordance w/ the Specifications & approved work schedule.
805.2.4 Materials to be dredged

All available data regarding the materials to be dredged are given in the soil investigation reports & as
indicated in the boring logs on the Plan. Materials to be dredged may range from muck, sandy loam to coral.
The contractor may at his own initiative verify or check @ his own expenses all the data regarding the
materials to be encountered. He shall not be entitle to any claim against the government in case of incorrect
interpretation of the borings or laboratory test results of the soil investigation.
805.2.5 Dredging Tolerances ( Over depth )

The dredging shall be executed according to the depths elevations indicated on the Plans. No elevation
higher than the indicated elevation shall be tolerated. An allowance of 300 mm shall be acceptable for over
dredging, but in no case shall the entire dredging area shall be dredged to the allowable 300 mm tolerance.
All quantities due to over dredging shall be @ the contractor’s expense.
In case of excessive over dredging ( beyond the 300 mm tolerance ) the contractor shall on his account
backfill the over dredged areas and / or take all necessary measures as approved by the Engineer to protect
the stability of nearby structures.
805.2.6 Dredging Slopes

All dredging slopes shall be to the specified gradient & w/in the limits specified on the Plans.
Page 43 of 120
805.2.7 Dredging Basins
The theoretical boundaries of dredging are shown on the Plans. The dredging shall be carried out to the
specified depth w/ the permissible over dredging specified in Sub Section 805.2.5 The Preferred degree of
slopes between the original bottom & the indicated dredging level is 1 (vertical) to 4 (horizontal) for layers of
clay & 1 to 6 for layers of sand & silty sand & 1 to 10 for layers of clay & 1 to 6 for layers of sand & silty sand
& 1 to 10 for layers of mud or silt.
805.2.8 Dredging Adjacent Waterfront Structures

In addition to the requirements mentioned in subsection 805.2.7 the following shall apply for dredging carried
out adjacent waterfront structures:
a. The maximum permissible over dredging is 300 mm w/in the strip defined in d.
b. Dredging adjacent to any part of sheet pile walls on the berm specified in d shall be carried out to the
depth specified w/o over dredging.
c. Dredging adjacent to any part of rock bulkhead or rock breakwater shall not be allowed w/in the
specified in (d). Dredging adjacent to any structure provided w/ toe protection shall not be deeper than
the level of the toe protection or as specified on the Plans.
d. The limits of strip or berm mentioned in a, b & c are as follows:
- Berm from the quay line or toe of a rock mound structure to the basin in front.
- Strip – from the outside limit of the berm & further out the basin.
- The width of the berm & strip shall be as follows :
Berm Strip
Rubble Mound Structure 5m 10 m

Sheet Pile Walls 3m 20 m
e. Dredging outside the strip may proceed in accordance w/ sub-section 805.2.5
The contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety of any permanent structures on the site. During the
dredging operations, the sheet pile walls shall be observed regularly for deflection of the top edge. Temporary
& permanent bench marks & reference points shall be established for determining possible movements of
waterfront structures.
805.2.9 Disposal of Spoils

All unsuitable dredged materials shall be dumped @ the spoil area shown on the Plans or into the open sea
as directed by the designated/ assigned Project Engineer. Good quality dredged material shall be dumped in
reclaimed areas in accordance w/ item 806. Reclamation. Excess quantities shall be deposited @ areas as
designed by the Engineer.
805.2.10 Articles of Value or Wreckage

Articles of value, wreak age or obstructions discovered on the site shall be reported by the contractor in
writing to the Engineer who in turn shall consult w/ the proper agency / official concerned for their proper
disposal.

The Engineer shall verify that the dredging between the pre and post dredging surveys, subjected to the
condition of subsection 805.2.5, Dredging Tolerances.

The cost of dredging shall be paid based on the computed volume of dredge materials multiplied by the
contract unit price for the particular pay item shown in the Bid schedule, w/c price & payment shall constitute
full, compensation for dredging, handling & disposal including labor, equipment, tools & incidentals necessary
to complete this item.
Pay Item Description Pay Unit
805 ( 1 ) Dredging - soils cu.m

805 ( 2 ) Dredging – coral material cu.m
Item 1001 – Storm Drainage & Sewerage System
1001.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, equipment & labor for the complete installation of the
storm drainage system to include all pipings, gutters, canal catch basins, junction boxes, handholes,
manholes & other appurtenant structures, & sewerage system to include all sanitary sewer piping & septic
vault where no public sewer exist, from the building to the point of discharge.
1001.2.1 Materials for storm drainage system shall meet the requirements specified in the following standard
specifications :
Page 44 of 120
Portland Cement ASTM C-150

Fine & Coarse Aggregate ASTM C-33
Reinforcing Steel ASTM A-615
Non-reinforced Concrete Pipes ASTM C-14
Reinforced Concrete Pipes ASTM C-76 (AASHTO M-86 )
Cast Iron Pipes ( for conductors & downspout ASTM A-74
Galvanized Iron Pipes Scheduled 40
( for conductors & downspouts ) ASTM A-120
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) for conductors & downspouts) ASTM 2729
Where the covers for catch basins, junction boxes, manholes & canals for gratings are required same
shall be made of wrought iron & of the dimensions as shown on the Plans.
1001.2.2 Materials for sewerage system shall meet the requirements specified in the following standard
specification:
Cast Iron Pipes and fittings ASTM A-74

Pig Lead (for securing & sealing joints) ASTM B 29-77
PVC Pipes & Fittings ( where called in plans ) ASTM D 1784
Solvent Cement (for securing PVC joints) ASTM D 2564
Where PVC Pipes & fittings are used, joints shall be secured w/ rubber “O” ring or solvent cement, as the
case maybe. Oakum for joints in bell & spigot pipes shall be made from hemp fiber, braided or twisted & oil
impregnated free from lumps, dirt & extraneous matter.
1001.3.1 Installation of Pipes

Under no circumstances shall pipes shall all be laid under water & when the trench condition or the
weather is unsuitable for such work.
a. Bedding. Materials such as sand, sandy soil or any approved material shall be used to provide a firm
foundation of uniform density. The bedding shall have a minimum thickness equivalent to one forth ( ¼ ) of
the pipes diameter.
b. Laying of Pipes, Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering & placing pipes into trenches in order to
preclude damage. Laying of pipes shall start upgrade w/ the spigot end of bell – and – spigot pipe , or the
tongue end of tongue – and – grooved pipe, positioned towards the direction of the flow. The pipes shall be
laid in accordance w/ the grades & alignments shown in the Plans. The spigots or tongue shall be adjusted in
bells or grooves to provide uniform space around joints to receive mortar. Blocking or wedging between spigot
& bell or between tongue & groove to attain proper spacing shall be allowed provided such blocking / wedging
shall not interfere w/ the caulking & shall not affect the water tightness of the joint.
c. Bell & Spigot Joint for Drain Pipe. The first pipe shall be properly bedded @ the required grade. Just below
the spigot of the first unit, a sufficient space shall be provided for engaging the bell end of the second pipe.
The spigot shall be carefully cleaned w/ a wet brush & the upper exterior portion applied w/ mortar to such
a thickness as to bring the inner surfaces of the abutting pipes flush & even. The bell end of the second pipe
shall be cleaned w/ a wet brush & uniformly matched w/ the spigot of the first pipe so that the sections are
closely fitted. After the second pipe is laid, the remainder of the joint shall be fitted w/ mortar, & a bead shall
be formed around the outside of the joints w/ sufficient amount of additional mortar. The inside of the joints
with sufficient amount of additional mortar. The inside of the joints shall be wipe and finished smooth. The
mortar bead on the outside shall immediately be protected with cover of wet burlap or wet earth for at least
three ( 3 ) days curing.
d. Tongue and groove Joint for Concrete Pipe. The first pipe shall be properly bedded. A shallow excavation
shall be made underneath the joint and filled with mortar to provide a bed second pipe. The tongue end of the
first pipe shall be carefully cleaned w/ wet brush & soft mortar applied around the upper half of the tongue.
After cleaning & positioning the second pipe close to the first, mortar shall be applied around the lower half of
the groove. With just sufficient thrust, the second pipe shall be brought in close contact with the first until
mortar is squeezed out of the joint. Sufficient mortar shall be used to fill the joint & to form a bead on the
outside.
e. Mortar for joint. Mortar shall be a mixture of Portland Cement, sand & water mixed in the proportion by
volume of one part cement to two parts of clean sand w/ just sufficient amount of water for plasticity.
f. Leaded Joints of Cast Iron Pipes. Joints of cast iron pipes shall be packed w/ braided or twisted oil –
impregnated hemp or oakum, properly caulked around the joint. The packing shall be at least 20mm below
the rim of the hub or bell & this space shall be filled w/ molten pig lead in one continuous pouring. The “ ring “
of pig lead formed around the joint shall be properly caulked by appropriate caulking tools to render the joints
watertight.
1001.3.2 Concrete structures, Concrete structures such as catch basins, canal gutters, junction boxes &
manholes for the drainage system, & septic vault for sewerage system, shall be constructed in accordance
with the Plans and Specifications on Concrete Work.
Page 45 of 120
1001.3.3 Sewer Connections and Clean – Outs
a. The outlet of the septic vault shall be connected to the street drain or to other discharge point where no
sanitary sewer exists. Connection with the sanitary sewer shall not be made in such a manner that any & all
the service water, as well as house & other liquid wastes, will flow to the sanitary sewer. Provided, that
isolated faucets used exclusively for garden purposes may, in the discretion of the proper authorities, be
allowed not to flow into the sanitary sewer.
b. Clean – outs or roding holes consisting of cast iron extensions with long sweep elbow fittings shall be
provided @ the ends of runs at every change of directions. Clean outs shall be capped w/ cast brass ferrules
w/ threads & screwed – on removable brass plugs. Clean outs extended outside the building & raised to the
level of finished grade shall be terminated w/ the same cast brass ferrule w/ brass plug set into a concrete
slab shall be 150 mm thick 7 300 mm square finish flush w/ grade.
1001.3.4 Incidental Earthwork
Incidental earthwork for the storm drainage & sewerage systems, such as excavation & backfilling shall be
undertaken in accordance w/ applicable part of Excavation Filling & Grading.
1001.3.5 Inspection & Quality Control
Materials shall be inspected & accepted as to quality before same are installed. Pipings installed in trenches
shall first be inspected, tested & approved by the Engineer before these are covered or backfilled. All defects/
leaks disclosed by the water test shall be remedied to the satisfaction of the Engineer & any extra cost shall
be @ the expense of the contractor.
Pipes, culverts, gutters, canals & gratings installed in place & accepted by the Engineer, shall be measured
by the number of units constructed & accepted.
The quantities as determined in sub-section 1001.4 shall be paid @ the contract unit price for each of the item
w/c shall constitute full compensation for all materials, labor, tools & equipment & all other incidentals
necessary to complete the item.
Payment shall be made under:
1001.2 ( a ) Pipe ( Kind & size ) meter
1001.2 ( b ) Fitting ( Kind & size ) each
1001.2 ( c ) Concrete Gutter meter
1001.2 ( d ) Concrete Canal meter
1001.2 ( e ) W.I Grating meter
1001.2 ( f ) Catch Basin each
1001.2 ( g ) Junction Box each
Item 1013 = Corrugated Metal Roofing
1013.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing all plant, equipment, tools, materials & labor required to properly
perform & complete the corrugated metal roofing, together w/ related accessories such ridge/ hip rolls,
valleys, gutters & flashing, when called for on Plans in conformity w/ his Specifications.
1013.2.1 Corrugated & Plain Galvanized Iron Sheets
Corrugated galvanized iron (G.I) sheets, including plain G.I. sheets for roofing accessories, shall be cold
– rolled meeting ASTM A 153 & w/ spelter coating of zinc of not less than .381 kg/ sq. m ( 1,25ounce square
foot ), conforming to ASTM A 525 OR pns 67:1985. Unless otherwise specified or shown on Plans roofing
sheets shall be gauge (0.48 mm thick) & provided in long span sizes to minimize end lap sheets shall weigh
not less than 3.74 kg/sq.m & shall be marked or stamped showing the gauge, size, amount of zinc coating,
brand & name of manufacturer. Test specimens shall stand being bent through 180° flat on itself w/o fracture
of the base metal & without flaking of the zinc coating.
Page 46 of 120
1013.2.2 Strap Fasteners

Strap fasteners shall be gauge 26 G.I. 25 mm wide & sufficiently long to bend around up to the opposite
face of purlin, with corners chipped off @ the riveting ends.
1013.2.3 Rivets , Washers and Burrs

Rivets & Washers shall be galvanized mild iron. Rivet shall not be less than 5 mm in diameter. Washers
inside diameter shall provide snug fit to the rivet.
1013.2.4 Soldering Lead

Soldering lead shall have a composition of 50 percent tin & 50 percent lead, conforming to ASTM B 32.
Rivets & burrs for lap joints of gutters, downspouts & flashing shall be copper not less than 3.175 mm in
diameter ( No. 8 ).
1013.2.5 Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessories

Ridge/hip rolls, valley, flashing & counter flashings, gutters & downspouts, whenever required, shall be
fabricated from plain G.I. sheets. Ridge/hip rolls, flashing & counter flashing shall be gauge 26. Valleys,
gutters & downspouts shall be gauge 24 unless otherwise specified on Plans. Wire basket strainers shall be
galvanized, gauge 24. Roof ventilators, whenever required shall be fabricated from gauge 26 plain G.I.
Sheets & constructed to the dimensions & details shown on Plans.
1013.3.1 Preparatory Work

Preparatory to the installation of corrugated G.I.roofing, purlins should have been placed & spaced
properly to fit the length of roofing sheets to be used such that the centerline of the purlins @ ends laps are
150 mm from the bottom line of end laps & intermediate purlins are place equidistantly. Top of purlins should
be @ the same plane.
1013.3.2 Installation of Corrugated G.I. sheets

Installation of corrugated G.I. sheets w/ end laps shall start @ the lower part of the roof & proceed
towards the direction of monsoon wind w/ side laps of two - and - a – half (2½) corrugations. End laps shall be
250 mm minimum. Each sheet shall fastened temporarily by 1.83 mm diameter by 25 mm long galvanized flat
head nails @ valleys of corrugations covered by side or end laps. Succeeding upper rows of corrugated G.I.
sheets shall be installed in the same manner until the entire roof area is covered.
Valleys, ridge/hip rolls & flashings when required, shall be installed before fastening the roofing sheets w/
galvanized straps & rivets. One strap shall be riveted @ each alternate corrugation @ the gutter line, the ridge
line & at end laps & the straps bent around & nailed to the purlins. Riveting @ intermediate purlins between
end laps shall be done @ every fourth corrugation. Rivet shall be provided w/a galvanized mild iron washer
above the sheet. Rivet shall be sufficiently long to permit forming a hemispherical head. Riveting shall be
done such that the lead washer shall be compressed to provide a watertight fit around the rivet.
1013.3.3 Installation of Roofing Accessories
a) Ridge & Hip Rolls

Ridge & hip rolls shall lap @ least 250 mm over roofing sheets & together, shall be riveted @ every
second corrugation.
b) Valleys
Valleys shall lap at least 450 mm each way under the roofing sheets & shall be secured to the framework
w/ galvanized nails, such nails placed below the roofing sheets. Rivets along side of the valley shall be @
every second corrugation.
c) Flashing
Flashing, of gauge 26 plain G.I. sheets, unless otherwise specified, shall be installed along intersections of
roofs with concrete or masonry walls in accordance w/ details shown on Plans. Flashing running parallel to
sheet corrugation shall lap at least two corrugations with edge turned down. Flashing across sheet
corrugation or @ an angle thereto, shall lap @ least 250mm & the edge of flashing turned down @ each
corrugation. The vertical portion of flashing adjoining wall shall be @ least 200 mm wide & provided w/
counter flashing.
d) Counter Flashing
Counter flashing sheets of gauge 24 plain G.I. shall be built into preformed wedge – shape groove of
concrete or masonry wall. The edge to be built into wall groove shall have a 25 mm strip bent 45 degrees &
shall be sealed in the groove w/ cement mortar or caulking compound.
e) Reglets
Reglets, when required per plans in connection w/ counter flashing, shall be fabricated products approved
by the Engineer, complete w/ fittings. Reglets shall be located not less than 200 mm or more than 40 mm
above roofing. Reglet plugs shall be spaced not more than 300 mm on centers. Open – type reglets shall be
filled w/ fiber board or other suitable separator to prevent crushing of the slot during installation. The counter
flashing shall be inserted into the full depth of reglet & the reglet lightly punched every 300 mm to crimp the
reglet & the counter flashing together.
Page 47 of 120
f) Gutters
Gutters, from gauge 24 plain G.I. sheets, shall be fabricated to the shape & dimensions indicated on the
plans. The rear side of the gutter shall have a 12.5 mm strip bent 30 degrees & shall be not less than 12.5
mm higher than the opposite side. Gutter joints shall be flat seam folded in the direction of flow & soldered
evenly. Otherwise gutters joints shall be lapped @ least 25 mm, fastened together w/ 3.175 mm diameter
( No.8 ) copper rivets & burrs, and sealed by soldering along both exposed edges of lap.
Gutter shall be attached to fascia board or roof nailer w/ galvanized nails or screws spaced @ not more
than 900 mm on centers & at a point slightly higher than leading edge of gutter. As additional support, gutter
shall have plain G.I. strap hangers 25 mm wide fastened to roof nailers by screw shank – type nails & riveted
to the gutter’s leading edge. Strap hangers shall be spaced @ not more than 900 mm on centers. When
shown on Plans that gutter is not fixed to fascia board or purlin, gutter shall be supported by wrought iron
(W.I) hangers not less than 4.75 mm thick & 19 mm wide spaced @ not more than 900 mm on center. W.I
hanger shall be fabricated to fit configuration of the gutter & attached to fascia board or purlin w/ two (2) No. 8
flat head wood screws.
Gutter shall be installed w/ a pitch of 1 in 100 slope to downspout.
g) Downspouts
1. Downspouts
Unless specified otherwise, downspouts shall be plain G.I., thickness fabricated to the dimensions
shown on the Plans & installed @ indicated locations. Downspout shall be secured to the wall w/ G.I. straps
25 mm wide, spaced @ more than 1000 mm & anchored w/ concrete nails. Inlets of downspouts shall be
fitted w/ gauge 14 wire basket strainers.
2. Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Downspouts
When shown on Plans that downspouts are other than G.I sheets, downspouts shall be unplasticized
polyvinyl chloride ( UPVC ) pipes & fittings w/ dimensions indicated & conforming w/ ASTM D 3033 & D 3034.
Joints shall be made w/ either solvent cement or rubber “O- rings “ depending on the design of fitting for the
joints. Rubber “ O- rings” shall be neoprene type. Heat & oil resistant, complying w/ ASTM F- 477. Downspout
shall be secured to adjoining wall w/ plain G.I. straps 25 mm wide & spaced @ not more than 1000mm.
h) Roof Ventilators
Roof ventilators, whenever shown on Plans shall be firmly secured to the roofing or roof structure by
means of rivets. Roof ventilators installed on the roof @ place other than the ridge shall be provided w/
adequate flashing around intersection w/ roofing to ensure watertight joints.
1013.3.4 Joints of G.I Roofing Accessories
a) Soldered Joints
Joints made by lapping couple w/ riveting shall be rendered watertight by soldering. All edges of uncoated
sheet metal to be soldered shall be pertained before soldering. Soldering shall be done slowly with well
heated iron in order to thoroughly heat the seam & sweat the solder completely through the full length of the
seam. Upon completion of soldering. Acid shall be neutralized by washing thoroughly w/ water.
b) Non-soldered Joints
Non – soldered joints of G.I. gutters, downspouts & flashings shall Non- soldered joints of G.I. gutters,
downspout & flashings shall be done by flat lock seams. Two adjoining edges of lock seam shall be bent 90°.
One bent strip twice in width w/c shall be bent down over the up tuned narrower strip & pressed together.
Once properly interlocked, the joint shall be flattened such that the edge of the wider strip be concealed.
1013.3.5 Roof Installation on Metal Purlins
Installation on metal purlins shall follow the same procedure as that on wood purlins, except that fastening
shall be done w/ thread – cutting, zinc – coated steel screws, NO. 12 by 50 mm. having hexagonal heads &
provided w/ neoprene washers. Screw holes shall be drilled using 5 mm ( 13/64” ) diameter bit.
1013.3.6 Water Leak Test
The completed roofing shall be tested for water tightness @ side & end laps @ joints of roofing sheets w/
ridge / hips rolls, valleys & flashing by means of waters pray system. The water – spray system shall have
nozzle w/c will deliver water pressure of 2 kg/sq. cm. directly to the joint being tested in such manner & for a
duration directed by the Engineer. All defective works as determined by this test shall be remedied by the
contractor @ his expense & the test shall be repeated until the work is found satisfactory.
Roofing sheets shall be measured & paid for on an area basis square meters or part thereof, such roofing
sheets including all laps fasteners and rivets as installed complete & accepted. Ridge / hip rolls, flashings,
Page 48 of 120
valleys, gutters & down-spouts shall be measured in linear meter of completed & accepted work such
measurement shall include necessary straps & fixings required complete installation.
Roof ventilators shall be measured & paid for per unit completely installed & accepted. The different pay
items under roofing work shall be designated the following number, description & unit of measure :
1013.2.1 Corrugated roofing, gauge 26 sq. m.
1013.2.2 Fabricated metal roofing accessories :
a) Ridged / hip rolls, flashings, gutters

& downspouts, gauge 26 lm.
b) Valleys, counter flashing gutter &

Downspouts gauge 24 l.m
1013.2.3 Roof ventilators each
Payment for completely installed & accepted roofing sheets & required fabricated metal roofing accessories
shall be based on actual measurement & the corresponding contract unit price thereof. Payment based on
contract unit price shall constitute full compensation.
Item 1016 – Waterproofing
1016.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing all waterproofing materials, labor, tools, equipment & other facilities &
undertaking the proper installation works required as shown on the plans & in accordance with Specification.
1016.2.1 Cement – base Waterproofing
1016.2.2-1.1 Cement – base Waterproofing
1016.2.1.1 Cement – base waterproofing powder mix shall be cement base, aggregate type, heavy duty,
water – proof coating for reinforced concrete surface & masonry exposed to water. The aggregates are
graded & sized so as to mesh perfectly & are selected for purity, hardness, strength & are non – metallic.
When mixed w/ other ingredients are free flowing, water – proof coatings that possesses strength durability &
density.
1016.2.1.2 Additive binders shall be of special formulation of acrylic polymers & modifiers in liquid form used
as additive w/ cement – base powder mix that improves adhesion & mechanical properties.
1016.2.1.3 Water shall be clean, clear & potable.
1016.2.2 Membrane Waterproofing
1016.2.2.1 Primer shall be of asphalt cold applied, free from water & other foreign matters, & shall conform to
the specifications requirement defined in ASTM D- 41.
1016.2.2.2 Built – up membrane shall be made of smoothly woven fibers that are impervious to acid, heat
dampness & totting. It Should permit complete penetration of asphalt compound or bituminous coating in the
woven glass fiber.
1016.2.2.3 Preformed membrane shall be self – sealing flexible cold applied bituminous sheets bonded to .15
mm thick polyethylene film.
1016.2.2.4 Mopping Materials

a) Type A soft adhesive self – sealing asphalt for structure below ground Level.
b) Type B where asphalt is not exposed on temperature exceeding 51.7 celcius for structure above
ground level.
c) Type C where asphalt is exposed on vertical surface in direct sunlight or above temperature of 51.7 celcius
structure above ground level.
1016.2.3 Liquid waterproofing alternate material shall be of elastomeric or other substances applied in liquid
form & cured to an impervious membrane.
1016.2.4 Hydrolytic Waterproofing

a. Hydrolytic waterproofing mix shall be of heavy cement – based coating compatible to reinforced concrete
wall. It must prevent built – up of water vapor w/c causes blistering. Flaking & peeling of paints films.
Page 49 of 120
b. Material must thoroughly fill & seal pores & voids that it can be used against water pressure on the interior
surface of walls below grade.
Roof decks, balconies, toilet & bathrooms, gutters, parapet walls & other areas indicated on the plans to
be waterproof shall first be rendered w/ cement based waterproofing before any type of waterproofing is
applied.
1016.3.1 Surface Preparation
1016.3.1.1 Concrete surface to be applied w/ waterproofing shall be structurally sound, clean & free of dirt,
loose mortar particles, paints films oil, protective coats, efflorescence laitance, etc.
1016.3.1.2 All defects shall be properly corrected & carefully formed to provide a smooth surface that is free
of marks & properly cured prior to application works.
1016.3.1.3 Inside corners where vertical & horizontal structure meet shall be provide w/ cants measuring 50
mm by 50 mm or rounded @ corners a minimum of 50 mm radius.
a. Concrete slabs shall be properly graded to drain rainwater. Provided a minimum pitch 1 on 100 to
satisfactorily drain rainwater freely into the drainage lines, gutters & downspouts.
b. Drainage connections & weep holes shall be set to permit the free flow of water.
c. Any expansion & contraction joints shall be cleaned, primed, fitted w/ a backing rod & caulked w/ sealant.
d. Provide reglets of about 40 mm deep by 40 mm wide & 250 mm above floor finish along walls or parapets
for the termination of the membrane.
e. Prepared surfaces shall be cured & kept wet by sprinkling w/ water @ regular intervals for a period of @
least three days & allow surfaces to actually set w/n seven days.
f. Ensure that the prepared surface has completely set & all defects repaired.
g. When there is reasonable doubt as to the presence of moisture in the surface to be applied w/ membrane
expose that same direct to sunlight for another 2 days or heat all suspected are using blow torch.
1016.3.2 Preformed or built – up membrane
1016.3.2.1 Application procedure
a) Prior to application of membrane concrete surfaces should be sound & cured w/o the use of curing
compound. Apply a coat of concrete neutralizer to remove oil dirt’s & other contaminants.
b) Apply asphalt primer @ the rate of one gallon per 100 square feet evenly by spraying or by paint brush.
c) Application shall be done one direction strip by & overlapping each other to assure uniform thickness.
d) Allow primer to dry until it is ready to receive next coat or layer as specified in the manufacturing
instructional manual.
e) As soon as primer costing is workable, lay a single layer of preformed or built – up membrane smoothly
free from irregularities & folds.
f) Lay preformed or built up membrane conforming to size & shape of the surface area to be covered.
g) Carefully layside & end laps in order to assure an even thickness throughout the whole surface area to be
covered.
h) When the whole surface area is completely covered apply a single coat of asphalt primer @ the rate of 3
to 4 gallons per ( 100 square feet ).
i) Meshes of treated woven glass fiber shall not be completely closed or sealed by the primer coat, but shall
sufficiently open to allow successive moppings of the ply material to seep through.
j) Cover ply not more than the minimum amount of surfacing necessary to prevent sticking on ply.
k) After application surface shall be uniformly smooth, free from irregularities folds & knots.
m) Where weather disturbance interrupt the work & exposing the membrane to moisture remove the layer
exposed to moisture & repeat procedure until completion of the process.
1016.3.2.2 Protective Coatings
a) Where lying of the built – up or preformed membrane conforms w/ the number of piles required as shown
on the plans lay a mixture or sand mastic in the proportion of one part asphalt or bituminous material & four
parts coarse screened sand by volume. with a steel trowel @ an average of 3 mm thick over the surface of
membrane.
b) Then @ the rate of one gallon per (100 square feet ) apply aluminum heat reflecting finish thoroughly over
the dried sand mastic coating.
1016.3.2.3 Metal Cap Flashing
a) Provide cap flashing gauge 24 plain G.I where shown on the plans.
b) Where cap flashing is connected to preformed lock in through – wall form upper edge of cap flashing to
engage in preformed lock. Mallet locks down tight to provide a spring action against base flashing.
c) Then @ the rate of one gallon per (100 sq. feet) apply aluminum heat reflecting finish thoroughly over the
dried sand mastic coating.
d) Where cap flashing is terminated in raked joints or in prepared masonry or stone reglet fasten flashing w/
wedge every 12 inches & fill reglet on vertical surfaces continuous w/molten lead.
1016.3.3 Membrane Waterproofing Cement Topping
Page 50 of 120
a) Provide concrete cement topping of at least 50 mm thick on the membrane after five days where protective
coatings has been applied.
b) Concrete cement topping should be class “ A “ w/ 9 mm pea gravel & preferably provided w/ 2 – way 6 mm
dia. Temperature steel bars.
1016.3.4 Liquid Waterproofing as Membrane
Before any coat of liquid waterproofing is applied concrete cement surface shall conform w/ the requirement
defined in sub – section 1017.3.1.1
1016.3.4.1 Application procedure
a) Prior to application of membrane concrete surfaces should be sound & cured w/o the use of curing
compound. Apply a coat of concrete neutralizer to remove oil, dirt & other contaminants.
b) Apply a primer coat of elastomeric coating standard of the manufacturer @ the rate of 1/3 gallon per 9.28
meter square 100 sq. feet over the surface area to be applied.
c) After the primer coat has dried penetrating & sealing the concrete surface areas coated apply 25 dry mills
of coating @ the rate of one gallons per 100 square meter for 3 coatings on the same concrete surface areas
coated w/ liquid waterproofing.
d) The concrete surface areas coated shall be allowed to dry in twenty four hrs. if relative humility is above
4.44 Celsius.
e) Liquid waterproofing membrane may be applied by paint brush airless spray, notched trowel, squeegee or
roller preferably 20-25 mills maximum thickness each wet coat.
1016.3.4.2 Precaution
a) Liquid waterproofing membrane should not be applied unless the ambient temperature is 4.44 Celcius or
higher & should not proceed during inclement weather condition.
b) Extra care shall be observed by persons doing the application works especially those that have skin
sensitiveness must wear gloves while applying the liquid waterproofing. The liquid water – proofing
membrane compound is highly combustible.
1016.3.5 Protection of membrane water proofing surfaces in general
a) Concrete topping in situation where it is desirable to have a bond between membrane waterproofing &
topped slab it is recommended that the concrete topping be placed as the membrane dries, usually 46 hrs.
after final applied.
b) If a bond is not required, the membrane should be protected w/ asphalt asbestos board or asphalt felt
paper such time as topping or concrete covering is applied. Prior to topping or placing concrete covering the
membrane shall be inspected & initiate repair work where necessary.
c) Exposed membrane surfaces @ concrete gutters & areas not frequently disturbed may be allowed.
d) Membrane waterproofing @ basement shall be covered & protected by installing tightly butted asphalt
impregnated protection boards w/ a minimum thickness of 6 mm & preferably 12 mm on horizontal areas.
All projections & pipes must be protected w/ asbestos cloth approximately 6 mm thick. Install the bituminous
paving w/ extra care to avoid damage, lift of curi the underlying protection boards.
This item shall be measured in sq. meters for areas actually rendered w/ membrane waterproofing &
number of packages for integrally waterproofed areas accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 1017.4 shall be paid for @ the contract unit
price for integral & membrane waterproofing work w/c price & payment shall be full compensation for
furnishing & applying integral & membrane waterproofing materials including the use of equipment & tools,
labor & incidentals necessary to complete the work.
1016 (a) Cement base water proofing sq. m
1016 (b) Liquid waterproofing sq.

1016 (c) Built – up & preformed membrane sq. m
Item 1010 – Wooden Doors and Windows
1010.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, hardware, plant, tools, labor and services necessary
for complete fabrication and installation of wooden doors & windows of the type & size as shown on the plans
& in accordance w/ the following specifications and applicable specification under item 1003 on Carpentry &
Joinery Works.
Page 51 of 120
1010.2.1 Lumber
Lumber of doors, windows & jambs and panel when required, shall be kiln – dried w/ moisture content of
not more than 14% and shall be of the specie indicated on the Plans and / or specified under Item 1003 on
Carpentry and Joinery Works.
1010.2.2 Plywood
Plywood for veneer of solid core and hollow core flush doors shall be 3 – ply, rotary cut, 6 mm thick
ordinary plywood, Class B grade. Marine or waterproof plywood. Rotary cut, 3 – ply 6 mm thick shall be used
for flush doors @ toilets & bathrooms or @ places where these are exposed to moisture.
1010.2.3 Adhesive
Adhesive shall be water resistant resins & shall be non – staining.
1010.2.4 Glass for window panes shall be 3 mm thick, smoked or Industrix type unless otherwise shown on
the Plans or indicated in the Schedule of Doors & Windows.
1010.2.5 Capiz Shells

Capiz shells, when required for window sashes, shall be of selected quality, free from dirt or blemishes
& shall be large enough to obtain flat square piece.
1010.2.6 Hardware
Hardware shall be as specified under Item 1004 on Building Hardware.
1010.3.1 Fabrication
Wooden doors & windows, including frames, shall be fabricated in accordance w/ the designs & sizes
shown on the plans. The fabricated products shall be finished square, smoothly sanded & free from damage
or war page.
a. Flush Type Hollow Core Doors

Flush type hollow core doors shall be adequately framed w/ stiles & top & bottom rails having a
minimum thickness of 44 mm & width of 75 mm. Two intermediate rails @ least 44 mm wide shall be provided
for stiffness.
The stiles & the top & bottom rails shall be rabbeted @ least 10 mm wide to receive the 6 mm thick
plywood veneer. A lock block shall be provided @ each stile. Long enough to connect to the two intermediate
rails & least 75 mm wide for mounting the lockset. The plywood veneer shall be glued & nailed to the framing
w/ 25 mm long finishing nails space @ not more than 150mm on centers.
b. Flush Type Solid Core Doors

Flush type solid core doors shall be fabricated in the same manner as the hollow core type except that
spaces between stiles & rails shall be filled & fitted w/ wood blocks of the same specie & of uniform thickness
thinner by about the thickness of the plywood veneers. The filler blocks shall be secured to either stiles or
rails by nails. Stiles & rails of flush type doors shall be joined by means of blind mortise & tenon joint, tightly
fitted, glued & locked w/ bamboo pin 5 mm round.
c. Panel doors
Stiles & rails of panel doors shall have a minimum thickness of 44 mm & width of 140 mm.
Rails minimum thickness of 44 mm & width of 140 mm. Rails shall be framed to stiles by mortise & tenon
joints. Rabbets or grooves of stiles by mortise & tenon joints. Rabbets or grooves of stiles & rails to receive
panels shall be 6.5 mm wide & 20 mm deep. Integral moldings formed on both faces of stiles & rails framing
the panels shall be true to shape & well defined. Intersections of moldings shall be mitered & closely fitted.
Panels of the same specie & having a minimum thickness of 20 mm shall be beveled around its edges up
to a minimum width of 50 mm, both faces. The beveled edges shall closely fit into the grooves of stiles & rails,
but free to move to prevent splitting when shrinkage occurs.
d. Window Sashes w/ Glass Panes or wood Panels

Window sashes shall be fabricated in conformity w/ the design, size & type of installation shown on the plans.
Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, stiles & rails shall be tan guile with minimum thickness of 30 mm &
width of 70 mm. jointing of stiles & rails shall be mortise & tenon secure w/ glue & bamboo pin. Stiles & rails
shall rabbeted @ the exterior face for mounting glass panes or wood panels. Integral moldings formed as
frames for panes or panels shall be true to shape, sharply defined & mitered @ joints. Separate moldings of
the same design shall be provided for fixing glass panes & wood panel from the outside.
e. Window Sashes w/ Capiz Shells

Stiles & rails shall be of the same sizes specified under Item 1010.3.1 (d) and assembled w/ mortise &
tenon joint. Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, lattices for framing capiz shall be tan guile, 8 mm thick &
15 mm wide, spaced @ not more than 60 mm on centers both ways. Groove 2 mm wide & 5 mm shall be
made @ sides of lattices to receive the preformed capiz shells.
The lattices shall be assembled w/ half lap joints @ their intersections & the assembled lattices
containing the capiz shell shall be framed into the stiles & rails. Selected capiz shells shall be washed to
Page 52 of 120
remove dirt & blemishes & drier under the sun for bleaching effect. Capiz shells shall be cut square to
required sizes w/ sharp bench cutter to produce non – serrated & non – peeling edges.
f. Sliding Type Widow Sashes

Stiles of sliding type window sashes shall be framed to the top & bottom rails w/ mortise & tenon joints.
tenons shall be formed on the stiles. Joints shall be tightly fitted, glued & locked w/ bamboo pins. Top &
bottom rails shall be 10 mm wider than stiles. Top rails shall be rabbeted to form tongue flush w/ the outer
face, w/ width 0f 8 mm & height of 10 mm. The stiles & rails shall be rabbeted as specified under Item
1010.3.1 ( d ) to receive glass panes or wood panels.
g. Awning Type Window Sashes

Tenons of rails shall be fitted into the mortise formed on the stiles & joints glued & locked. The stiles &
rails shall be rabbet as specified under 1010.3.1 (d) for mounting of glass panes. Series of sashes to be
installed vertically shall have their meeting rails rabbeted for half lapping when in closed position.
h. Casement Type Window Sashes

Rails of casement type window sashes shall be lifted to stiles w/ mortise & tenon joint. Tenons shall be
formed in the rails. Meeting rails shall be rabbeted to provide for half lapping when in closed position. The
stiles & rails shall be rabbeted as specified under Item 1010.3.1 (d) for mounting of glass panes or wood
panels.
i. Door and Window Frames

Framing of the specie(s) specified under Item 1003 shall be fabricated in conformity with the profile &
sizes shown on the plans. Frames shall be assembled w/ tightly fitted tongue & grove joint mitered @ both
sides, & nailed. The assembled frames shall be finished square & flat on the same plane. Assemble frames
shall be braced temporarily to prevent their distortion during delivery to the site & installation.
a. Frames shall be set plumb & square in concrete / masonry work or framework of walls or partitions.
Frames set in concrete or masonry shall be painted w/ hot asphalt @ its contact surface & provided w/ two
rows of common wire nails 100 mm long for anchorage. The nails shall be staggered & space @ 300 mm on
center along each row. Frame set in concrete shall be installed in place prior to concrete work.
Frames set in masonry work may be installed after laying of hollow concrete blocks, bricks or adobe.
Space between frames & masonry shall be fully filled w/ cement mortar proportioned 1:3.
b. Hinged Doors
Hinged doors, whether panel or flush type w/ standard height of 2100 mm & width of not more than 900
mm shall be hung w/ four loose – pin butt hinges, 100 mm x 100 mm. swing out exterior doors shall be hung
w/ four fast – pin butt hinges. Two hinges shall be fitted @ third points between top & bottom hinges. Care
should be taken to ensure that the hinges are fitted such that their pins are aligned for ease of pin insertion &
smoothness of operation. For added smoothness pin should be lightly greased. Hammering of hinges to attain
proper alignment shall not be allowed.
For wider & heavier doors such as narra panel doors, an additional hinge shall be fitted 100 mm below the
top hinge to counteract the door tilting action. Mounting screws shall be screwed in place in their entire length,
not forced into place by hammering. Hammering of screw into place shall not be permitted.
c. Sliding Doors
Overhead tracks, standard, locally manufactured as per Plans shall be installed level & mounting bracket
secured in place w/ lag screws supplied w/ the set. Bracket shall be 1000 mm on centers. Hangers, two each
per door leaf, shall be per fitted & bolted to the door rail. For panel doors the hangers shall be centered 100
mm from the edges of the door. If there is no adequate space for installing the door w/ its attached rollers,
through either end of the track the per fitted hangers shall be disassembled for connection to the rollers. After
installation on the track, set the door plumb & in alignment by means of the adjustment mechanism integrated
w/ the roller assembly.
d. Lock Installation
Locks of doors shall be fitted @ the same height, centered 1000 mm above the finished floor level. Locks
shall be installed in conformity w/ the templates & instructions supplied w/ locksets. Holes for mounting locks
shall be properly formed to provide snug fit & rigid attachment of the locks to the doors. Strike plates shall be
fitted on the door frame in true alignment w/ the lock latch.
e. Sliding Type Window Sashes

Sashes shall be trimmed to fit height of opening. A clearance of 2 mm shall be provided between the
tongue’s base @ the top rail & the bottom of the window head. The same clearance shall be provided
between the sash tongue & the groove @ the window head. Paraffin wax shall be applied to contacts of
sliding surfaces. The bottom rails shall be fitted w/ standard brass guided spaced 75 mm from both ends of
the rail, mounted flush w/ the inner face & secured w/ three brass screws each guide.
f. Casement Type Window Sashes

Sashes shall be trimmed to fit size of opening. w/ provision for half lapping of meeting stiles. Right side
sash shall lap onto the left side sash. Sashes shall be fitted w/ two brass-plated narrow hinges, 50 mm x 75
mm, spaced 150 mm from top & bottom of stiles. In lieu of hinges, sashes maybe hung w/ cadmium – plated
steel casement adjusters 200 mm long, subject to prior approval of the Engineer. The top & bottom rails of
casement type window sashes shall be milled to provide for the installation of adjusters.
g. Awning Type Window Sashes
Page 53 of 120
Installation of awning type sashes shall be by means of casement adjusters specified under Item 1010.3.2
1010.4 Measurement & Payment

Frames of doors & windows shall be measured & paid for on the basis of number of sets completely
installed & accepted by the Engineer.
Doors & windows shall be measured & paid for based on the number of square meter involved in the
completed & accepted installation. Payment per square meter shall include cost of required hardware & all
incidental expenses. But exclusive of locks for doors. Locks shall be paid for per set completely installed. The
different pay items under Wooden Doors & Windows shall be designated the following number, description &
unit of measure :
1010 (a) Frames ( Jambs, sills, head transoms & mullions set
1010 (b) Doors ( Flush or panel ) sq. m.
1010 (c) Window Sashes sq.m.
1010 (d) Door Locks set
Item 1001 – Storm Drainage & Sewerage System
1001.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing all materials, equipment & labor for the complete installation of the storm
drainage system to include all pipings, gutters, canals catch basin, junction boxes, handholes, manholes &
other appurtenant structures,& sewerage system to include all sanitary sewer piping & septic vault where no
public sewer exist, from the building to the point of discharge.
1001.2.1 Materials for storm drainage system shall meet the requirements specified in the following standard
specifications:
Portland cement ASTM C-150

Fine & Coarse Aggregate ASTM C-33
Reinforcing Steel ASTM A – 615
Non – reinforced Concrete Pipes ASTM C – 14
Reinforced Concrete Pipes ASTM C-75 (AASHTO M-86 )
Cast Iron Pipes ( for conductors & downspouts) ASTM A – 74
Galvanized Iron Pipes Scheduled 40
( for conductors & downspouts ) ASTM A -120
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) ( for conductors &
Downspouts) ASTM 2729
Where the covers for catch basins, junction boxes, manholes & canals for gratings are required same shall be
made of wrought iron & of the dimensions as shown on the plans.
specifications :
Cast Iron Pipes & Fittings ASTM A – 74

Pig Lead ( for securing & sealing joints ASTM B 29 – 77
PVC Pipes & Fittings ( where called in Plans ) ASTM D 1784
Solvent Cement (for securing PVC joints ) ASTM D 2564
Where the covers for basins, junction boxes, manholes & canals for grating are required same shall be made
of wrought iron & of the dimensions as shown on the plans.
specifications:
Cast Iron Pipes & Fittings ASTM A – 74

Pig Lead ( for securing & sealing joints ASTM B 29-77
PVC Pipes & Fittings (where called in Plans) ASTM D 1784
Solvent Cement (for securing PVC joints) ASTM D 2564
Where PVC pipes & fittings are used, joints shall be secured w/ rubber “O” ring or solvent cement, as the
case maybe. Oakum for joints in bell & spigot pipes shall be made from hemp fiber, braided or twisted & oil
impregnated free from lumps, dirt & extraneous matter.
1001.3.1 Installation of Pipes

Under no circumstances shall pipes shall be laid under water & when the trench condition or the weather is
unsuitable for such work.
Page 54 of 120
a. Bedding. Materials such as sand, sandy soil or any approved material shall be used to
provide a firm foundation of uniform density. The bedding shall have a minimum thickness
equivalent to one – fourth (1/4 ) of the pipe’s diameter.
b. Laying of Pipes Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering & placing pipes into trenches in
order to preclude damage. Laying of pipes shall start upgrade w/ the spigot end of bell - &
spigot pipe, or the tongue end of tongue - & groove pipe, positioned towards the direction of
the flow. The pipes shall be laid in accordance w/ the grades & alignments shown in the
Plans. The spigots or tongues shall be adjusted in bells or grooves to provide uniform space
around joints to receive mortar. Blocking or wedging between spigot & bell or between tongue
& groove to attain proper spacing shall be allowed provided such blocking / wedging shall not
affect the water tightness of the joint.
c. Bell & Spigot Joint for Drain Pipe. The first pipe shall be properly bedded @ the required
grade. Just below the spigot of the first unit, a sufficient space shall be provided for engaging
the bell end of the second pipe. The spigot shall be carefully cleaned w/ a wet brush & the
upper exterior portion applied w/ mortar to such a thickness as to bring the inner surfaces of
the abutting pipes flush & even. The bell end of the second pipe shall be cleaned w/ a wet
brush & uniformly matched w/ the spigot of the first pipe so that the sections are closely fitted.
After the second pipe is laid, the remainder of the joint shall be fitted w/ mortar, & a bead shall
be formed around the outside of the joints w/ sufficient amount of additional mortar. The
inside of the joints shall be wiped & finished smooth. The mortar bead on the outside shall
immediately be protected w/ a cover of wet burlap or wet earth for @ least three (3) days for
curing.
d. Tongue & Groove Joint for Concrete Pipe. The first pipe shall be properly bedded. A shallow
excavation shall be made underneath the joint & filled w/ mortar to provide a bed second
pipe. The tongue end of the first pipe shall be carefully cleaned w/ wet brush & soft mortar
applied around the upper half of the tongue. After cleaning & positioning the second pipe
close to the first, mortar shall be applied around the lower half of the groove. With just
sufficient thrust, the second pipe shall be brought in close contact w/ the first until mortar is
squeezed out of the joint. Sufficient mortar shall be used to fill the joint & to form a bead on
the outside.
e. Mortar for joint. Mortar shall be a mixture of Portland cement, sand & water mixed in the
proportion by volume of one part cement to two parts of clean sand w/ just sufficient amount
of water for plasticity.
f. Leaded Joints of Cast Iron Pipes. Joints of cast iron pipes shall be packed w/ braided or
twisted oil – impregnated hemp or oakum, properly caulked around joint. The packing shall be
@ least 20 mm below the rim of the hub or bell & this space shall be filled w/ molten pig lead
in one continuous pouring. The “ ring “ of the pig lead formed around the joint shall be
properly caulked by appropriate caulking tools to render the joints watertight.
1001.3.2 Concrete structures. Concrete structures such as catch basins, canal gutters, junction
boxes & manholes for the drainage system, & septic vault for sewerage system, shall be
constructed in accordance w/ the Plans & specifications on Concrete Work.
1001.3.3 Sewer Connections & Clean – Outs
a. The outlet of the septic vault shall be connected to the street drain or to other discharge point
where no sanitary sewer exists. Connection w/ the sanitary sewer shall not be made w/o the
permission of the proper authorities, but shall be made in such a manner that any & all the
service water, as well as house & other liquid wastes, will flow to the sanitary sewer.
Provided, that isolated faucets used exclusively for garden purposes may, in the discretion of
the proper authorities, be allowed not to flow into the sanitary sewer.
b. Clean – outs or Roding holes consisting of cast iron extensions w/ long sweep elbow fittings
shall be provided @ the ends of runs & @ every change of directions. Clean – outs shall be
capped w/ cast brass ferrules w/ threads & screwed- on removable brass plugs. Clan – outs
extended outside the building & raised to the level of finished grade shall be terminated w/ the
same cast brass ferrule w/ brass plug set into a concrete slab shall be 150 mm thick & 300
mm square, finish flush w/ grade.
1001.3.4 Incidental Earthwork

Incidental earthwork for the storm drainage & sewerage systems, such as excavation &
backfilling shall be undertaken in accordance w/ applicable part of Excavation Filling Grading.
1001.3.5 Inspection & Quality Control

Materials shall be inspected & accepted as to quality before same are installed. Pipings
installed in trenches shall first be inspected, tested & approved by the Engineer before these are
covered or backfilled. All defects / leaks disclosed by the water test shall be remedied to the
satisfaction of the Engineer & any extra cost shall be @ the expense of the contractor.
Page 55 of 120
Pipes, culverts, gutters, canals & gratings installed in place & accepted by the Engineer, shall
be measured by the meter along their axes, Catch basins, junction boxes, manholes & septic
vault shall be measured by the number of units constructed & accepted.
The quantities as determined in sub-section 1001.4 shall be paid @ the contract unit price for
each of the items w/c shall constitute full compensation for all materials, labor, tools & equipment
& all other incidentals necessary to complete the item.
1001.2 (a) Pipe ( kind & size ) Meter

1001.2 (b) Fitting ( kind & size ) each
1001.2 (c) Concrete Gutter Meter
1001.2 (d) Concrete Canal Meter
1001.2 (e) W.I Grating Meter
1001.2 (f) Catch Basins each
1001.2 (g) Junction Box each
Item 1009 Jalousie Window
1009.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all jalousie window materials, labor, tools & equipment
require as shown on the plans & undertaking the proper installation in accordance w/ this
Specification.
1009.2.1 Jalousie metal frame shall be made of extruded aluminum section true to details
conforming to the specifications requirements defined ASTM B 211.
1009.2.4 Wood slats shall be fabricated from kiln – dried tan guile w/ provision of interlocking
grooves to prevent penetration of rain water.
1009.2.5 Wrought iron grilles shall be manufactured from 12 mm square bars or round bars
conforming to the shop drawing submitted & approved by the Engineer.
1009.2.6 Wood jalousie window assembly shall be fabricated of kiln dried wood boards consisting
of the following members:
a. Vertical operating mechanism shall be of pair zigzags cut member one fixed to the wood
jambs.
b. Slats / blades are made w/ interlocking grooves. It shall be of kiln – dried tan guile 15.8 mm
thick by 100 mm wide.
c. Lever handles are made of wrought iron flat bars that should lock the unit in closed position.
1009.2.7 Wood jambs shall be fabricated from well seasoned wood specie conforming to item
1003, Carpentry & Joinery requirements.
1009.3.1 All window frames shall be in place & rigidly anchored in a prepared opening before any
installation work is commenced.
1009.3.2 Window openings shall fit commercial height of the vertical operating mechanism /
jalousie metal frames to avoid cutting of members.
1009.3.3 Installation Procedures
1009.3.3.1 Glass Jalousie Windows
a. Jalousie metal frames shall be temporarily fixed @ bottom & top ends using wood screw.
b. Place glass slats into the slat clips starting below until the whole units are entirely glazed.
c. Operate units & make adjustment where required taking into consideration that all units are
properly aligned & satisfactory operational.
d. Close the slats clips in manner that the glass slats are securely fixed them permanently fix all
units w/ woods screws.
1009.3.3.2 Wood Jalousie Windows
a. Jalousie metal frames shall be temporarily fixed @ bottom & top ends using wood screw.
Page 56 of 120
b. Place glass slats into the slat clips starting below until the whole units are entirely glazed.
c. Operate units & make adjustment where required taking into consideration that all units are
properly aligned & satisfactory operational.
d. Close the slats clips in a manner that the glass slats are securely fixed them permanently fix
all units w/ wood screws.
1009.3.3.2 Wood Jalousie Windows
a. Fit each unit into the prepared window opening & temporarily fix w/ nails @ bottom & top
ends of vertical operating mechanism.
b. Operate units & make adjustments where required.
c. Fix all units permanently & properly align each units.
All works performed under this item shall be measured in square meters or number of units
installed complete w/ glass, woo slats & ready for service.
The completed work, measured in accordance w/ Sub- section 1009.4 & accepted by the
Engineer, shall be the basis for payments w/c price & payment constitute full compensation for
furnishing all materials fabricated wood products, tools, equipment, labor & incidentals necessary
1009 (1) Glass Jalousie Window sq. m.

1009 (2) Wood Jalousie Window sq. m.
Item 1008 – Aluminum Glass Windows
1008.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all aluminum glass window materials, labor, tools &
equipment required in undertaking the proper installation as shown on the Plans & in accordance
w/ this Specification.
1008.2.1 Frame & panel members shall be fabricated from extruded aluminum section true to
details w/ clean, straight, sharply defined profiles & free from defects impairing strength or
durability. Extruded aluminum section shall conform to the specification requirements defined in
ASTM B 211.
1008.2.2 Screws, nuts. Washers. Bolts, rivets & other miscellaneous fastening devices shall be
made of non – corrosive materials such as aluminum, stainless steel, etc.
1008.2.3 Hardware for fixing & locking device shall be closely matched to the extruded aluminum
section & adaptable to the type & method of opening.
1008.2.4 Weather strip shall be first class quality flexible vinyl forming an effective seal & w/o
adverse deformation when installed.
1008.2.5 Glazing shall conform to the requirements specified in item 1012.
108.2.6 Pile weather strip shall be silicon treated & free from residual wetting agents made of soft
fine hair as on wool, fur, etc.

For all assembly & fabrication works the cut end shall be true & accurate, free of burrs & rough
edges. Cut – out recesses, mortising & grinding operation for hardware’s shall be accurately
made & properly reinforced.
1008.3.1 Installation Procedure
1008.3.1.1 Main frame shall consist of head, sill & jamb.
1008.3.1.2 Window sash
1008.3.1.3 Window panel shall be jointed @ corners w/ miter & fixed rigidly to ensure weather
tightness.
Page 57 of 120
1008.3.1.4 Sliding windows shall be provided w/ nylon sheave. Sliding panels shall be suspended
w/ concealed roller overhead tracks w/ bottom guide pitch outward & slotted for complete
drainage. The sliding panels shall be provided w/ interior handles. The locking device shall be a
spring loaded extruded latch that automatically engages special frame hips.
1008.3.1.5 Casement window type shall be provided w/ two hinges fabricated from extruded
aluminum alloy. They shall open on stay arms having adjustable sliding friction shoes to control
window panel operations. Locking device shall be one arm action handle for manual operations
complete w/ strike plate.
1008.3.1.6 All joints between metal surface & masonry shall be fully caulked.
1008.3.1.7 Aluminum parts in contact w/ steel members shall be properly insulated by a coat of
zinc chromate, primer / bituminous paint applied to the steel surface.
1008.3.1.8 Weather strip shall be furnished on edges @ the meeting stiles.
1008.3.2 Shop Finish

Expose aluminum surfaces shall be electrotype hard coats such as anodize, satin, etc.
1008.3.3 Protection
All aluminum parts shall be protected adequately to ensure against damage during transit &
construction phase.
1008.3.4 Cleaning
1008.3.4.1 The contractor does not only protect all entrance units during the construction phase
but shall also be responsible for removal of protective materials & cleaning the aluminum surface
including glazing before work is accepted by the Engineer.
1008.3.4.2 Aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned w/ kerosene or gasoline diluted w/ water & then
wipe surface using clean cloth rugs.
1008.3.4.3 No abrasive cleaning materials shall be permitted in cleaning surface.

Aluminum glass window fully equipped w/ fixing accessories & locking devices hall be measured
in square meters actually installed in place & accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The area of aluminum glass windows in square meters ready for services as provided in the Bill
of Quantities shall be the basis of payment based on the unit bid or contract unit price w/c price &
payment constitute all materials, labor including incidentals.
1008 (1) Aluminum Sliding Windows sq. m
1008 (2) Aluminum Casement Windows sq. m
Item 1007 – Aluminum Glass Door
1007.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all aluminum glass door materials, labor tools, & equipment
required in undertaking the proper installation as shown on the Plans & in accordance w/ this
specification.
1007.2.1 Frame & panel members shall be fabricated from extruded aluminum sections true to
details w/ clean , straight, sharply defined profiles & free from defects impairing strength or
durability. Extruded aluminum sections shall conform to the specification requirements as defined
in ASTM B 211.
1007.2.2 Screws, nuts, washers, bolts, rivets & other miscellaneous fastening devices shall be
made of non – corrosive materials such as aluminum. Stainless steel, etc.
Page 58 of 120
1007.2.3 Hardware for fixing & locking devices shall be closely matched to the extruded
aluminum section & adaptable to the type & method of opening.
1007.2.4 Vinyl weather strip shall be first class quality flexible vinyl forming an effective seal &
w/o adverse deformation when installed.
1007.2.5 Pile weather strip shall be silicon treated & free from residual wetting agents & made of
soft line hair as on wool, fur, etc.
1007.2.6 Glazing shall conform to the requirement specified in Item1012 Glass & Glazing.

For all assembly & fabrication works the cut ends shall be true & accurately jointed, free of burrs
& rough edges. Cut – out recesses, mortising, grinding operation for hardware’s shall be
accurately made & properly reinforced when necessary.
1007.3.1 Main frame shall consist of head sill & jamb stiles specifically designed & machined to
interfit & be joined @ corners w/ self threading screws.
1007.3.1.2 Frame sill shall be stepped & sloped w/ offset weep holes for efficient drainage to the
exterior.
1007.3.1.3 Door panel shall be accurately joined @ corners assembled & fixed rigidly to ensure
weather tightness.
1007.3.1.4 Aluminum glass door & main frame shall be installed in a prepared opening to be set
plumb, square, level & true to details.
1007.3.1.5 All joints between metal surface & masonry shall be fully caulked to ensure weather
tightness.
1007.3.1.6 Sliding type door panel shall be equipped w/ concealed roller overhead tracks w/
bottom guide.
1007.3.1.7 Double action type door panel shall be equipped w/ heavy duty hinges that will control
the door leaf in a close or open position.
1007.3.1.8 Weather strip shall be furnished on edges @ the meeting stiles of doors.
1007.3.1.9 Where aluminum is to be in contact w/ steel concrete cinder, block, tile, plaster or
other similar masonry construction the aluminum surface shall be back painted before erection w/
a bituminous paint.
1007.3.2 Shop Finish

Exposed aluminum surfaces shall be electro type hard coats.
1007.3.3 Protection
a. All aluminum parts shall be protected adequately to ensure against damaged during transit &
construction operations.
b. Aluminum parts in contact w/ steel members shall be properly insulated by a coat of zinc
chromate primer applied to the steel or by application of bituminous paint.
1007.3.1 Cleaning
a. The Contract does not only protect all entrance units during construction but also
Responsible for removal of protective materials &cleaning aluminum surfaces.
c. Aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned w/ plain water w/ kerosene or gasoline & then
Wipe surfaces using clean cotton fabric, No abrasive cleaning agents shall be permitted,

Aluminum glass door, fully equipped w/ fixing accessories & locking devices shall be measured in
square meters base on actual in place installed as shown on the plan accepted to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.

The area in square meters of aluminum glass doors installed including main frame & ready for
service as provided in item 1007.4 shall be the basis of payment based on the unit bid or contract
unit price.
1007 Aluminum glass door sliding type,
Page 59 of 120
Designated as D – on the schedule sq. m.
Item 1006 – Steel Doors & Frames
1006.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing & installing all fabricated steel doors & frames equipped w/ fixing
accessories & locking devices in accordance w/ the Plans & / or shop drawings & as herein specified.

All door cladding plates or panels shall be formed from 20 cold-rolled, prime quality steel. Frames shall be
formed from gauge 16 cold – rolled steel. The materials used shall conform w/ the specification requirement
of ASTM –A505.
1006.2.1 Tubular Door ( Casement / sliding )

a. Hollow steel doors shall be custom built of size & details as indicated on the Plans & / or shop drawings.
Cladding of doors shall be flush or louver type. Doors shall be 44 mm thick, side hinged or overhead hung, as
called for on Plans.
b. Flush doors shall be constructed from two outer steel sheet not lighter than gauge 20, w/ edges welded &
finished flush. The outer face sheets shall be reinforced w/ gauge 24 vertical channels or interlocking zee
members. Sound insulation filler of cork fiberboard, mineral wool board or asbestos shall have smooth, flush
surfaces w/o any visible joints or seams on exposed faces or stile edges except around glazed or louvered
pane inserts. Top & bottom frame of doors shall have continuous reinforcing channels welded to face sheets.
The channel for exterior doors shall be inverted type, not lighter than gauge 16, constructed to form a weather
seal. Glazed opening shall be provided where indicated & molding around glazed opening shall not be lighter
than gauge 20 metal.
1006.2.2 Grille doors shall be of flat, square or round bars (wrought iron) as indicated on the plans framed on
galvanized black iron pipe or flat wrought iron bars, of the design shown on the Plans.
1006.2.3 Tabular steel frames shall be machine pressed true to details to size & shape as shown on the
Plans & shall have full welded unit or knockdown field assembled type construction @ corners & other joints.
1006.2.4 Steel Louvers

Louvers shall be machine pressed conforming to the size & design indicated on the plans w/ removable
louver pane formed to fit the metal sub frame of openings. The steel sheets shall meet the requirement of
ASTM 505, rivets of ASTM B 316, screws, bolts, nuts & washers of ASTM B 211.
1006.2.5 Anchors & Fasteners

Anchors shall be steel, zinc coated or coated or painted w/ rust inhibitive paint, of sizes, shapes & design per
manufacturer’s standards. Floor anchors shall not be lighter than gauge 18, w/ exception of jamb anchors for
installing door frames in metal latch & plaster assemblies w/c shall be minimum of gauge 16 & shall not extent
no more than 20 mm out of the back of the jamb.
1006.3.1 Fabrication
Corner joints of frames shall be mitered & welded conforming to manufacturer’s standard manual for metal
doors. All contact edges be closed tight. Welds on exposed surface shall be ground smooth & shall be neat in
appearance. Joints for knock – down type frame corners shall be designed for simple field assembly of
header to jamb members by concealed tenon, splice plates, or other type concealed in interlocking joint that
will produce square & rigid corners. Joints shall be securely locked in place during erection & the alignment of
adjoining members shall be maintained. All bolted connections shall be provided w/ lock units.
106.3.2 Shop Finish

a. Hot or cold Phosphate Surface Treatment
All steel doors, frames & louvers shall be cleaned thoroughly phosphate – treated to assure maximum paint
adherence & prime finish in accordance w/ the following operations:
1. After fabrication, grease & dirt shall be removed by a hot alkali solution & rinsed w/ a diluted solution or
chronic acid.
2. After cleaning, all parts shall be immersed in hot or cold phosphate solution & rinsed w/ a diluted solution
or chronic acid.
3. After drying under controlled temperature, one coat of shop primer shall be applied by dipping type
especially developed for materials treated w/ phosphates. Cleaning, phosphating, dipping or spraying of
shop primer & even drying shall be done on a continuous operation in the factory.
Steel doors, frames & louvers shall be set plumb & true in openings. The joint between frame & masonry shall
be carefully caulked. Contacts between door / frame & adjacent steel shall be sealed w/ mastic.
1006.3.4 Wall Anchors

A minimum of three anchors shall be provided for each jamb. Anchors shall be located opposite the top &
bottom hinges & midway between top & bottom anchors. Anchors for fastening frames to masonry shall be
Page 60 of 120
adjustable. Corrugated & perforated & shall extend not less than 200 mm into masonry. Anchors for fastening
frames to metal or wood stud partitions shall be welded to metal or nailed to wood studs respectively. anchor
for fastening frames to previously placed concrete or masonry shall be secured to existing construction w/
expansion bolts. Frames shall be fastened securely w/ anchors. Anchors for fastening frames to partitions of
plaster on metal lathe shall be secured firmly to back of frames that shall receive the latch. Adjustable strut
anchors shall be provided on each side of frame for fastening to the structural members of the partition & of
the ceiling framing above. The size & type of strut anchors shall be as recommended by the metal door
manufacturer.
1006.3.5 Floor Anchors

Floor anchors shall be provided @ the bottom of each jamb member, anchors shall be fixed / adjustable &
drilled for 10 mm diameter anchor bolts.
Where floor fill occurs, the bottom of frames shall terminate @ the indicated finished floor levels & shall be
supported by adjustable extension clips resting on & anchored to the structural slab.
1006.3.6 Hardware
Side bronze butts for side hung doors, overhead pocket hardware for track & roller types & locksets shall be
suitable for the service required & subject to the approval of the Engineer & as provided in Item 1004,
hardware.

Steel doors, frames, louvers, accessories & hardware shall be measured in square meters / per set as shown
on the plans. A set shall consist of metal door, jambs, anchors & hardware except locksets.

The area in sq. m. for every hollow steel door, flush door, grille door & steel louver installed ready for service
shall be the basis of payment based on the unit bid or contract unit price.
1006 (a) Hollow Steel Door sq. m / set

1006 (b) Flush Door sq. m / set
1006 (c) Grille Door sq. m / set
1006 (d) Steel Louver Door sq. m / set
Item 1030 – Acoustical Ceiling
1030.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing & installing acoustical ceiling materials, tool, labor & equipment necessary
as shown on the Plans & Specifications.

All acoustical materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer’s original unbroken packages or containers w/c
are labeled plain w/ manufacturer’s name & trademark. All materials shall be carefully handled & delivered @
the jobsite & provided w/ a storage for materials or damage by water or dampness. All acoustical ceiling
materials shall be provided w/ non – combustible mineral fiber & have a 9,12,15 mm thickness & must have
the following physical properties as hereunder specified.
Property Figures Test Method
1.Thickness Tolerance 0.2 mm JIS A 6307

2. Density 320 350 kg/ sq.m JIS A 6307
3. Moisture Content 1.0 2.0 % JIS A 6307
4. Flexural Strength 20 – 25bkgf / sq. cm JIS A 6307
5. Thermal Conductivity .047 kcal mhc° JIS A 6307
6. Light Reflectance LRI ( 87% ) ASTM C 523
7. Non-combustibility Approved by the Japanese Ministry of Construction as non –
Combustible class 1 under the approval of No. 1021
8. Flame Spread Class 1 (0-25) ASTM E 84
9. Flame Spread Class 25 US Federal Specs SS –s 118a

The acoustical ceiling materials to be used shall conform to the samples approved by the Director of Bureau
of Design. All acoustical works shall be done by men experienced & qualified to do this particular specialty
trade.
1030.3.1 Inspection of surfaces

The acoustical contractor shall verify & examine all surfaces covered & the conditions under w/c all acoustical
ceiling work is to be performed & must notify all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected by the
Engineer.
1030.3.2 Preparation of surfaces
Page 61 of 120
Before any installation of work begins, all surfaces must be clean, dry, level & free from irregularities & tested
for adhesive bond.
1030.3.3 Installation of acoustical Ceiling Materials

The installation of acoustical materials shall be in accordance w/ the detailed section & w/ the manufacturer’s
manual instructions. Acoustical materials shall be cut as required to fit the perpendicular condition & should
be properly secured by anchorage & other accessories to complete the installation. No mechanical work shall
be exposed on the finish work. All joints around electrical outlets, pipes, & other work extending through
materials shall be sealed w/ caulking.
1030.3.3 Cleaning of Surfaces

The finished surfaces shall be cleaned & must be free from any spots, dirt marks & dust by the use of soft art
gum eraser. For larger areas w/ larger smudges, use a chemical treated new sponge rubber pad or wallpaper
cleaner. Dust shall be removed by brushing lightly w/ a soft brush or clean rag, or by vacuuming w/ soft brush
attachment.
1030.3.5 Guarantee
The materials & workmanship furnished under this item shall be guaranteed by the acoustical contractor for a
period of one (1) year from the completion date & final inspection & accepted in writing by the engineer. Any
defective materials or workmanship shall be replaced & corrected by the acoustical contractor.

The work commenced under this item shall be measured the ceiling area covered in square meter ( sq. m ) or
by number of pieces.

The quantity determined shall be paid for at the Contract Unit Price w/c price constitute full compensation
including labor, materials, tools & equipment & incidentals necessary to complete this item
Pay Item No. & Description Unit of Measurement
Acoustical Ceiling Panel Square meters / number of pieces
Item 1031 – Acoustical Treatment
1031.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing all materials, tools, labor, equipment & performing all operations for all
acoustical treatment requirements as shown on the plans & in accordance w/ this Specification.
1031.2.1 Material Requirement

All acoustical products shall be produced by manufactures regularly engaged in the manufacture of similar
materials & w/ a history of successful production acceptable to the Architect / Engineer.
1031.2.1 Acoustical Tile / Board / Panel

Acoustical tile / board / panel shall be manufactured of non – combustible mineral fiber having varied
thickness ranging from 9.12.15 mm etc. Color, textural & physical appearance shall be approved by the
Architect / Engineer.
1031.2.2 Spray – on Acoustical Material

Sprayed – on acoustical material shall be mineral fiber manufactured as acoustic treatment for structural
frames & the like.
1031.2.3 Other Materials

Other materials not specifically described but essential to complete the acoustical treatment required shall be
selected by the Contractor & subject to the approval of the Architect / Engineer.

The Contractor shall verify & examine all surfaces to be applied w/ acoustic treatment & the conditions under
w/c acoustical treatment & the conditions under w/c tiles / boards / panel are to be installed & must notify all
unsatisfactory conditions to the Architect / Engineer before any work is performed.
a. Surface to be applied w/ sprayed – on acoustical material shall be clean dry, free from irregularities &
tested for adhesive bond.
b. Ceiling T-runners & plywood backing as the case may be shall be properly aligned, level, rigidly
Anchored, true to vertical height requirements.
c. Partitions, wall to be rendered acoustical treatment shall be true to details properly plumbed & rigidly
Anchored.
Page 62 of 120
a. Acoustical tile / board / panel shall be installed properly in accordance w/ the manufacturer’s
recommendation
b. Anchoring of each type shall be as indicated on the Plans or as approved by the Architect / Engineer
c. Sprayed – on acoustical treatment on metal surfaces like structural frames, trusses & bracing systems
shall be applied @ a rate & method of application recommended by the manufacturer & as approved by
the Architect / Engineer. Test on acoustics shall be done prior to placement of sprayed – on acoustical
treatment to determine the necessity & design of the acoustical treatment.
1031.3.3 Cleaning of Surfaces

The finished surfaces shall be cleaned & must be free from any spots, dirt marks & dust by the use of soft art
gum eraser. For larger areas w/ larger smudges, use a chemical treated new sponge rubber pad or wallpaper
cleaner. Dust may be removed by brushing lightly w/ a soft brush or clean rag, or by vacuuming w/ soft brush
attachment.
1031.3.4 Guarantee
The materials & workmanship furnished under this item shall be guaranteed by the acoustical contractor for a
period of one (1) year from the completion date & final inspection & accepted in writing by the Engineer. Any
defective materials or workmanship shall be replaced & corrected by the contractor w/o extra cost borne to
the owner.

The work commenced under this item shall be measured the ceiling area tin square meter or by number of
pieces.

The quantity determined in sub – section 1035.4 shall be paid for @ the Contract Unit Price w/c price
constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools & equipment & incidentals necessary to complete
this item.
Payment will be paid under:
Pay Item Number Description Unit Measurement
1031.2.1 Acoustical tile / board / panel sq. m

1031.2.2 Sprayed – on acoustical material sq. m
Item 1601 – Backfill & fill
1601.1 Description
This item shall consist of all operations required to replace excavated & unsuitable materials to fill up
depression to grade or built up low areas in accordance w/ the approved Plans & Specifications.

The selected materials shall be free from grass, roots, brush, or other vegetation, or rocks having maximum
dimension larger 150 mm. Materials placed w/n 150 mm of any structure or pipe shall be free from rocks or
unbroken masses or earthly materials having maximum dimension larger than 75 mm.

Backfill materials shall be laid in horizontal layers, not more than 200 mm in thickness & compacted to 100
percent of maximum density & to be carried to the level of the surrounding ground or to the lines & grades as
shown on the drawings. Backfill materials shall not be place around or upon any structure until the structure
has attained sufficient strength to withstand the loads imposed. Special precaution shall be taken to prevent
any wedging action against completed structures or facilities. In the course of filling, any sloped surface in the
excavation around structure shall be “ cut into “ horizontally w/ every layer placed, in order to eliminate any
wedge action. Where the use of power driven compacting equipment would not be practical, layers or
materials shall be compacted by any other method w/c will produce the requirement for compaction.

The quantity of backfill & fill materials to be paid for under this item shall be the volume w/c were actually
placed & computed by the average end – area multiplied by total length.

Payment for all work under this item shall be paid @ the contract price per cubic meter for Backfill & fill, w/c
price & payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, hauling, depositing, compacting & leveling,
tools & other incidentals necessary to complete the item of work.
Page 63 of 120
1601 Fill & Backfill Cubic Meter
Item 1014 – Pre painted Metal Sheets
1014.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all repainted metal sheet materials, tools & equipment, plant including
labor required in undertaking the proper installation complete as shown on the Plans & in accordance w/ this
Specification.

All pre painted metal sheet & roofing accessories shall be oven baked painted true to profiles indicated on the
plans.
1014.2.1 Pre – Painted Roofing sheets

Pre – painted roofing sheets shall be fabricated from cold roiled galvanized iron sheets specially tempered
steel for extra strength & durability. It shall conform to the material requirements defined in PNS 67:1985.
Profile sections in identifying the architectural molded rib to be used are as follows: Regular corrugated, Quad
– rib, tri – wave, rib – wide, twin – rib, etc. Desire color shall be subject to the approval of the Architect /
Engineer.
1014.2.2 Gutters, Valleys, Flashings Hip & Ridge roll shall be fabricated from gauge 24 (.600 mm thick ) cold
= rolled plain galvanized iron sheets specially tempered steel. Profile section shall be as indicated on the
Plans.
1014.2.3 Fastening hardware shall be of galvanized iron straps & rivets. G.I. straps are of .600 mm thick x16
mm wide x 267 mm long ( gauge 26 x 5/8” x 10 – ½” ) & standard rivets.
1014.2.4 Base metal thickness shall be correspond to the following gauge designation available locally as
follows:
a. Base Metal Thickness Designated Gauge
.400 mm thick Gauge 28

b. Protective Coatings Thickness
1. Zinc 34.4 microns

2. Paint coatings
Top coat 15.20 microns
Bottom coat 6.8 microns
c. Overall thickness w/ protective coats
.400 mm .428 – 451 mm

.500 mm .532 – 551 mm
.600 mm .638 – 651 mm
d. Length of roofing sheet – available in cut to length long span length up to 18.29 meters
e. Special length & thickness are available by arrangements.

Before any installation work is commenced, the contractor shall ascertain that the top face of the purlins
on an even plane.

Before any installation work is commenced, the Contractor shall ascertain that the top face of the purlins on
an even plane.
1014.3.1 Handling / lifting / Positioning of sheets

Sheets shall be handled carefully to prevent damage to the paint coating. Lift all sheets or sheet packs on to
the roof frame w/ the overlapping down – turned edge facing towards the side of the roof where installation
will commence, otherwise sheets will have to be turned end to end during installation.
1014.3.2.1 Start roofing installation by placing the first sheet in position w/ the downturned edge in line w/
other building elements & fastened to supports as recommended.
1014.3.2.2 Place the downturned edge of next sheet over the edge of the first sheet, to provide side lap ^ hold
the side lap firmly in place. Continue the same procedure for subsequent sheets until the whole roofing area
Page 64 of 120
is covered & / or ( Adopt installation procedure provided in the instruction manual for each type of
Architectural molded rib profile section ).
1014.3.2.3 For walling applications follow the procedure for roofing allow a minimum end lap of 100 mm (4”)
for vertical walling.
1014.3.3 Gutters, Valleys, Flashing ridge & hip rolls Gutters, valleys, flashing ridge & hip rolls shall be
fastened where indicated on the Plans by self – tapping screw or galvanized iron straps & rivets.
1014.3.4 End Laps

In case handling or transport consideration requires to use two or more end lapped sheets to provide full
length coverage for the root run, install each line of sheets from bottom to top or from eave line to apex of
roofing framing. Provide 150 mm minimum end lap.
1014.3.5 Anchorage / Fastening
1014.3.5.1 Pre painted steel roofing sheets shall be fastened to the wood purlins w/ standard length G.I
straps & rivets.
1014.3.5.2 For steel frame up to 4.5 mm thick use self drilling screw No.12 by 35 mm long hexagonal head w/
neoprene washer.
1014.3.5.3 For steel support up to 5 mm thick or more use thread cutting screw No. 12 by 40 mm long
hexagonal head w/ neoprene washer.
1014.3.5.5 Valley fastened to lumber & for walling use self – drilling wood screw No. 12 by 25 mm long
hexagonal head w/ neoprene washer
1014.3.5.6 Valleys fastened to steel supports use self drilling screws hexagonal head w/ neoprene washer.
Drill size is 5mm diameter.
1014.3.6 Cutting of sheets
1014.3.6.1 In cutting pre painted steel roofing sheets & accessories to place the exposed color side down.
Cutting shall be carried out on the ground & not over the top of other painted roofing product.
1014.3.6.2 Power cutting or drilling to be done or carried out on pre painted products already installed or laid
in position, the area around holes or cuts shall be masked to shield the paint from hot fillings.
1014.3.7 Storage & Protection

Pre painted steel roofing, walling products & accessories should be delivered to the jobsite in strapped
bundles. Sheets & / or bundles shall be neatly stacked in the ground & if left in the open it shall be protected
by covering the stack materials w/ loose tarpaulin.

The work done under this item shall be measured by actual area covered or installed w/ pre painted steel
roofing & / or walling in square meters & accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer / architect.

The area of pre painted steel roofing and / or walling in square meters as provided in Section 1014 shall be
paid for @ the unit bid or contract unit price w/c payment shall constitute full compensation including labor,
materials, tools & incidents necessary to complete this item.
Payment shall be made u

under :
1014 ( a ) Pre painted metal sheets sq. m.
Item 1005 – Steel Windows
1005.1 Description
This item shall consist of all fabricated steel windows fully equipped w/ fixing accessories & locking devices as
shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.

All members shall be of hot –rolled, low carbon, new billet steel, heavy section w/ depth of at least 33mm &
web thickness of at least 3mm. Frame members shall be of equal leg design section only @ points where
called for or shown on detailed drawings. Continuous angle fins, as indicated shall be furnished. Zee type
section of special design w/ offset permitting down turned leg of the ventilator member to seat flush when
ventilator is in a fully closed position, shall be used for frame @ sills. Ventilator members shall be special
angle shape. Frames of ventilator members shall have integral weather baffles providing double flat parallel
Page 65 of 120
weathering contacts of not less than 6 mm width on all four sides of the ventilator. Muntins shall be 25 mm by
25 mm rolled – tee sections. All members to be used shall conform w/ the specification requirements of
ASTM A”505”.The frame member shall afford not less than 16 mm continuous anchorage to surrounding
masonry. Unless otherwise specified / or indicated on Plan as residential casement, special size of section
shall be used.
1005.2.1 Residential Casement

Section shall be hot rolled new billet steel special design. Frame & ventilator members shall be specially
designed zee sections, not less than 25 mm in depth & not less than 3mm in thickness, w/ weathering baffles
rolled integrally to provide continuous double contact between frame & casement ventilator members. Muntins
shall be 19mm by 19 mm rolled tee – sections. Side hung hinges shall be of extension friction type welded to
both frame & ventilator w/ friction washers & steel a corn – nuts.
1005.2.2 Heavy Duty Side – hinged Ventilator

Frame & ventilator members shall be specially designed zee section not less than 33 mm in depth & not less
than 3 mm in thickness w/ weathering baffles rolled integrally to provide continuous double contact between
frame & side – hinged ventilator members. Muntin shall be 25 mm by 25 mm rolled tee-section. Simplex –
type hinges shall be of extension friction type w/ bronze friction washers & rust proofed steel a corn – nuts.
Hinged design shall provide ferrous to non ferrous contacts between all movable surfaces. Hinges shall be
welded to both frame & ventilator.
1005.2.3 Projected Ventilators
All members shall be hot rolled new billet steel window. Frames & ventilator sections shall be special angle
shape & not less than 33 mm deep from front to back not less than 3 mm in thickness. Weathering
projections, overlapping, parallel contacts @ both insides & outside of closure on all four sides of the
ventilator shall be 6 mm.
1005.2.4 Awning ventilators ( for series of ventilators operating simultaneously) Frame, ventilator & muntin
members shall be hot rolled new billet steel section not less than 33 mm deep, specially designed for steel
windows.
1005.3.1 Fabrication & Welds

Corners of frame & ventilator shall be mitered & electrically butt welded w/ exposed welds ground smooth.
Head drips shall be provided where ventilator extend to the top of the windows. Muntins shall be welded to
frames. Muntin intersections shall be welded w/ flush interior surfaces.
1005.3.2 Hardware ( fixing accessories & locking devices )
1005.3.2.2 Residential Casement, heavy duty side – hinged ventilator
a. Roto type : Each ventilator shall be hung on two heavy hot rolled steel of the extension type,
welded to both frame & ventilator. Hinged designed shall provide ferrous to non ferrous to
non ferrous contacts between all movable surfaces. Hardware shall control ventilator
independently of screen & shall consist of a polished bronze locking handle & worn drive
operator. Provide however that roto hardware shall not be used on any ventilator, the size of
w/c exceed 1 square meter in area. Ventilators over 150 mm in height shall have three
(hinges & double locking device.
b. Simplex – type : Hinges shall be of extension friction type w/ bronze friction washers & rust
proofed steel a corn – nuts. Hinged design shall provided ferrous to non ferrous contacts
between all movable surfaces. Hinges shall be welded to both frame & ventilator.
c. Polished bronze locking handle & strike shall be furnished for ventilator 500 mm & under in
height, two point locking devices & three (3) hinges for ventilators over 500 mm in height. Sill
adjuster shall be provided for ventilator over 1000 mm square meter in area.
1005.3.2.2 Projected Ventilators
Each ventilator shall be balanced on two heavy steel arms riveted to ventilator & frame. Rivet holes in arms
shall be bronze bushed. Uniform tension to hold ventilator in open position shall be obtained by two heavy
bronze, sliding friction shoes w/ adjustable compression springs enclosed in bronze housing attached to the
ventilator top rail member. The window frame member shall act as a guide for the friction shoe. Hardware
shall consist of polished bronze pole hook ring, cam handle & strike for outward projecting ventilators.
Polished bronze, pole operated spring latches, shall be substituted for locking handles on outward projecting
ventilator, out of each floor, polished bronze , cord operated, spring latches for inward projecting vents not
with in reach of floor provided w/ double line of best quality sash cord 5 mm to 6 mm in diameter extending
to 762 mm above floor. Polished bronze, under screen push bar working through the member to be furnished
for outward projecting ventilator when so indicated on Plans or drawings.
1005.3.2.3 Awning Ventilators

Each awning window so indicated on Plans shall be of the awning type window in w/c the ventilators operate
simultaneously & controlled manually. Each projecting ventilator shall be balance on two heavy steel
supporting arms. Arms for upper ventilators shall have tops pivots enclosed in malleable iron housing riveted
to ventilator & pivoting point shall be located outside of window to provide efficient leverage. Ventilator in
each window shall be equipped w/ extension arms attached to connecting steel frame & shall be concealed
w/n frame when ventilators are in closed position. All ventilators shall open or close simultaneously. The
Page 66 of 120
bottom ventilator shall be the means of control & shall be fitted w/ a solid bronze, polished, cam locking
handle & strike. Base of handle to dowel w/ strike to prevent side motion of ventilator. Where windows are
screened, provide a bronze under screen push bar working thru the frame member.
All steel windows shall be set plumb & true in openings. The joints between the window frame & masonry
shall be carefully caulked. Contacts between windows or doors & adjacent steel including mullions shall be
sealed w/ mastic furnished & applied by the contractor Windows shall be designed for glazing from the
outside w/ spring wire glazing clips & glazing putty. Mullions & anchors shall be manufacture’s standard,
vertical mullions, anchors & bolts for attaching shall be furnished where required adequate anchorage shall
be provided to ensure firm installation.
1005.3.4 Shop Painting

All windows shall be given a coating of gray metallic paint applied to all surfaces as paint base for prevention
of corrosion. Prior to application of paint primer the steel sections shall be cleaned of rust, oil, grease & other
foreign matter.

Steel windows shall be measured by actual in place installed w/ respective design / style & type of operation
in square meters.

The actual area in square meters of steel windows satisfactorily installed & ready for service shall be the
basis for payment based the unit bid or contract unit price.
1005 ( a ) Residential Casement square meters

1005 ( b ) Heavy Duty Side – hinged ventilator square meters
1005 ( c ) Projected Ventilator square meters
1005 ( d ) Awing Ventilator square meters
Item 1017 – Roof Drains w/ strainers
1017.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all items, articles, plant, equipment, labor & materials & performing all
methods necessary or required for the complete installation of all roof drains w/ strainers in accordance w/ all
applicable drawings as shown on the approved Plans.
The roof drains w/ strainers specified herein shall be from the “JOSAM” catalog of the JOSAM Manufacturing
Company, Michigan City. Indiana, notwithstanding what are shown on the Plans. The series & type number
herein designate the quality & style, design & operation material & finish of drains desired. Any drain w/
strainer of approved equivalent locally made may be substituted subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Equivalent materials, if locally available will be acceptable. Should the series & type numbers specified
herein be not suitable to a particular location due to concrete space limitation, an ad equation of the series
specified of the same size, body materials & finish may be substituted subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide, fit & install all necessary drains w/ strainers where so shown or indicated on
plans, & / or where the Engineer directs. Each drain w/ strainer shall fit well w/o leaks into the corresponding
downspout or conductor over w/c it ix to be installed & in accordance w/ the following schedule
Roof Eaves & Gutter

Where so indicated on the Plan “JOSAM” series 4820- BF, type 4843 – BP, cast iron lacquer finish, roof
drain w/round flange, cast iron rough brass high dome secured to clamping ring by screws, 4 – inch deep
body ( for locally made, 6 – inch deep body ) w/ bottom outlet; for “side outlet “ “ JOSAM “ series 4870-bp,
type 4873 – BP, series 4863 – BP. Any other roof drain shown on the Plans not specified
herein or neither shown on the Plans, but necessary to leave the work complete, shall be provided & fitted to
the concrete limitations @ the point of installation based on or similar to those specified herein.
Page 67 of 120
All roof drains w/ strainers actually installed shall be measured & determined by the number of pieces or units
ready for services as provided in the bill of quantities accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The items measured & determined as provided in subsection 1017.4 shall be paid for @ the unit bid price w/c
payment constitute full compensation of materials, labor & incidentals necessary to complete this item.
Payment Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
1017 Roof drains w/ strainers pcs. / set
Item 1600 – Excavation
1600.1 Description
This item shall consist of the necessary excavation for removal of all foundation of materials of whatever
nature encountered, including all obstructions of any nature that would interfere w/ the proper execution &
completion of work.
1600.2 Construction Requirement
1600.2.1 General
The removal of said materials shall conform to the lines & grades shown on the approved Plans &
Specifications. Unless otherwise provided, the entire construction site shall be striped of all vegetation &
debris & such materials shall be removed from the site prior to performing any excavation. The contractor
shall furnish place & maintain all supports & shoring that may be required for the sides of the excavation, & all
pumping, Ditching or other approved measures for the removal or exclusion of water, including taking care of
storm water & waste water reaching the site of work from any source so as to prevent damage to the work &
adjoining property. The walls & faces of all excavation in w/c workers are exposed to danger from unstable
ground shall be guarded by means of shoring system, sloping of the excavation, or some other acceptable
methods. The contractor shall furnish, install & maintain such seething, bracing, etc., as may be necessary to
protect the workers may be required to enter, excavated or other materials shall be effectively stored &
retained @ least 600 mm or more from the edge of the excavation & trenching operations shall conform to
any & all national, provincial & local safety requirements.
1600.2.2 Excavation beneath Proposed Structures
Unless otherwise specified for a particular structure or ordered by the Engineer excavation shall be carried to
the grade of the bottom of the footing or slab. Where shown or ordered, areas beneath proposed structures
shall be over – excavated. After the required excavation or over excavation has been completed, the exposed
surface shall be scarified to the depth of 150 mm brought to optimum moisture content & rolled w/ heavy
compaction equipment to one hundred percent ( 100% ) of maximum density.
1600.2.3 Excavation Beneath Areas to be Paved
Excavation under areas to be paved shall extend to the bottom of the aggregate base, if such base is called
for: otherwise it shall extend to the bottom of paving. After the required excavation has been completed, the
exposed surface shall be scarified. Brought to optimum moisture content, & rolled w/ heavy compaction
equipment to one hundred percent ( 100 % ) of maximum density.
1600.2.4 Pipeline Trench Excavation
Unless otherwise shown on the approved Plans & Specifications or ordered by the Engineer, excavation for
pipeline shall be open – cut trenches. The bottom of the trench, including any shoring shall have a minimum
width equal to the outside diameter of the pipe plus 300 mm & a maximum width equal to the outside
diameter of the pipe plus 600 mm. except when otherwise shown or ordered by the designated / assigned
Engineer, the bottom of the trench shall be excavated uniformly to the grade of the bottom of the pipe. The
trench bottom shall be given a final trim using a string line for establishing grade, such that each pipe section
when first laid will be wholly in contact w/ the ground or bedding along the extreme bottom of the pipe.
Rounding out the trench to form a cradle shall not be required. The maximum amount of open trench
permitted @ any one time & in one location shall be 300 meters or the length necessary to accommodate the
number of pipes installed in one day, w/c ever is greater. Barricades & warning lights satisfactory to the
designated / assigned Engineer shall be provided & maintain for all trenches left open overnight except @
intersections & driven ways in w/c case heavy steel plates, adequately braced bridges or other type of
crossing capable of supporting vehicular traffic shall be furnished as directed by the Engineer.
1600.2.5 Excavation in Lawn Areas
Where pipeline excavation occurs in lawn areas, the sod shall be carefully removed & stockpiled to preserve it
for replacement. Excavated material shall be placed on the lawn provided a drop cloth or other suitable
method is employed to protect the lawn from damage. The lawn shall not remain covered for more than72
Page 68 of 120
hrs. Immediately after completion of backfilling & testing of the pipeline, the sod shall be replaced in a manner
so as to restore the lawn as near as possible to its original condition.
1600.2.6 Rock Excavation
Rock excavation shall include removal & disposal of the following :
1. All boulders measuring .25 cubic meter or more in volume

2. All rock material in ledges, bedding deposits & un stratified masses w/c can not be removed w/o
Systematic drilling & blasting.
1600.2.7 Excavation beneath Proposed Concrete Reservoir
After the reservoir area has been stripped of all vegetation & debris, as specified in subsection ( 1700.2.1 ).
Lawn & top soil from the top 600 mm of excavated soil shall be removed & stockpiled for possible later use as
fill on or around the reservoir & for miscellaneous top soil. Excavation under the reservoir shall extend to the
bottom of the drain dock layer. After such excavation had been completed, the exposed surface shall be
rolled w/ heavy equipment to provide a reasonably smooth surface for placement of drain dock.
The quantity to be paid for shall be the volume of materials excavated in cubic meter calculated by multiplying
the horizontal area of the bottom of the structure or open – cut trench by the average depth. The average
depth shall be calculated from the finished surface of the grade shown on the drawing or the original ground
level, w/c ever is the lowest.

Payment for all work under this item shall be made @ the contract unit price per cubic meter for earthwork w/c
price & payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools & incidentals
necessary to complete all work.
1600 ( 1 ) Excavation Beneath Proposed Structures Cubic Meter

1600 ( 2 ) Pipeline Trench Excavation Cubic Meter
Item 1602 – Installation of Pipeline
1602.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing & installation of all pipes, fittings, closure pieces, bolts nuts, gaskets,
jointing materials & appurtenances as shown & specified on the drawings, & as required by the designated /
assigned Engineer for a complete & workable piping system.
1602.2.1 Mortar Lined & Enamel or Mortar Coated Steel Pipe
1. General – Mortar lined & enamel or mortar coated steel pipe materials & method of manufacture of
Straight pipe & pipe specials shall conform to Federal Specification SS – P385a dated January 31,
1964 & Amendment -1 dated February 27, 1968 ( herein after referred to as “ FED SPEC” ), subject to
the exception & supple mental requirements contained in the following subsections. The pipe, of the
diameter & class shown, shall be furnished complete w/ rubber gaskets if required & all specials &
bends shall be provided as shown. For pipe 350 mm in diameter & larger, the nominal diameter
specified or shown shall be the inside diameter after lining. Pipe smaller than 350 mm in diameter
may be furnished in standard outside diameters. Plate thickness specified or shown are nominal
thickness. Shop drawings of all pipe & specials shall also be furnished.
2. Cement – cement shall conform to ASTM C 150 and shall be type 1 for pipe linings & coatings.
3. Aggregate – aggregates shall conform to ASTM C33 to fine aggregates.
4. Cylinder Material – cylinder material shall be fabricated from hot rolled carbon steel sheets or plates
conforming to ASTM A570 Grades C,D or E, ASTM A 283 Grade D; steel pipe conforming to ASTM A 139
Grade B; or if approved by the designated / assigned Engineer, high strength low –alloy steel conforming
to ASTM A572 Grade 42.
5. Rubber Gasket – Where rubber gaskets are provided, they shall be continuous ring type, made of special
composition rubber. The compound shall be of first grade natural crude, synthetic rubber or a suitable
combination thereof. The gasket shall be so formed & cured as to be densed, homogenous, & have a
smooth surface free of blisters, pit & other imperfections. The gasket shall be of sufficient volume to fill
substantially the recess provide when the joint is assembled & shall be the sole element depended upon to
make the joint water – tight. Gasket shall be furnished w/ the pipe. The compound shall conform to the
physical requirements listed below :
Page 69 of 120
PHYSICAL REQUIREMENT VALUE FED. TEST METHOD STD. No. 601
Tensile Strength, Min. 15.85 MPa 4111

Natural Rubber
Synthetic Rubber & combination 14.47 Mpa 4111

Ultimate Elongation, percent min.
Natural 500 % 4121
Synthetic & Combination 425 % 4121

Shore Durometer, Type A Compression 40 – 65 % 3021
Set, percent of Original Deflection Max. 20% 3111
Tensile strength after aging percent

of original tensile strength, min. 7111*
( oxygen pressure test or air heat test ) 80% 7221**
*Time 48 hours temperature 70 degrees Centigrade ( 158 degrees F ) 2.0 MPa
**96 hours @ 70 degrees Centigrade’s ( 156 degrees F )
6. Welded Joints – where welded joints are provided, weld bell type joints maybe used, or the bell may be
cut back, or filler rod added so as to permit field weld between the bell may be cut back, or filler rod added
so as to permit field weld between the bell & spigot joint rings.
7. Lining – Except where otherwise specified or shown, lining thickness shall be as follows, w/ a tolerance of
plus or minus twenty – five percent ( 25 % ).
Nominal Pipe Diameter ( mm ) Lining Thickness ( mm )
Under 300 6.0

300 to 400 13.0
Over 400 19.0
8. Coating – The coating of Steel Pipe shall be of coal tar enamel or cement mortar.
The pipe smaller than 450 mm diameter shall be factory coated w/ coal tar enamel & bonded
Steel Water Pipelines – Enamel & Tape – Hot Applied ( AWWA C – 203 )
Pipe 450 mm diameter & larger, shall be factory coated w/ coal – tar enamel, fibrous glass mat &
Bonded asbestos felt wrap as specified in said AWWA Standard. Coating materials & method of
Application shall conform to said AWWA Standard except where modified. Except where otherwise
Specified or shown, coating thickness shall be 25 mm minimum. Mortar for pipe coating shall consist
of one ( 1 ) part cement to not more than three ( 3 ) parts sand by weight.
9. Curing
The curing periods specified in the Federal Specification are minimum periods. Curing of the lining
shall continue until the exterior coating is applied. The ends of the pipe shall sealed w/ heavy plastic
sheet during & between placement of the coating & the time the pipe is lowered into the trench. If
pipe is steam – cured, recorder chats showing temperature & duration of curing period.
10. Compressive Strength of Mortar
Cylinder shall be molded & tested in accordance w/ ASTM C 39 OR C 109.
1602.2.2 Cast Iron Water Pipe
Bell & spigot cast iron pipe shall conform to the requirements of the following:
1. “Cast Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds for Water or other Liquids” ( AWWA C -106 ) or “
Cast Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in Sand Lined Molds for Water or other Liquids” (AWWA
C - 108 ), & as indicated in the Bid Schedule or
2. “ISO Recommendation R-13, Cast Iron Pipes, Special Castings & Cast Iron Parts for Pressure Main
Line.” The pipe shall be Class A however; the hydrostatic test pressure shall be 350 MPa for all sizes.
1602.2.3 Asbestos – Cement Water Pipe

Asbestos – cement water pipe shall conform to the latest edition of the following specifications:
1. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) Recommendation R-160 “ Asbestos – Cement

Pressure Pipe “. Subject to the following additional requirements :
a. Classification Series II, Class 2.45 MPa
b. Internal Hydraulic Pressure Test: A test pressure of 2.45 MPa shall be applied to each length
of pipe. The test shall be performed in accordance w/ ISO 160, clause 2.6.1 except that the
application & maintenance of the test pressure may be in accordance w/ AWWA C- 400.
Section 5.2.2.1, @ the manufacturer’s option.
c. Longitudinal Bending Test : A longitudinal bending test shall be performed on each length of
the pipe in sizes up to 200 mm diameter when the length exceed 3.0 m. The test shall be
performed in accordance w/ the requirements of AWWA C- 400 Section 5.2.3 Class 100.
d. Transverse Crushing Test : A transverse crushing test shall be performed as specified in ISO
R 160, Clause 2.6.3. The number of test shall as specified in ISO clause 4.2.3.
Page 70 of 120
e. Acceptance Test: The consignment shall be delivered w/ acceptance tests, as specified in
ISO R 160 Section 4, subject to the additional requirements included herein.
f. Manufacture’s Certificate : The manufacture shall supply the owner w/ a certificate showing
that the pipe has been tested in accordance w/ & satisfies the requirements of the
specification as modified herein.
g. Pipe Joints : The tolerance on dimensions of pipe & couplings, as well as the dimensions &
specifications of rubber jointing rings. Shall be such that an Internal Hydraulic pressure of
2.45 MPa can be maintained w/o leakage when the pipes are set @ the maximum angular
deviation indicated by the manufacturer of the pipe.
1602.2.4 PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Pipe
1. Pipe shall conform to the requirements of “AWWA Standard for polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure
Pipe” 100 mm through 300 mm diameter ( AWWA C-900) & shall be pressure class 100 or 150 where
Shown on the drawings & as indicated in the Bid Schedule. The pipe shall have steel pipe equivalent
or cast iron gasket joints. Alternate outside diameter & wall thickness shown in the tabulation will be
allowed for the specified pressure class.
1602.2.5 Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe
1. Polyethylene pipe shall be manufacture from Type IV, class C, Grade P34 extrusion compound as
defined by ASTM D 1248 w/ a hydrostatic design stress of 4.3 MPa. Alternate polyethylene pipe extrusion
compound PE 3408 according to the Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) W/ A HYDROSTATIC DESIGN STRESS OF
5.50 MPa may be used. All compound used shall be virgin plastic. Clean rework material from the
manufacture’s own pipe production may be used so long as the original was virgin material & of the same
type, class & grade as required above. The pipe shall meet the requirements of the National Sanitation
Foundation for portable water use as tested by the National Institute of Science & Technology (NIST) or
other testing laboratories & shall be made from non toxic, non – lead based plasticizer approved by the
Project Engineer.
2. Pipe dimension when measured to the methods as described in ASTM D2122, polyethylene pipe shall
conform to either of the following dimension depending on the type of extrusion compound used as
stipulated above :
Extrusion Compound, Type IV, Class C, Grade P34 ( according to ASTM D 1248 )
Nominal size (mm) Outside Diameter (mm) Wall Thickness (min.) Thickness mm (max.)
75 90 8.18 9.30
100 110 10.00 11.36
150 160 14.55 16.53
200 225 20.45 23.34
3. All polyethylene Pipes shall be rated for use w/ water @ 23 degrees C & @ a minimum working
Pressure of 1.10 MPa.
4. All PE pipes shall be clearly marked @ interval of not more than 1.0 lineal meter w/ nominal size,
type of material, manufacturer’s trade name & production code.
1602.3. Construction Requirements
1602.3.1 Mortar Lines & Enamel or Mortar Coated Steel Pipe
1. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall furnish & install all pipes, specials, fittings, closures,
pieces, values, supports, bolts, nuts, gasket, joining materials & all other appurtenances as shown & as
required to provide a complete & workable installation. Where pipe support details are shown, the support
shall conform thereto & shall be placed as indicated, provided, that the support for all exposed piping shall be
complete & adequate regardless of whether or not supporting devices are specially shown. Concrete thrust
blocks, anchor blocks or welded joints shall be provided @ all junctions, changes in direction exceeding 11-
1/2 degree or where otherwise shown. @ all times when the work of installing pipe is not in progress, all
openings into the pipe & @ the ends of the pipe in trenches or structures shall be kept tightly closed to
prevent entrance of animals & foreign materials. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to
prevent the pipe from floating due to water entering the trench from any source, shall assume full
responsibility for any damages due to this cause & shall @ his own expense restore & replace the pipe to its
specified condition & grade if it is displaced due to floating. The Contractor shall maintain the inside of the
pipe free from foreign materials & in a clean & sanitary condition until its acceptance by the owner.
2. Trenches shall be in a reasonably dry condition when the pipe is laid. Necessary facilities including
slings shall be provided for lowering & properly placing the pipe section in the trench w/o damage. The pipe
sections shall be laid to the line & grade when shown & they shall be closely jointed to form a smooth flow
line. Immediately before placing each section of pipe in final position for joining, the bedding for the pipe shall
be checked for firmness & uniformity of surface.
1602.3.2 Cast Iron Water Pipe

Cast iron & fitting shall be lined w/ cement mortar in accordance w/ the requirement of the “Standard for
installation of Cast Iron Water Mains” ( AWWA C-600 ).
Page 71 of 120
1602.3.3 Asbestos – Cement Water Pipe
Asbestos – cement pipe shall be installed in accordance w/ the “Standard for installation of Asbestos –
Cement Water pipe “ (AWWA C-603), Except that the pipe shall not be laid using earth mounds. Prior
to installation, The asbestos – cement pipe & couplings & all rubber rings shall be inspected for damages &
defects in materials & workmanship. All damaged or defective materials shall be rejected & removed from the
jobsite. Joints between asbestos – cement pipe to cast – iron valves & fittings shall be sealed w/
rubber ring gaskets. After assembling the joint, the position of the rubber ring gaskets shall be located @ even
distance from the face of the valve or fitting, for the full circumference of the pipe.
1602.3.4 PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride ) Pipe
After a section of a pipe has been lowered into the prepared trench & immediately before joining the pipe, the
ends of the pipe to be joined shall be cleaned, & the rubber gasket lubricated, w/ a vegetable
Compound soap all in accordance w/ the pipe manufacture’s instructions. Assembly of the pipe length shall
be in accordance w/ the recommendation of the manufacturer of the type of the joint use. All special tools &
appliances required for joining the pipe shall be provided by the Contractor. When cutting or machining of the
pipe is necessary, only tools & methods recommended by the pipe manufacturer & approved by he Engineer
shall be employed.
1602.3.5 PE (Polyethylene ) Plastic Pipe

All PE pipes when supplied under the specification shall be joined employing either of the following methods:
Butt – Fusion
When pipe supplied under this specification are installed & joined by this method, the work shall be carried
only by well qualified personnel who adhere strictly to prescribed working conditions using tools & procedures
recommended by the manufacturer & approved by the Engineer.
a. Equipment – the equipment needed shall be as described in ASTM D-2657.

b. General Procedure – the following procedures shall be followed when making butt-fusion joint
1. Wipe each pipe – end – clean, inside & outside to remove dirt, water, grease
& other
foreign material.
2. Square the end of each pipe section to be fused using a fusing tool. Remove cuttings &
burns from pipe ends.
3. Check line – up of pipe – ends in fusion machine to see that pipe ends meet
squarely &
completely over the entire surface to be fused. Two clamps should be used on each end
of pipe to be fused for sizes 100 mm above.
4. Insert the heater plate between the aligned pipe ends. Bring & hold the pipes ends in
contact & allow pipe to heat & soften until a bead of molten plastic roll back from the
ends. This bead will be about 1.5 mm to 5.0 mm back from the end of the pipe depending
on size. Soften approximately 1.50 mm on all sizes p to 75 mm. On 75 mm to 150 mm
heat 5 mm softening can be judge by the appearance of the pipe end as the material
softens. Both surfaces of the heater plate shall be cleaned & temperature maintained
@ 246 degrees C to 260 degrees C (475 degrees F to 500 degree F. )
5. Carefully remove the pipe ends from the heater plate & remove the plate. If the
softened
material sticks to the heater plate, discontinue the joint. Clean heater plate, re square
pipe end & start over.
6. Bring the heated pipe ends together w/ the specified pressure to form a uniform
double
head about 3.0 mm to 5.0 mm wide around the entire circumference of the pipe.
7. Allow the joint to cool & solidify while maintaining the pressure for the specified time.
Inspect the joint for a uniform non – porous appearance. If the joint appears faulty, cut
the joint out & repeat the procedure.

The quantity to be paid under this item shall be the length in meters of pipes in place completed
& accepted, measured from end to end of the pipeline.

The quantity determined as provide above, shall be paid for or the contract price per meter for
pipe actually installed & payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing & installation of
all pipes, fittings, closure pieces, bolts, nuts, gaskets, joining materials & for all labor, equipment,
tools & incidentals necessary to complete the work.
Pay Item No, & Name Unit of Measurement
1602-1 Mortar lined & enamel Mortar

coated steel pipe meter
1602-2 Cast Iron Water pipe meter
1602-3 Asbestos – water pipe meter
1602-4 PVC Polyvinyl Chloride pipe meter
1602-5 Polyethylene (PE) Plastic pipe meter
Page 72 of 120
Item 1603 – Installation of Valves
1603.1 Description
This item shall consist of the installation of valves in accordance w/ the plans / drawings as
directed by the Engineer.

All materials shall conform to AWWA & ISO specification for valve installation.

Valves shall be installed as specified herein & as shown on the drawings. All valve shall be new &
of current manufacture. Flanged valves may be raised or plain faced w/ serrated gasket surface.
Flanges of valves for water working pressure of 1.20 MPa or less shall be faced & drilled to 560
N American Standard Dimension : Flanges of valves for water working pressure greater than 1.20
MPa shall be faced & drilled to 1120 N American Standard Dimension. Each valve body shall be
tested under a test pressure equal to twice its design working pressure, except that gate valve
shall be tested in accordance w/ “Standard Gate Valves for Ordinary Waterworks Services”
(AWWA-C 500), All buried valves shall be provided w/ an exterior protective coating . When
operating out of a buried valve is located more than 1.50 meters below ground surface, as
extension shall be installed in the valve box.
The bottom of the extension shall be securely fastened to the operating nut of the valve & top of
the extension shall be centered in the valve box. To permit operation of all buried valves
regardless of depth. Six (6) tee-handle valve keys of sufficient length shall be furnished.
Valves shall be inspected in opened & closed position to ensure that all parts are in good working
condition; otherwise it will be replaced prior to installation. It shall also have the interior cleaned of
all foreign materials before installation.

The work to be paid item shall be the installation & the number of pieces installed.
Item & Description Unit of Measurement
Valve per piece
Item 1701 – Channel Excavation

1701.1 Description
This item shall consist of excavation, removal & trimming of all classes of materials in channel
prism including placing or stockpiling of excavated suitable materials & disposal of unsuitable or
surplus materials to designated disposal areas all in accordance w/ these Specifications & Plans
or as established by the designated / assigned Engineer.
a) Where applicable, the Contractor shall excavate only after the area of operation has been
cleared & grubbed. The contractor must exercise care not to extend his excavation beyond
the right – of – way limits called for in the Plans. Excavation operations shall be such that all
materials suitable for embankment or backfilling & filling shall be separated from
objectionable materials w/c shall be disposed. All surface from excavation shall be trimmed to
the required slopes & grades w/n the specified tolerances provided hereto.
b) Tolerance
Excavation sections, profiles & slopes shall be cut true & straight in conformity w/ the lines &
grades shown on the Plans w/n the following tolerances, as measured normal to the
excavated surfaces.
Item Tolerances
1. Profile of invert channel + 30 mm

2. Side slopes inside channel prism + 15 mm
3. Side slopes outside channel prism + 15 mm
c) Channel shall be excavated w/ the use of appropriate mechanized excavating equipment

approved by the designated / assigned Engineer.
Page 73 of 120
Channel excavation will be measured by volume in cubic meter of material excavated from
The channel prism to the neat lines & grades as shown on the Plans & as established by the
Engineer. Hauling of excavated materials either for stockpiling or disposal to disposal areas
including trimming of side slopes in channel prism & channel bed shall be considered subsidiary
works under this item.
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in section 1601.3 shall be paid for @ the
contract unit price for each of the Pay Items listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities.
The price & payment shall be full compensation for the removal & disposal of the excavated
materials including all labor, equipment, tools & incidentals necessary to complete the work
prescribed in this item.
1601 (1) Unsuitable Excavation Cubic meter

1601 (2) Surplus Common Excavation Cubic meter
1601 (3) Surplus Rock Cubic meter
1601 (4) Surplus Unclassified Excavation Cubic meter
Item 1406 – Deflector wall, Bulkhead curbs, & Stair Landing
1406.1 Description
This item consists of concrete Deflector Walls, Concrete Bulkhead Curbs, & Concrete Stair
Landings in accordance w/ the approved Plans & Specifications.
Concrete used in his item shall conform w/ the specifications for Class A concrete.
Reinforcing steel shall conform w/ the requirements of item 404, of Volume II. “ Reinforcing Steel”
Deflector Wall, Bulkhead Curbs, & Stair Landing shall include all works constructed on top of the
rock bulkheads. In no case shall these structures be placed on top of the bulkheads unless a
minimum period of one year had elapsed from the completion of the bulkheads or the bulkheads
have sufficiently settled. The line, elevation & form of the deflector Wall ,Bulkhead Curbs, & Stair
Landings shall be true to line or as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise specified on the plans,
the top shall be level & faces shall be vertical except the curve portion, if any. Special care shall
be exercised to smooth & tight fitting forms w/c can be held rigidly to line & grade & removed w/o
injury to concrete. Forms shall be of board combination of G.I. sheets & board or boards lined w/
suitable materials w/c will meet w/ the approval of the Engineer. All corners of the finished work
shall be true, sharp & clean – cut & shall be free from cracks, spalls or other defects. Concrete
shall be mixed placed & finished in accordance w/ the specifications for item 405 “Structural
Concrete”.

The quantity of Deflector Wall & Bulkhead curbs shall be measured in lineal meters in its final
position of the specified cross section & reinforcement as shown on the plans. The quantity of
stair landing shall be measured in linear meters of complete structures including reinforcing bars
constructed in its final location as per plans.

Deflector Wall, Bulkhead Curbs & Stair Landing measured as provided above shall be paid @ the
contract unit price per lineal meter of structure placed or @ the contract cost per unit, w/c price &
payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing labor, equipment. Tools & materials &
constructing complete as per plan & specification & accepted.
1406 (1) Deflector Lineal meter

1406 (2) Bulkhead Curbs Lineal meter
1406 (3) Stair Landing Lineal meter
Item 1500 – Sand Mattress
1500.1 Description
Page 74 of 120
This item shall consist of sand or gravel fill or backfill material furnished & placed as required
on top of existing soft seabed material or to replace material encountered & found unsuitable for
foundation of bulkheads or breakwater & shall be constructed in accordance w/ these
Specifications & where shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer in writing.

Sand mattress shall be dredge non – cohesive material of such quantity that the angle of internal
fiction will be @ least 22° in place.
1500.3 Construction Methods

After the unsuitable material has been excavated & removed as required by the Engineer or if
no excavation is require, the sand mattress shall be placed & build – up to require elevation.
Excavated surfaces for sand mattress should be backfilled @ once to prevent sliding of soft
Materials of the seabed & filling up the area. These materials shall be developed @ the site
of the proposed mattress, the first dumping shall be right on the existing excavation if any or
on the materials previously dumped or placed. The process to continue until the mattress has
Attained the required elevation & shape shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
An allowance of about .60 meters for possible settlement of the mattress has been assumed
in the Plans. The side slope as shown on the Plans shall be maintained as close as possible.
The contractor shall take all necessary care in dumping the materials for the mattress to
avoid losses thereof by wave action & current. Any sand mattress material that is deposited
@ places other than those designated or approved by the Engineer will not be paid for.

The volume to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meters, measured in final position, of
the special material actually furnished & placed as specified & directed completed in the
place & accepted & as determined by computing the volume of material by the cross section
average end area method based on the survey taken prior to filling after dredging. If any &
the survey as soon as practicable after the filling.

The volume measured as provided above shall be paid for the contract unit price per cubic
meter for “ Sand Mattress “ w/c price & payment shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing, hauling, & depositing the material, & for all labor, equipment, tools & incidentals
necessary to complete this item.
Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement
1500 Sand Mattress cubic meter
Item 1501 – Rockworks
1501.1 Description
This item shall consist of quarried rocks, bulkheads or breakwaters constructed @ the
locations indicated, in accordance w/ these specifications & in conformity w/lines, elevations,
slopes, cross section & dimensions shown on the plan or as required by the Engineer.
1501.2 Materials
1501.2.1 Rocks
a. Quality & shapes of Rocks. Unless otherwise specially stated, all rocks to be used shall be
hard, durable, & not likely to disintegrate in sea water. Class I & II rocks must weigh not less
than 1,900 kilogram per cubic meter solid (specific gravity – 1.9 )or approximately19.05 kilo
Newton (kN) per cubic meter of solid materials, while class III rocks shall weigh not less than
1,500 kilogram per cubic meter ( specific gravity – 1.5 ) or approximately 15.09 kilo Newton
(kN) per cubic meter of solid materials when reasonably Dig. Rocks w/ specific gravity higher
than those specified above will be accepted but no increase in the contract price will be made
on this account. Class I & II rocks shall be angular. Sub-angular rocks may be used subject to
the approval of the Engineer. Rounded or well rounded rocks will not be accepted.
b. Sizes of Rock
Pieces of Class I rocks shall weigh not less than 1 tonne ( 1000 kilograms ) and above.
Class II rocks shall weigh not less than 50 kilograms ( man size boulders ) less than 1 tonne (
1000 kilograms)
Class III rock shall be of any size & shapes provided that the larger piece shall weigh less
than 50 kilograms & that not more than five percent (5%) of the entire quantity thereof shall
consist of piece the least dimension of w/c is not less than the size of pea gravel. Quarry run
may be considered Class III rocks.
Page 75 of 120
1501.2.2 Concrete Filler

The concrete filler for rocks bulkheads when required for the purpose of preventing escape of fill
material shall be class “B” concrete plus 10% additional cement conforming to the requirements
given under Item 405, “ Structure Concrete”, Volume II, of Standard Specifications for the
particular class given.
1501.3 Construction methods
1501.3.1 Methods of Placing Class I & II Rocks

The larger pieces of facing rock ( Class I or II ) shall first be laid carefully along the toe of the
bulkhead w/ allowance being made for possible settlement. These rows of large rocks shall be
extended to maintain slightly in advance of the completed portion of the work. The larger pieces
of rock shall be placed on the outer slope of the bulkhead & they shall be laid so that their longest
dimension will be approximately normal to the plane of the face of the slope as indicated on the
plans. The plane of the exposed faces of the rocks shall conform approximately to the prescribed
line & grades indicated on the plans, & as stated out on the site by the Engineer. No cutting,
spoiling or coursing of the rocks will be required. The rocks shall be firmly bedded into the slopes
& against the adjoining rocks. The works shall be done in a skillful manner. w/c implies careful
section of the rock to fit properly together so that the finished surface shall be even & tight. When
ever necessary, small pieces of filler rocks shall be wedged firmly in between the facing rocks so
that the latter shall be in the stable position. Filler rocks shall be of the king & type of the facing
rock. Rock shall not be out on the faces of the bulkhead by more than 0.15 meters inward or
outward.
1501.3.2 Method of Placing Class III Rock or heating Rock.

Class III rocks may be placed simultaneously or before placing Class I & II rocks. The larger
pieces of Class III shall be placed @ the bottom & against the inner slopes of Class I or II rocks.
Smaller size rock should be used to fill the voids between the larger pieces. Rocks shall not be
out of line on the faces of the bulkheads by more than .15 meter inward or outward.
1501.3.3 Concrete Filler shall be used to fill crevices on the inside slope of the rocks to thickness
of .15 m , as shown on the plans or as directed by Engineer. The surface shall conform to the
slope. After grouting, the surface shall be cured as specified for “ Structure Concrete” , Item 405
of Standard Specifications for a period of @ least 3 days.
1501.3.4 Method of Measurement

The quantity to be paid for shall be the actual weight in tone ( Metric tons ) of rock completed in
place & accepted. Before setting in place, the quantities of rocks shall be measured in tone by the
displacement method if the method of hauling is by water craft. The dimension in the metric
system of the scows or barges used shall be taken before & after the rocks are unloaded w/ the
aid of approved gauges or graduated scales placed @ the corners of the scows or barges. The
weight of rocks shall be computed from the differences of the observed displacement of the
barges when loaded & empty, & on assumed weight of the sea water 1.025 tonne per cubic
meter. Quantities of rocks measured @ the job site ( and not elsewhere) shall be the basis of
measurement for the purpose of payment to contractor. The weight of the rock @ loading & job
sites shall be determined as follows:
weight ( tone ) – 1.025 x volume in cu.m of displaced sea water
If the method of hauling is by dump trucks, then the actual weight can be recorded by truck
scales. It is understood & agreed that the contractor from the time his scows or barges or trucks
are measured, shall assume full responsibility for the placing of the rocks into the bulkhead. Any
rocks misplaced or dumped out of the bulkhead alignment shall be retrieved & placed in the
bulkhead or deducted from the total weight of the rocks measured for payment, if same can be
declared as not hazardous to navigation. Projections extending beyond the faces of the
bulkheads in excess oft hat allowed above shall not be included. Concrete shall no longer be
measured but its volume can be fairly estimate depending on the sizes of the rocks & shall be
considered in the basis of payment only. Tell tales for the purpose of determining settlement may
be required by the engineer but no allowance is included.
1501.4 Basis Payment

Rocks shall be paid for @ the contract unit price per tone ( metric ton ), w/c price & payment shall
constitute full compensation for furnishing, hauling & placing all materials including concrete filler
& for all labor equipment tools & incidentals necessary to complete the item.
Pay Item & Description Unit of Measurement
1501 (1) Rock works. Class I rock tone

(2) Rock works. Class II rock tone
(3) Rock works. Class III rock tone
Item 1502 – Filter Materials
1502.1 Description
Page 76 of 120
This item shall consist of furnishing & placing of one or more layers of materials, each so graded
so as to function as an effective filter against the adjoining layers all in accordance w/ this
specifications & conforming to the thickness, elevations & extent shown on the plans for the
purpose of preventing the erosion of fine materials through adjoining coarser materials.
The materials shall conform to the specification stated below, otherwise the Engineer shall
require the contractor to produce a more suitable material or add material of such a grain size to
produce the required mixture before the work in commenced. In this case the contractor shall
provide the Engineer w/ all necessary information as to the composition & quality of the materials
he intends to use in the filters, as well as of the materials w/c will be used adjacent to the filters.
The design of a filter shall be in general be based on the following grading requirements:
d¹15 : d°15 Shall be 12 – 40 for OR

6 – 18 for OK
d¹50 : d°50 Shall be 5 – 10 for SR

12 - 58 for OR
9 - 30 for OK
Where d15 and d50 means the grain size in grading curve corresponding to 15% & 50%,
respectively.
Index° indicate the material w/c shall be protected.

Index¹ indicate the filter material
OR means evenly graded material of round grains.
OK means evenly graded material of rough grains.
SR means unevenly graded material of rough grains.

The filter shall be laid in such a way that the rules governing the design can be applied to any
position of the filter layer in situ.
Filter placed on the exposed slopes of areas reclaimed w/ dredged material shall consist of two
layers, an inner layer 80 cm. in thickness consisting of material graded according to the
attached diagram & an outer evenly graded layer of coarser material, 6-20 cm. in grain size,
making up the total filter thickness specified on the plans.

Filter material shall be measured by the square meters of the thickness specified on the plan
either in vertical or sloping position perpendicular to the faces. Location & boundaries of the
filter shall be so designated on the plan except work on additional areas in the original plan
w/c are found necessary during construction shall be measured accordingly.

All work performed & measured as provided in the preceding section shall be paid for @ the
contract unit price per square meter for filter of the specified thickness, w/c price shall include
furnishing of labor, equipment, tools materials, supplies & incidentals necessary to complete
the work.
1402 Filter Material Sq. meter
Item 1503 – Excavation for bulkheads & reclamation
1503.1 Description
This item shall consist of the removal & disposal of unsuitable material that may be required
for the construction of the bulkheads and reclamation works. It shall include all necessary
clearing & maintenance of the excavation prior to backfilling. It shall also include removal of
obstruction or parts thereof, as required. Materials such as weed, fine silt, much & other
superfluous materials are considered unsuitable material.
The seabed shall be excavated according to the cross sections shown on the plans or as
establish by the Engineer w/ the appropriate dredges & attendant plants w/ w/c the dredge &
dispose the unsuitable material @ a place shown on the plan or as directed by the Engineer
an over dredging of as much as .30 m beyond the limit required shall be paid for. In case of
over dredging wherein the limits required shall be paid for. In case of over dredging where in
the limits slope shown on the plan or as established by the Engineer are exceeded by more
than .30 m, the area shall not be backfilled w/ the type of material excavated but in the
payment. The contractor shall submit before proceeding w/ the work under this item his
proposed method of excavation including drawings, & other details left open to his choice
when not fully shown on the Engineer’s plans. Such method, drawings & details shall be
Page 77 of 120
approved by the Engineer before actual work is started under this item
The volume of excavation will be measured by the cubic meter in its original position for
materials actually excavated as herein provided & shall be determined by computing the
volume by the cross section average & area method. The measurement shall not include the
volume of any suitable material that maybe excavated & later used for other purposes.
The volume measured as provided above shall be paid for @ the contract unit price per
cubic meter for Excavation for Bulkness & Reclamation, w/c price & payment shall constitute
full compensation for all excavation, for backfilling in case of over dredging in excess of the
.30 m limit for surveys, for disposing of materials & materials & for furnishing all materials,
labor , equipment, tools & incidentals necessary to complete the item.
Pay Item No. & Description Unit of measurement
1503 (1) Excavation for Bulkheads & Reclamation Cubic Meter
Granules shall be domestic marble chips, hard & well graded. Size 1 granules shall pass 6 mm mesh sieve &
retained on a 3 mm mesh sieve. Size 2 granules shall pass 9 mm mesh sieve & retained on a 6 mm mesh
sieve.
1029.2.2 Pea Gravel
Pea gravel shall be clean, hard, uniformly rounded & graded to approximate size of 6 mm minimum diameter
& used for blending to acquire the approve color harmony ( Pre mixed w/ marble granules ).
1029.2.3 Cement
Portland cement ( white or ordinary gray ) shall conform e/ the Specification requirement defined in Item 700,
Hydraulic Cement.
Surface to receive granitite washout finish shall be cleaned of all projection, dust, loose particles & foreign
matters. It shall be thoroughly wetted w/ portable water before application of scratch coat. Plastered surface
shall be scratched before final setting of mortar mixed.
1029.3.2 Mixture
Granatite washout mixed shall be a mixture of Portland cement marble granules blended w/ pea gravel &
Portland cement. It shall be uniformly mixed in the proportion by volume of one part white or gray Portland
cement & two parts marble granules & one half part pea gravel.
1029.3.3 Application
The Contractor shall establish all wood moulds for groove lines after the scratch coat has seasoned for seven
days. The scratch coat shall be evenly moistened w/ fog spray before granitite washout plaster shall b e
troweled & floated to a true to a true & even surface.
1029.3.4 Texture Finishing
Finishing shall be started as soon as the granitite washout plaster surface begins to set & is semidry, spraying
evenly by a spray apparatus to washout all cement paste on the outer surface so that the aggregates are
partly exposed or by means of a paint brush & water, or sponge & water washing down the remaining cement
paste leaving the granular in their natural texture appearance.
Granatite washout finish shall be leveled, plumbed, squared area true w/n a tolerance of 3 mm in 3m w/o
caves, cracks, blistard pits, crazings, discolorations, projections or other imperfections. Plaster work shall be
formed carefully around angles, contours, & cants. Special care shall be taken to prevent sagging &
consequent drooping of applications. There shall be no visible junction marks in the finish where one day’s
work adjoins another. Where required & as directed by the Engineer provide vertical & horizontal groove
joints.
1029.3.6 Curing & Protection
When the granitite washout finish has finally set, the surface shall be kept wet or moist for @ least six days.
After curing & all other trades as completed their works to granitite washout finished surface shall be
Page 78 of 120
saturated w/ portable water cleaning shall be done w/ steel brush. When surface dries, silicon water repellant
shall be applied to protect physical appearance of the granitite washout finish.
Granatite washout finish shall be measured in square meter, linear meter or part thereof for work actually
completed & accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The work done under Item 1027.4 as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for @ the Contract unit
price w/c price & payment constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools, & equipment &
incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
1029 (1) Granatite washout finish Sq m, , Linear meter
Item 1021 – Cement Floor Finish
1021.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, labor, tools & equipment in undertaking cement floor
finishing where shown on the Plans & in accordance w/ this Specification.
Manufactured materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer’s original unbroken packages or containers w/c
are labeled plainly w/ the manufacturer’s name & trademark.
1021.2.1 Cement
Portland cement shall conform w/ the requirement of item 700, Hydraulic Cement.
1021.2.2 Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregates shall be clean, washed, sharp river sand & free from dirt, clay, organic matter or other
deleterious substances. Sand derived from crushed gravel or stone may be used w/ the Engineer’s approval
but in no case shall such sand be derived from stone unsuitable for use as coarse aggregate.
1021.2.3 Coloring Material
The coloring material shall be red or green oxide powder of the quality capable of achieving the best staining
power & homogeneity.
1021.2.4 Metallic Floor Hardener ( Premix)
Metallic floor hardener shall be a mixture of oil – free specially graded clean iron particles, mineral oxide
pigment & Portland cement binder, premixed according to the manufacturer’s instruction manual.
1021.2.5 Non – Metallic Floor Hardener
a) Powder type hardener shall be a silica quartz aggregates, workability admixtures, mineral oxide
pigments & Portland cement mixed according to the manufacture’s instruction manual.
b) Epoxy type topping hardener shall be a combination of epoxy resins filled w/ hard & natural emery or
silica quartz aggregates, premixed according to the manufacture’s instruction manual.
1021.3.1 Mixture
Concrete topping materials shall be measured accurately in accordance w/ the following :
a. Mortar topping shall be one (1) part Portland cement & three (3) parts fine aggregate by loose volume.
b. Finish topping shall be pure Portland cement properly graded conforming to the requirements of item
700, Hydraulic Cement, mixed w/ water to approved consistency & plasticity. Where required to be
colored cement floor finish, red or green oxide powder shall be premixed w/ Portland cement
complying w/ finish topping requirements & the desired color intensity. Cement floor finish floor
hardener shall be premixed as require & applied in accordance w/ the manufacturer’s instruction
manual.
Page 79 of 120
1021.3.2 Preparation of Concrete Surface
Surface to receive mortar concrete topping shall be cleaned of all projections, dust, loose particles & other
Foreign matters. Finish elevation shall be established over the areas indicated on the Plans.
Before any mortar concrete topping is applied, the prepared concrete base surface shall first be wetted &
grouted w/ Portland cement.
a. Mortar topping of the thickness specified on the Plans, shall be spread over the prepared concrete
Base & shall be float finished using wood hand trowel. Batches of mortar topping shall be emplaced
w/n one hour of mixing thereof.
b. As soon as the water sheen has disappeared the surface shall be lightly scratched w/a stiff bristle
broom.
c. The finish topping mixture whether plain, colored, or w/ floor hardener shall be spread over the lightly
scratched surface before final set taken place & hand troweled to produce a smooth surface.
d. The finished surface shall be free of trowel marks, have uniform texture & true to a plane w/n an allowable
tolerance of 3 mm to 3 meters.
1021.3.4 Protection of Finished Surface
Cement floor finished surface shall be covered w/ burlap or appropriate covering to avoid injurious action by
sun, rain, flowing water & mechanical injury.
Cement floor shall be finished level & true to finish elevation as shown on the plans finish topping shall have
no visible junction marks where one (1) day’s work adjoins the other. V- cut groove lines shall be provided
where shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
All cement floor finish shall be measure in square meters or part thereof for work actually completed &
accepted.
The work actually completed & accepted as measured in square meters shall be paid for @ the Unit Price or
contract price w/c price constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools & incidentals necessary
1021 ( a ) Plain cement floor finish Sq. m
1021 ( b ) Colored cement floor finish Sq. m
1021 ( c ) Cement floor finish w/ floor hardener Sq. m
Item 1022 – Stucco Finish
1022.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, tools, equipment including labor required in undertaking the
proper application of stucco finish as shown on the plans & in accordance w/ this Specifications.
1022.2.1 Cement
Portland Cement ( white or ordinary gray ) shall conform w/ the specification requirements defined in item
700, Hydraulic Cement.
1022.2.2 Marble Dust
Marble dust shall be derived from domestic marble that are hard & well graded.
1022.2.3 Acoustical Fiber
Acoustical fiber materials shall be first grade quality & a product distributed by a reputable manufacturer
engaged in acoustical material.
Page 80 of 120
Well surface & other masonry areas indicated on the Plans to receive stucco shall be cleaned of all projection,
dust loose particles & foreign matters. It shall be thoroughly wetted w/ potable water before application of
scratch coat.
1022.3.2 Type of Mixture
a) For stucco used as acoustical treatment the proportion shall be part cement & three parts acoustical
fiber measured by the volume or as recommended by the acoustical manufacturer. For exterior &
interior walls w/o acoustical treatment the proportion shall be one ( 1 ) part cement blended w/ two
part marble dust in the case where white cement is used but for ordinary gray cement use one ( 1 )
part cement & two parts washed sand w/ ½ part lime measured by volume.
1022.3.3 Installation or Application Methods
a) Stucco mixture can be applied w/ the use of hard brooms from coconut material.
b) It can also be applied using sandblasting equipments operate manually or electrical driven machine
compressor.
c) For an impressive architectural ( appearance ) effect the applied surface is slightly troweled before
Stucco mix has began to set. This surface finish is also called anay finish.
Stucco finish shall be properly applied true to details, squared & plumbed.
All stucco finish shall be measured in square meters or part thereof for work actually completed in building.
The work quantified & determined in subsection 1033.4 as provided in the Bill of Quantified & determined in
subsection 1033.4 as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for @ the Contract Unit Price w/c price
constitutes full compensation for all stucco finish necessary to complete this item.
Payment will be made under:
1022 ( a ) Stucco Finish sq. m
Item 1023 – Granolithic Marble work
1023.1 Description
The contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment & incidentals necessary to install granolithic marble
flooring where shown on the Plans & specified herein.
The contractor shall submit 300 mm x 300 mm samples of granolithic marble flooring to the Engineer for
approval, showing the color texture, finish & materials including an outline of the proposed method of surface
preparation & the installation of the granolithic marble flooring. Included shall be the details of where & how
the divider strips shall be installed.
1023.2.1 Marble Chips ( Granules )
Marble chips shall be standard quarry products of the size & color necessary to match the approved
samples.
White & Ordinary Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C 150 Type 1: & relevant Philippine National
Standard.
1023.2.3 Divider Strips
Divider strips shall be the brass angle type of 3 mm thickness spaced @ 600 mm on centers.
Page 81 of 120
The extent of granolithic flooring areas shall be as indicated in the finish Schedule & as shown on the Plans.
The divider strips shall be installed @ least 24 hours, prior to application of the granolithic mix w/ the tops
protruding to a minimum of .08 mm above the projected finish floor elevation. Place the granolithic mix &
trowel to level surface. Trowelled surface shall be seeded w/ additional chips it required.
1023.3.2 Curing
The granolithic topping shall be cured @ least six (6) days before grinding or until such time when it has set
sufficiently hard to permit machine grinding or rubbing w/ coarse carborandum grit w/o closing any surface
aggregate.
1023.3.3 Surfacing
After curing all granolithic topping surface shall wet & ground w/ electric grinding machine to a smooth & even
surface, Where it is not possible to use electric grinding machine, surface shall be hard – rubbed. Use No.24
abraise grit stone for the initial rubbing, then followed by No. 40 abraise grit stone rubbing, after w/c a light
grouting of white Portland cement paste ( gout ) of creamy consistency as the matrix used in the topping.
1023.3.4 Finishing
Allow at least 72 hours after the granolithic surface have been grouted before removing the grout coat
( cleaning & fine stone grinding) by electric grinding machine using no coarser than No. 80 abrasive grit. Final
grinding or rubbing of granolithic marble surface shall remove scratches & produce a true surface of uniform
color & texture w/o objectionable irregularities of any description as that of the approved samples.
1023.3.5 Cleaning, Waxing & Polishing
Upon completion of final grinding or rubbing of granolithic marble the Contractor shall apply two coats of
natural wax penetrating type, Surface shall be allowed to dry & polished.
All granolithic marble finish indicated on the Plans & described herein shall be measured in square lineal
meters or part thereof for work completed & accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The quantified area determined in the preceding section & provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at
the Unit Bid of contract Unit Price.
1023 (a) Corridors sq.m.

1023 (b) Stairs Landing, risers, etc. sq. linear .
1023 (c) Rooms & others sq. m
Item 1026 – Pebble Washout Finish
1026.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing all materials, labor, tools & equipment required in undertaking the proper
application of pebble washout finish as shown on the Plans & in accordance w/ this Specification.
1026.2.1 Pebble
Pebble shall be well graded stones sized ranging from # 4 to # 10 rounded specie like Luna Stones, Boracay,
etc.
1026.2.2 Cement
Cement shall be Portland type conforming to item 700, Hydraulic Cement. It can be gray or white specie
depending on the tone or color scheme approved.
1026.2.3 Colored Cement
Page 82 of 120
Colored cement shall be powder type pigmented used to obtain the desired shade & color of finish.
All pebble washout finish shall be done by men experienced & qualified to do this particular type of trade. The
Contractor shall submit @ least two samples for each type of pebble washout finish to the Engineer / Architect
for approval showing its color, texture & design patterns.

Surface to receive pebble washout finish shall be clean of all projection, dust, loose particles & foreign
matters. It shall be thoroughly wetted w/ clean water before application of scratch coat mortar. When surface
has sufficiently set scratch w/ hard broom.
1026.3.2 Mixture
Pebble washout finish mix shall consist of one part Portland cement & two parts pebble measured by volume
or a proportion equivalent to 1:2. Mixtures shall be in approved containers to ensure that the specified
materials are controlled & accurately measured. Mixtures measured by shovel or shovel counts will not be
permitted. Unless specified otherwise pebble washout mix shall be in the proportion by volume in approved
mixing machines or mortar boxes. The aggregates introduced & mixed in such a manner that the materials
will be uniformly distributed throughout the mass. A sufficient amount of water shall be added gradually & the
mass further mixed until a mortar plasticity necessary for the purpose intended is obtained. Mortar boxes,
pans etc. where mixtures are mixed shall be keep clean & free from debris or dried mortar.
a) Before any application, work is started the Contractor shall establish all wood mould for vertical &
horizontal groove lines after the scratch coat has seasoned for seven days in the case of masonry wall or
concrete columns, beams, parapets, etc.
b) In case of finish flooring application & the like the slope of drainage should be properly provided & design
pattern properly placed. The proposed under bed shall be done to a level of 16 mm below the finish floor line
to accommodate the pebble washout mix.
c) The prepared surfaces to receive the pebble washout mix shall be kept damp for @ least four (4) hours
before the application work is commenced.
d) Pebble washout finish mix shall be applied w/ pressure to obtain solid adhesion to the prepared surface.
e) The applied surface shall be firm, even & monolithically applied, then allowed to set initially.
f) When the applied surface has initially set to withstand the removal & cement paste on the outer surface
so that the pebbles are partly exposed or by means of paint brush & water, or by means of spray washing
down the cement paste leaving the pebbles partially exposed in their natural texture appearance.
a) Pebble washout finish shall be leveled, plumbed, square true w/n a tolerance of 3 mm in 3 m w/o caves
cracks, blisters, pits crazing, discoloration, projections, or other imperfections.
b) Special care shall be taken to prevent sagging & consequent dropping of applications.
c) There shall be no invisible junction marks in the finish surface where one day work adjoins another.
d) Where required or directed by the Engineer / Architect provide vertical & horizontal groove joints.
a) When the pebble washout surface has finally set the surface shall be kept wet or moist for @ least six
days.
b) After all other trade have been completed the pebbles washout finish surfaces shall be saturated w/
diluted hydrochloric acid & cleaned w/ steel brush.
c) Allow the clean surface to dry then apply a coat of silicon water repellant to protect the natural physical
appearance of the pebble washout finish.
Pebble washout finish shall be measured in square meters, lineal meters or part thereof for work actually
completed & accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer / Architect.
The work done under this item as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for @ the contract unit bid w/c
price & payments constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools, equipment & incidentals
Page 83 of 120
1026 (a) Pebble washout ln/m²
Item 1027 – Cement Plaster Finish
1027.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all cement plaster materials, labor, tools & equipment required in
undertaking cement plaster finish as shown on the plans & in accordance w/ this Specification.
1027.2.1 Cement
Portland cement shall conform w/ the requirements as defined in Item 700, Hydraulic Cement.
1027.2.2 Hydrated Lime
Hydrated lime shall conform w/ the requirements as defined in Item 701, Hydrated Lime.
Fine Aggregates shall be clean, washed sharp river sand & free form dirt, clay, organic matter or other
but in no case shall such sand be derived from stone unsuitable for use as coarse aggregates.
1027.3.1 Mixture
a) Mortar mixture for brown coat shall be freshly prepared & uniformly mixed in the proportion by volume of
one part Portland Cement, three (3) parts sand & one fourth (1/4) part hydrated lime.
b) Finish coat shall be pure Portland cement properly graded conforming to the requirements of 700,
Hydraulic Cement & mixed w/ water to approved consistency & plasticity.
a) After removal of formworks reinforces concrete surfaces shall be roughened to improve adhesion of
cement plaster.
b) Surfaces to receive cement plaster shall be cleaned of all projections, dust, loose particles, grease &
bond breakers. Before any application of brown coat is commenced all surfaces that are to be plastered shall
be wetted thoroughly w/ clean water to produce a uniformly moist condition.
a) Brown coat mortar mix shall be applied w/ sufficient pressure starting from the lower portion of the
surface to fill the grooved & to prevent air pockets in the reinforce concrete / masonry work & avoid mortar
mix dropping. The brown coat shall be lightly broomed / or scratch before surface had properly set & allowed
to cure.
b) Finish oat shall not be applied until after the brown coat has seasoned for seven days & corrective
measures had been done by the Contractor on surfaces that are defective. Just before the application of the
finish coat, the brown coat surface shall be evenly moistened w/ portable water. Finish coat shall be floated
first to a true and even surface, then troweled in a manner that will force the mixture to penetrate into the
brown coat. Surfaces applied w/ finish coat shall then be smooth w/ paper in a circular motion to remove
trowel marks, checks & blemishes. All cement plaster finish shall be 10 mm thick minimum on vertical
concrete and / or masonry walls.
Whenever indicated on the Plans to be “ Simulated Red Brick Finish”, the contractor shall render brick design
on plaster surface before brown coat had properly set & then allowed to dry. Cement plaster shall not be
applied directly to:
a) Concrete or masonry surface that had been coated w/ bituminous compound and
b) Surfaces that had been painted or previously plastered.
Page 84 of 120
Cement plaster finish shall be true to details & plumbed. Finish surface shall have no visible junction marks
where one (1) Day’s work adjoins the other. Where directed b the Engineer or as shown on the Plans vertical
& horizontal groove joints shall be 25 mm wide & 10 mm deep.
All cement plaster finish shall be measure in square meters or part thereof for work actually completed in the
building.
The work quantified & determined as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for @ the Contract Unit
Price w/c price constitutes full compensation including labor, materials, tools and equipment & incidents
1027 (a) Cement plaster sq. m
1027 (b) Simulated red bricks. Pn 142 sq.m
PART F – PILING
Item 1300 – Piling to include Sheet Piling
1300.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing, driving, splicing and cutting off of foundation piles in accordance w/ these
specifications and where shown on the plans or as designated by the Engineer.
The requirements herein are minimum. Strict compliance w/ these minimum requirements will not relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility for adopting whatever additional provisions may be necessary to insure the
successful completion of the work.
The kind & type of piles shall be as shown on the plans & called for in the proposal. No alternate types or
kinds of piles, except that shown on the plans shall be used. The pile shall conform to the following
requirements.
1300.2.1 Untreated Timber Piles
The kind of timber used shall be as shown on the plans. All timber piles shall be cut from the trunks of sound
live trees, close grained, solid, free from defects such as injuries. Ring shakes, large and unsound loose
knots, decay, insect attacks or other defects w/c will materially affect its strength. Sound knots will be
permitted provided the diameter of a knot does not exceed 10 centimeters, or one –third the diameter of the
pile @ the point where it occurs.
Round piles shall be cut above the ground swell & shall taper from butt to tip. A line drawn from the center of
the tip to the center of the butt shall not fall outside of the cross –sectional center of the pile @ any point more
than 1 percent of the length of the pile. Piles shall be cut square @ the ends w/ its butt & tip diameters w/
Page 85 of 120
length not less than those called for in the specifications or in the plans. In short bends, the distance from the
center of the pile to a line stretched from the center of the pile above the bend to the center of the pile below
the bend shall not exceed 4 percent of the length of the bend or a maximum of 6.4 centimeters.
Unless otherwise specified, all piles shall be peeled removing all the rough bark & @ least 80 percent of the
inner bark. Not less than 80 percent of the surface on any circumference shall be clean wood. No strip of
inner bark remaining in the pile shall be over 2 centimeters wide & 20 centimeter long. All knots shall be
trimmed close to the body of the pile. The pile sizes, shall conform to the dimensions shown on the following
table:
Diameter ( 1 Meter from the butt ) Minimum Tip Diameter ( cm)

Length of Pile
Minimum ( cm ) Maximum ( cm )
Under 12 m 30 45 20
12 to 18 m 32 45 18
Over 18 m 35 50 15
The diameter of the piles shall be measured in their peeled condition. When the pile is not exactly round,
the average of three measurements may be used. For any structure the butt diameter for the same length of
pile shall be as uniform as possible.
Square piles shall have the dimensions shown on the plans. The kind of group of the timber piles shall be
specified. It shall be understood that any question arising between the government & the contractor with
regards to the meaning of the kind of timber called for in the plans or specifications or actually furnished, the
decision of the director of forestry, or his authorized representative shall & binding.
1300.2.2 Treated Timber Piles
All creosoted timber piles shall be “ Apitong” ( Dipterocarpus Grandiflorus ) as called for on the plants & shall
conform to the corresponding requirements for untreated timber piling. The wood shall be impregnated by the
“ Full Cell” process in accordance w/ ASTM D 1760 & AASHTOM 133, w/ minimum eighty (80) Pascals of
creosoted retained on the timber. The minimum penetration of the preservative into the timber shall be 2 mm.
The actual creosoting of the timber in the plants shall be subjected to inspection of the Engineer.
The creosote tobe used for all timber pile shall conform approximately to the formula adopted by the America
Wood Preserving Association of the United States of America. The Contractor shall submit a certification from
the creosoting plant that the pile delivered were impregnated by the “ Full Cell” process w/ approximately
eighty (80) Pascals of creosoted retained on the timbers & that the minimum penetration of the creosote shall
not be less than 20 mm.
1300.2.3 Steel Piles
Steel piles are built – up or steel sections usually H- Shape w/ wide flanges designed particularly for piling
purposes, & shall be of the section shown on the Plans & shall conform to item 402.2.6 of volume II ( Blue
Book ).
Steel piles when loaded, shall conform to the camber & sweep permitted by allowable mill tolerance. Piles
that are bent or otherwise injured will be rejected.
1300.2.4 Tubular Steel Piles
Tubular steel pile either welded or seamless w/ various diameters & wall thicknesses may be fluted, steeped
or longitudinal or spiral welded of minimum thickness of 6.35 mm & shall be driven to bearing. Open ended or
closed ended pile, the tube shall be filled w/ concrete & reinforced as indicated on the plans, similarly close
for ended pile.
a. Materials
For fluted tapered piles, the material of the pile shall comply w/ SAE -1010 steel specification having the
following chemical ranges & limits :
Carbon 0.08 to .13 ( % )

Sulphur 0.30 to 0.60 ( % )
Manganese 0.30 to 0.60 ( % )
Phosphorous 0.04 to ( % max )
The minimum average tensile yield strength of steel in the fabricated pile shall be 35.153 kg / mm².
The tip diameter shall not be less than 20 cm. The pile shall taper not less than 1 cm in one meter,
except that when such taper has developed a diameter of ( .305 ) ( .356 ) ( .406 ) or ( .457 ) as the case
may be corresponding to the diameter of the extension, the pile may be extended w/ sections having a
diameter w/c is virtually continuous.
For uniform section tubular piles, the material of the pile shall conform to ASTM A 252 - 68.
The steel pile shall be strong enough to withstand safely the force of installation. All splices shall consist
of continuous weld to form an integral pile.
b. Wall Thickness
Page 86 of 120
The wall thickness of steel pipes or tubes used in concrete filled steel piles shall be sufficient to
withstand driving to the required resistance w/o injury.
c. Testing
Material & test shall comply w/ the standards establish by the American Society for testing & Materials.
All test required of the manufacturer under the aforementioned ASTM Standard shall be submitted to
the Engineer by means of certified Test reports in triplicate prior to the shipment of the manufactured
items.
d. Painting & Handling
All sections shall be factory painted w/ epoxy tar on the outside. Pile may be stored in open air. Pile
shall be stored on timber placed @ maximum interval of 4.0 m. Pile shall not be stacked more than
three ( 3 ) tiers high,
Care should be exercised during handling transportation & storage of pile so that they will not be
ovalized, bruised, bent or dented. The Contractor shall furnish a warranty w/c conforms w/ the
Standard practice of manufactures of the contract item furnished shall be free from any or all
defects, whether latent or patent, in material or workmanship & shall conform to the requirements of
this specifications not withstanding the fact that the department may have accepted the contract
item or may have accepted or otherwise approved the contract items. Except for pile w/ minor
damage that in the opinion of the Engineer can be repaired on specified in the purchase order, any
contract item that item that may fail, or break in any manner, under the use and condition specified,
by reason of defective materials or workmanship, w/n the warranty period stated in the
specifications.
1300.2.5 Concrete Piles
Concrete for pile shall meet all the requirements for the specified class as provided under item 405,
“ Structural Concrete” except that the maximum size of aggregate shall not be greater than 2.54 cm in
any case. The concrete shall be class A unless otherwise stated on the plans. Ordinary Portland
Cement shall normally be used. Reinforcement shall consist of mild steel bars conforming to the
requirements for item 710, Par5t I of Volume II, Blue Book & binding links shall be bent & fixed of the
required size & dimension all as shown on the plans. Main reinforcing bars shall be supplied in one
complete length; should this prove impracticable separate lengths shall be effectively spliced in
accordance w/ the requirements of item 710, Part I of Volume II, Blue Book.
Concrete covering shall be a minimum of 7.5 cm measured from the outer surface of the concrete to the
nearest surface of the steel. Piles shall be cast on a horizontal platform in approved molds & details.
The form shall be true to line & built of dressed timber. A 2.5 centimeters chamfered strip shall be
provided at all corners.
Concrete shall be compacted using vibrators & supplementary spading & finished w/ admixture for
marine works as specified for Item 405, “Structural Concrete” . The concreting of each pile shall be
completed in one continuous operation & no interruption will be permitted. The piles shall be cast
separately w/ length lying horizontally or if alternate piles are cast in tiers, shall be separated by tar
paper carefully placed. The completed piles shall be free from stone pockets, porous spots, honeycomb
or other defects & shall be straight & true to the form specified. Forms shall be watertight & shall not be
removed w/n 24 hours after the concrete is placed. Plies shall be cured @ least 28 days except that
where high early strength cement is used, curing time may be reduced to 7 days. Piles shall not be
transported or driven until test indicates a 28 – day compressive strength has been attained. When
concrete piles are lifted or moved, they shall be supported as shown on the Plans.
1300.2.6 Cast – in Place Concrete Piles
The piles shall be of the design or designs shown on the Plans. The piles shall meet the requirements
of the design approved for the particular type. Any broken, improperly driven or otherwise defective
piles shall be removed & replaced. The class of concrete to be used for cast – in place concrete piles
shall be as specified on the plans. Reinforcements shall be secured in such manner as to insure its
proper location in the finished pile. Accumulation of water in the shell shall be removed before the
concrete is poured.
1300.2.7 Pre stressed Concrete Piles
Pre stressed concrete pile shall be constructed as shown on the plans & in accordance w/ Item 406,
Part F of Volume II, Blue Book. Strands for pre stressing shall be as specified in the same item
including curing & stripping of work.
1300.2.8 Pile shoes
Pile shoe, when required shall be of the approved design as called for on the Plans. For concrete piles,
the pile shoes shall consist of structural steel angles, and / or steel plate w/ a sizes and dimensions
shown on the plan & welded to mild steel reinforcement for embedment into the concrete. For tubular
piles, pile shoes shall consist of “chilled hardened” high duty cast iron of clean gray tough metal, free
from sand, honeycomb, air holes, or other defects, or of forged steel nosing. The cast iron or forged
steel nosing shall be welded to the tubular pile or pile shell.
Page 87 of 120
1300.3 Construction Method
The Contractor shall submit w/ his tender details of his proposed pile driving equipment & methods.
1300.3.1 Equipment, Location & Site Preparation
The Pile driving equipment shall include the piling frame, hammer, helmet & Packing w/ full information
of the method of handling & pitching piles & supporting them during driving, & of the proposed driving
procedure to give penetration to the required level & of the proposed set for the working load on the pile
& the method of calculating it.
For building foundation on land. all excavations of the foundation in w/c the piles are to be driven as
shown on the plans shall be completed before the driving is began. After driving is completed, All loose
& displaced materials shall be removed from around the piles, leaving clean solid surface to receive the
concrete coping.
For marine works, the piles shall be driven in properly staked positions w/ square holes after the site
have been cleared or obstructions have had been removed or the required dredging had been
completed. Driving may be executed w/ a floating plant, on false work or w/ the use of any existing
landing structure.
1300.3.2 Length of Pile
The length of the rest of the piles to be used for the structure shall be based upon the result of the test
piles previously conducted in accordance w/ item 1301 “Test Piles”. The contractor & the Engineer will
on the result of the test piling, mutually determine the length of the pile to be fabricated. The length to
be adopted shall however be subject to the prior written approval of the Engineer. The foregoing not
standing, the piles may be spliced & driven, if the piles will not develop the require bearing power after
having been driven to the penetration as determined from the test pile and / or test load. On the other
hand, piles not driven to the require penetration referred to herein but w/c have developed the required
bearing power may be accepted if no penetration was obtained w/ the aid of proper jetting or drilling.
1300.3.3 Driving Piles
All piles shall be driven @ locations previously determined on the site based on the plans. Any type
of hammer to be used prior to the construction shall require the Engineers approval in writing.
Gravity hammer may be used for driving timber piles. Any gravity hammer permitted shall weigh not
less than one-half of the weight of the pie to be driven but in no case less than 907 kg for pile weighing
1814 kg. or less. The fall shall be regulated so as to avoid injury to the pile & in no case shall exceed 6
meters.
Concrete & steel piles shall be driven w/ a steam hammer or a diesel hammer or a diesel hammer or a
diesel hammer w/c shall develop a energy per blow @ each full stroke of the piston of not less than
831.48 kg. m for each cubic metre of concrete.
1300.3.4 Pile Leads

Pile driver leads shall be constructed in such a manner as to afford freedom of movement of the
hammer & they can be held in position by supports or brace to insure steady position of the pile during
driving. The driving of piles w/ followers shall be avoided, as much as possible & may be done only
under written permission of the Engineer.
1300.3.5 Protection of Pile Heads
When the nature of the driving is such as to unduly injure the piles, the head thereof shall be protected
w/ a proper cap of approved design preferably consisting of rope or wooden blocks. The cap shall be
provided on the head of the pile, & should fit the base of the follower. When the area of the head of the
pile is larger than that of the driving part of the hammer, suitable cap shall be provided to distribute the
blow over the entire section of the pile & thus minimized any tendency to shatter the pile. Every timber
pile shall be provided w/ metal collar to prevent brooming, except when the head is fitted into a steel
block.
1300.3.6 Driving of Piles
Pile shall be driven w/ a variation of not more than 2 centimeters per meter from the batter shown on
the plan except that piles for trestle bents shall be so driven than the cap may be placed in its proper
location w/o inducing excessive stresses in the pile.
Procedure incident to the driving of pile shall not subject them to excessive or undue abuse producing
crushing or spalling of the concrete injuries splitting, splintering or brooming of the wood, or deformation
of the steel. Manipulation of piles to force them into proper position considered by the Engineer to be
excessive will not be permitted. Any pile damaged by reason of internal defects, or by improper driving,
or driven out of its proper location or driven below the elevation fixed by the plans or by the Engineer
shall be corrected @ the contractor expense by one of the following methods.
a. The Pile shall be withdraw & replace by a new & if necessary a longer pile.
b. A second pile shall be driven adjacent to the defective pile.
Page 88 of 120
c. The pile shall be spliced or built – up as otherwise provided.
No timber pile shall be spliced w/o specific permission of the Engineer. If allowed the top portion of the
splice shall have a minimum distance of 2.50 meters below the ground line or sea bed. It is expected
that all piles shall be driven to the full length shown on the plans & as determined by the test piles.
a) If the required capacity of the piles can not be obtained, the Contractor shall without delay report to
the Engineer for indication.
b) When it has become impossible to drive the pile before the specified depth is reached, the
Contractor shall investigate the cause & report to the Engineer & shall not – off the piles w/o the
Engineer’s permission.
c) In case piles refuse to penetrate to the specified depth, the following procedure may be restored to :
1. Jetting: Water jets may be used subject to the approval of the Engineer. This is done by displacing
soil @ the pile tip by means of one or more jets discharging a proper volume of water under sufficient
pressure to allow the discharge to come up to ground surface around the pile. Water pressure in sand
should be from 276 kPa to 414 kPa & in gravel from 690 kPa to 1035 kPa. Jet pipes can usually be
pushed into the ground by hand. Moving the pipe up & down will give a lubricating effect. It maybe
necessary to put the two jets down first on one opposite side & then on the other opposite sides. Before
the desired penetration is reached, the jet shall be removed @ least one meter short of the minimum
required penetration under normal driving operations.
2. Drilling: When it has been satisfactorily demonstrated to the Engineer that the piles can not be driven
in the regular manner or by use of water jets undersized pilot ole maybe drilled below the pile tip to
facilitate the driving.
When drilling is permitted, the pilot hole drilled shall have a diameter not more than 75% of the cross
section of the driven pile & the drilling shall continue only through the strata of hard material obstructing
the driving. The contractor shall make every effort to provide a stable hole of uniform diameter in order
to avoid losing the soil – pile friction along the length of the pilot hole. Before the desired penetration is
reached, the drill shall be removed @ least one meter short of the minimum specified penetration & the
pile shall be finally set under normal driving operations. All piles shall be driven to levels determined by
the Engineer as driving of the group of piles proceed &, in addition, all bearing piles shall have achieved
the required penetration & bearing w/c indicate that they are capable of carrying w/ factor of safety of
two @ least the bearing capacity indicated on the drawings.
A detailed record of driving of all piles shall be furnished by the Contractor & given to the Engineer daily
& he shall give every assistance to the Engineer to enable him to check measurements during the
progress of the work.
1300.3.7 Bearing Power of Pile

Each pile shall be driven until it develops the bearing power indicated on the plans, as determined by
the following “Engineering News” formulas
a) For drop hammer where the weight of the ram shall not be less than one – half (1/2) the weight of
the pile:
L = 200 km
12c + 9P
K
b) For single – acting steam hammer, where hammer is free to fall w/o aid of steam pressure in
cylinder :
L= 200Km
12c + 9P
K
c) For double – acting steam hammer, where stem is acting against piston in forcing hammer down :
L = 200 ( K +ap )m
12c + 3P
K
Where:
L = safe bearing power, in kilograms,

K = Weight of hammer ram, in kilograms ( ram is the moving part of the steam hammer )
P = Weight of pile including driving head & follower in kilograms
m – Free fall of hammer, in meters
c – Average penetration under last six (6) blows in centimeters,
a – effective area of the piston per square centimeter, and
p – Steam pressure, in kilograms per square centimeters
d) For diesel hammer, appropriate formula to be used in computing for the bearing power shall be
submitted to the office of the Engineer for approval. In case water jets are used in connection w/ the
driving, the bearing power shall be determined by the above formulas from the results of driving
after the jets have been withdrawn. When driving is interrupted before final penetration is reached,
Page 89 of 120
or when splicing is made, the record for penetration shall not be taken until after at least 30
centimeters penetration has been obtained on resumption of driving.
1300.3.9 Extension or Build – ups

Extension, splice or “ build – ups” of piles when necessary shall be made as follows :
a. Timber Piles – When necessary, the splice shall be made according to detail furnished by the
Engineer. Fish plates or pipe splices are allowed however it is required that the top of the splice
shall be at least 2.50 meters below the sea bed after driving.
b. Structural Steel Pile – Structural steel piles shall be spiced by welding, using spilce plate
when necessary.
c. Tubular Steel Pile – Sections of tubular piles shall be joined by telescopic sections & lap
welded for full penetration or by means of butt welding of uniform sections continuous
throughout the joint.
d. Precast Concrete Piles – After the driving is completed, the concrete at the end of the pile
shall be cut away, leaving the reinforcing steel exposed for a length of 1 meter. The final cut
of the concrete shall be perpendicular to the axis of the pile. Reinforcement similar to that
used in the pile shall be securely fastened to the projecting steel & the necessary formwork
shall be placed. Care being taken to prevent leakage along the pile. The concrete shall be of
the same quality as that used in the pile. Just prior to the placing of concrete, the top of the
pile shall be thoroughly wetted & covered w/ a thin coating of neat cement. The forms shall be
left in place for not less than 7 days & shall then be carefully removed & the entire exposed
surface of the pile shall be given an ordinary surface finish.
1300.3.10 Cutting Off and Capping Piles

All piles shall be cut off square @ the required elevations. Tops of foundation pile shall be
embedded in the concrete footing by at least .30 meters or as shown on the plans. If capping
is required, the connections shall be made according to details shown on the plan. The
required embedment of the steel shall extend into the pile cap.
1300.3.11 Protecting Heads of piles
a) The heads of untreated piles in footing shall be cut – square & below the lowest ground
elevation.
b) For heads of treated piles in marine works, the cuts & abrasions, after having been carefully
trimmed, shall be coated w/ at least three applications of hot creosoted oil & covered w/ hot
asphalt or roofing pitch. Before bolts are driven all holes shall be impregnated w/hot creosote
oil. Treated piles shall be handled carefully. They shall not be bruised or penetrated by tools
c) When steel piles or tubular piles extended above the ground surface or water surface, they
shall be protected by two coats of epoxy coal tar. If concrete jacket is required a minimum
thickness of .15 m shall be used. These protection shall extend 1.00 m below the water
elevation on finished ground to the top of the expose steel.

For supply, the quantities to be paid for shall be actual number of lineal meters of pile shown on
the plans or ordered from a list approved in writing by the Engineer based on the results of the
pile driving of the test piles. For driving, the quantities to be paid for shall be the actual number of
lineal meters of piles driven & accepted measured from the tip of the pile to the ground surface.
Defective piles on piles driven outside the allowable tolerance as to location shall not be
measured for payment but shall be replace in kind. Piles shoes, and accessories for splicing shall
not be measured but shall be considered already included in the measurements of lengths for the
supply & splicing w/c ever is the case.

The quantities of piling left in place in the accepted structure measured as provided above shall
be paid for at the Contract unit price per linear meter for “ Piling “ of the particular type called for
in the proposal. Cut – offs measured as provided above shall be paid for @ a unit price per linear
meter base on the cost of supply. Cutting – off shall deemed included in the cost. Splicing shall
not be paid for, but the length of splicing shall be paid for in linear meters as required by the
Engineer. Payment for tubular piles left in place shall include the cost of the concrete core of
class A concrete including the steel reinforcement of the said concrete core. All the above price &
payment shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment,
tools, fuel, welding if needed and other incidental expenses to complete the Item.
Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement
1300.1a. Untreated Timber pile Supply linear meter

b. “ Drive “
c. “ Splice “
Page 90 of 120
1300.2a. Treated Timber Piles Supply “
b. “ Drive “
c. “ Splice “
1300.3a. Steel pipes Supply linear meter

b. “ Drive “
c. “ Splice “
1300.4a. Tubular Steel Piles Supply “

b. “ Drive “
c. “ Splice “
1300.5a. Concrete Piles Supply linear meter

b. “ Drive “
c. “ Splice “
1300.6a. Prestressed Conc. Piles Supply “

b. “ Drive “
c. “ Splice “
Item 1301 – Test Pile
1301.1 Description
This item shall consist of the furnishing, driving, including splicing or cutting off of test piles or piles in
accordance w/ these specification @ locations shown on the Plans or as designated by the Engineer.
The kind & type of pile or piles shall be as shown on the plans & shall be of the same kind & type as the rest
of the piles of the same structure. These pile shall be of greater length or two meters longer that the length
assumed in the design in order to provide for any variation in soil conditions that will required deeper
penetration. The piles shall conform to the requirements specified for each kind & types of pile under clause
1300.2 “ Material Requirement “ of item 1300 “Piling Work “
1301.3 Construction Method
The contractor shall have submitted w/ his tender, details of his proposed pile driving equipment & methods
for driving the test pile or piles. Driving test pile shall be performed w/ the same type of pile driver to be used
in the permanent works. The procedure shall be as described in clause 1300.3 “ Construction Methods” of
Item 1300 “ Piling Work “. The contractor shall fabricate the test pile or piles to the specified length by the
Engineer & shall be driven in the position shown on the plans or selected by the Engineer, such that it shall
become an integral part of the structure. The contractor shall furnish the Engineer w/ detailed record of the
driving of the test pile throughout the full depth of driving & after attaining the required penetration, driving
shall be continued until refusal or until the Engineer directs that it shall stop. Driving beyond the point at w/c
the required penetration is obtained may be called for to demonstrate that driving resistance continue to
increase. When refusal is attained, w/o the required penetration, while the putt of the pile is still above the
require elevation, jetting or drilling shall be restored to as prescribed in item 1300, “ Piling Works “. If found
necessary, this pile shall be spliced & re – driven until the bearing power attained is to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
Test piles, whether driven or not to the required penetration & bearing. Including jetting or drilling if necessary
shall be paid in linear meter & size specified, driven & accepted. Cut – off are included except splicing w/c
shall be paid @ the contract unit price for splicing for the kind & type of piling under Item q300 “ Piling Works
“. This payment shall include that cost of materials, labor, equipment, tools, fuel, cutting & accessories
needed to complete the item.
1301 (a) Untreated timber test pile butt diameter length Linear meter
1301 (b) Treated timber test pile butt diameter length Linear meter
1301 (c) Steel test piles size length Linear meter
1301 (d) Concrete Test Pile Length Linear meter
1301 (e) Tubular test pile size length Linear meter
Item 1400 – Mooring Fixtures
1400.1 Description
This item shall consist of the furnishing, installing & painting of all types of mooring fixtures @ locations as
shown on the plans & required by this specification.
1400.2 Materials
Page 91 of 120
The materials shall be tough gray cast iron & casting shall conform to the details shown on the plans & shall
be true to pattern. The finished product shall be out of wind, free from flood & excessive shrinkage. Fixing
devices such as anchor bolts, nuts & washers shall be hot – zinc coated – steel fabricated from steel w/
minimum tensile strength of 37 kg / mm2.
Items called for maybe the following :
(a) Mooring Cleat – Weighing approximately 75 kilos each w/ two 31.75 mm diameter standard bolts w/
standard 38.1 mm diameter G.I pipe & ogee washer. Length of bolts & G.I. pipe depends on the thickness of
the concrete slab or timber dock where the fixture is to be located.
(b) Mooring Post – Weighing approximately 50 kilos each w/ 4 pieces of 31.75 mm diameter x 60 cm swedge
bolts w/ 7.5 cm threaded end & swedge of 12.7 mm long by 6.35 mm deep spaced @ 10 cm on centers &
staggered ¼ of the circumference from the preceeding swedge, so that on each of the four sides of the bolt
the swedge will be 40 cm apart.
(c) Mooring Bitt – Weighing approximately 405 kilos w/ four 38.1 mm diameter swedge bolts by 90 cm long.
The swedge anchor bolt shall be threaded for a length of 15 cm at one end. The swedge on the bolt shall be
19 mm long by 9.5 mm deep space @ 15 cm on centers starting 7.5 cm from the end of the threaded portion,
& staggered around the bolt at a distance of ¼ of the circumference from the preceeding swedge so that on
each of the four sides of the bolt the swedges will be 60 cm apart.
Mooring fixtures shall be placed as per plan. For mooring cleat, the pipe w/ length equal to the thickness of
the slab shall be embedded into the concrete @ location indicated on the plans. For timber decks, holes
larger than the bolt shall be drilled. The head of the bolts shall fit the socket on the mooring fixtures & the
ogee washer shall be placed at the bottom before placing the nut. For mooring post installation on concrete,
the swedge bolt, fixed on a template maybe embedded in the new concrete. For installation on timber decks,
bolts w/ ogee washer shall be used. For mooring bitt or bollard, cored holes 88.9 mm diameter shall be
provided in the concrete for the anchor bolts as called for on the plans. The bolts shall be carefully centered &
granted in the holes, extending 9.5 mm above the top of the cast iron based in final position, by the aid of a
template made to conform in each case to the base of the particular mooring bitt / bollard to be placed. Prior
to placing the mooring fixtures, the concrete bed shall be roughened & the expose threaded end of bolts shall
be scrubbed w/ gasoline & fluxed w/ muriatic acid, w/c shall then be neutralized w/ hot water & soda solution.
The inside of the bolt holes in the base o the mooring bitt/ bollard shall then be placed in position plumb & at
precise spacing over the bolts on layer of stiff one to two (1:2 ) cement mortar 6.5 mm in thickness, After this
mortar bed has set any mortar forced up into the bolt holes shall be carefully removed & the hole threads
again cleaned w/ cotton waste, dampened w/ acid & neutralized as above described. The threads & holes
shall then be protected until ready for zincing. Zinc shall be applied to the bolt holes of the bitt / bollard in the
following manner : A dam of clay 8.9 cms. in diameter shall be built on the base around each bolt. Molten zinc
shall then be prepared & the bolt & hole shall then be heated w/ a blow torch to prevent the zinc from
hardening prematurely. The molten zinc shall then be poured in one continuous operation for each bolt head,
so as to cover the top of the bolt to a thickness of about 6.5 mm. After the zinc has hardened, the holes shall
be smoothly rounded off to a quarter circle. For replacement only of damaged mooring bitt / bollard, the zinc
shall be molten by heating w/ blow torch & removed the remaining portion of the mooring fixtures shall be
lifted from the bolts & concrete bedding. The old concrete bedding shall be removed & the above procedure
for installation of new mooring fixture shall be followed. Painting – The surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned &
painted w/ two coats of coled applied chip resistant tar w/ bitumen. Bolt recesses if any are to be filled up w/
an approved mastic sealing compound.
The number of sets of mooring fixtures ( cleats, post, bittt & bollard ) supplied, installed, painted & accepted
shall be the basis for measurement.
The number of sets of mooring fixtures ( cleats, post, bitt & bollard ) determined as provided above @ the
contract unit price for new fixtures w/c include the accessories. For replacement, the number of mooring
fixtures reconstructed shall be determined & paid for @ the contract unit price for supply of new fixtures w/o
accessories. Such prices & payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing & placing all materials,
for turning over to the Engineer all waste or damages fixtures & for all labor, equipment, tools & incidentals
necessary to complete the item.
1400.1 (a) Cleat w/ accessories each set

(b) Post w/ accessories each set
(c) Bitt w/ accessories each set
(d) Bollard w/ accessories each set
1400.2 (a) Cleat ( Replacement ) each

(b) Post (Replacement ) each
(c) Bitt ( Replacement ) each
(d) Bollard ( Replacement ) each
Page 92 of 120
Item 1401 – Timber Waling
1401.1 Description
This item shall consist of the furnishing, fabricating & installing of timber waling, as shown on the plans, of
Yacal or Ipil placed & fixed by bolts on the edges of landings for the purpose of preventing the vessels or
ships from getting in direct contact w/ the structure.
1401.2 Materials
Timber waling shall be yacal or ipil, thoroughly seasoned or dried, sound, straight, free of splits shakes,
decays & knots & other defects. Walings shall be sawn square & true to dimensions shown on the plans. All
bolts, nuts & washers shall be of galvanized steel.
Yacal or ipil waling shall be placed along the edge of the wharf or pier as shown on the plans & secured in
placed by means of one 25.4 mm Ø bolt set in 31.75 mm Ø galvanized iron pipe embedded in the concrete &
spaced as shown on the plans. The nuts & ogee washers for the bolts shall be countersunk in the timber so
that no portion of the bolt or nut shall be placed w/n 25 mm of the outer surface of the timber, and the holes
shall be placed w/ hard asphalt. Likewise, the bolt heads, w/ standard cut washers, shall be countersunk in
the concrete curb, and the holes placed w/ hard asphalt of the same grade. The timber waling shall be lap –
joined. The centerline of the bolts attaching the wall to the curb. All timber waling shall be painted w/ two
coats of hot tar, the second coat to be applied immediately before contact is made w/ the concrete.
The quantity of walings to be paid for shall be the length in linear meters of timber walings supplied,
fabricated, installed, painted & accepted in the final work.
The total length of the walings in linear meters as determined above shall be paid for @ the unit contract price
in the proposal. The unit price shall be considered to include all materials, fabricating, installation & painting &
all other incidental work.
1401.1 Timber Waling Linear meter
Item 1402 – Fender Clusters & Dolphins
1402.1 Description
This item shall consist of the furnishing, driving, cutting off & bending of piles in clusters, provided w/ rubbing
timber or rubber dock fenders in accordance w/ these specifications & where shown on the plans or as
designated by the Engineer. The requirements herein are minimum, strict compliance w/ these minimum
requirements will not relieve the contractor of the responsibility for adopting whatever additional provisions
maybe necessary to ensure the successful completion of the work.
The kind & type of piles shall be as shown on the plans & cancelled for in the proposal. Pilings maybe either
Creosoted Apitong, Reinforced Concrete, Steel or Tubular Piles & shall be in accordance w/ section
1300.2 Materials of Item 1300 Piling Works.
For timber piles, binding shall be galvanized steel wire cables w/ galvanized staples & gage 24 G.I sheet
caps. For concrete piles, reinforced concrete capping shall be used as binder. For tubular piles, galvanized
structural shapes or angles shall be used for framing & welded to the tubular piles. For rubbing timber used
Yacal or Ipil, 250 mm x 250 mm, secured by Galvanized bolts & galvanized lag screws. All Rubber Dock
Fenders shall be in accordance w/ Item 1403 Rubber Dock Fenders.
The Concrete & Tubular Fender Piles ( Rigid Type ) should be driven to a penetration sufficient to develop the
required compression or tension in the piles. Piles may be vertical or with slope as shown on the plans. For
timber piles ( flexible type ), the binding shall be as follows :
3 – pile cluster - 5 turns of 16 mm Ø galvanized steel wire cable

- all pile batter
Page 93 of 120
- one rubbing timber secured by 20 mm Ø bolts & 20 mm Ø x 250 mm lag
screws spaced @ .70 O.C
4 - pile cluster - 5 turns of 16 mm Ø galvanized steel wire cable

- two piles vertical, 2 piles batter
- 2 rubbing timber secured by 20 mm Ø bolts & 20 mm Ø x 250 mm lag screws
spaced @ .70 O.C

- two piles vertical, 3 pile batter
spaced @ .70 O.C

- 3 piles vertical, 4 piles batter
spaced @ .70 O.C
9 – pile cluster - 10 turns of 25 mm Ø steel wire cable

spaced @ .70 O.C

spaced @ .70 O.C
The timber pie should be driven to a penetration below sea bed of about one third (1/3 ) of the respective
length. This penetration may be increased or decreased by about one or two meters depending upon the
nature of the material encountered. Batter piles slope approximately 1:6. Bind the pile clusters w/ galvanized
steel wire cable w/c should be secured to every pile in contract w/ galvanized staples, ends of cables to be
looped securely fastened. Top of the pile & cables after cutting & placing respectively shall be treated w/ two
thick coats of hot tar, before placing metal cap. Paint w/one coat of tar the cap after it is placed.
Fender Clusters & Dolphins shall be measured by the number of units w/ corresponding number of piles
installed & completed w/ rubbing timber or rubber dock fenders & accepted. For rigid type the actual
penetration of the pile ( R.C & Tubular steel ) to the required bearing shall be determined & the increase or
decrease in pile length shall be measured by the lineal meters.
The number of sets of fender clusters or dolphins, installed, completed w/ the required number of rubbing
timber or rubber dock fenders, shall be paid for @ the contract unit price per set w/ the specified number of
pile per cluster, w/c price & payment shall constitute full compensation for all false work, form driving, placing
& finishes & for all materials, labor, equipment & incidentals necessary to complete the item. The cost per set
may be increased or decreased depending on the result of driving of the R.C or Tubular Steel Piles.
Pay Item No. & Name Unit of Measurement
1402.1 3 Pile / set

.2 4 Pile / set
.3 5 Pile / set
.4 7 Pile / set
.5 9 Pile / set
.6 12 Pile / set
1402.7 Concrete Dolphin
(a) Increase in length of Pile / set

(b) Decrease in length of pile / set
8 Tubular Steel Dolphin / set

( a ) Increase in length of pile / set
( b ) Decrease in length of pile / l. m.
Item 1024 – Pea Gravel Washout Finish
1024.1 Description
Page 94 of 120
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials. Labor, tools & equipment required in undertaking the
proper application of pea – gravel washout finish as shown on the Plans & in accordance w/ this
Specification.
1024.2.1 Pea Gravel
Pea gravel specie shall be of well grades sizes consisting of 4 mm to 8 mm round variation wash river
gravel.
1024.2.2 Cement
Portland cement shall conform w/ the specification requirements defined in item 700, Hydraulic Cement. Use
one brand of Portland cement throughout the pea gravel washout finish mix.
All pea gravel washout finish shall be done by men experienced & qualified to do this particular type of trade.
The contractor shall submit @ least two ( 2 ) samples to the Engineer / Architect for approval measuring 300
mm x 300 mm showing its color, texture & design patterns.
a) Walk, ramps, driveways & elsewhere indicated on the Plans as pea gravel washout finish shall be
properly slope & rendered under bed.
b) The under bed mixture shall be spread to bring mortar under bed to a level of 16 mm below the finish
floor line.
c) For concrete masonry walls, columns etc. the surface to be applied shall be first rendered a scratch coat
& made true to plane. Leveled plumbed & squared then allowed to cure for seven (7) days.
1024.3.2 Mixture & Proportion
Pea gravel washout mix shall consist of one part Portland cement & two (2) parts pea gravel measured by
volume or a proportion equivalent to 1:2. Mixtures shall be in approved containers to ensure that the
specified materials are controlled & accurately measured. Mixture measured by shovel or shovel counts will
not be permitted. Unless specified otherwise pea gravel washout mix shall be in the proportion by volume in
approved mixing machines or mortar boxes. The aggregates introduced & mixed in such a manner that the
materials will be uniformly distributed through – out the mass. A sufficient amount of water shall be added
gradually & the mass further mixed until a mortar plasticity necessary for the purpose intended is obtained.
Mortar boxes, pans etc. Where mixtures are mixed shall be kept clean & free from debris or dried mortar.
a) Before work is started, the slope for drainage should be properly done & provided in the under bed
prepared. Concrete setting bed must be rough &all loose particles or anything w/c diminish bond shall
be thoroughly cleaned off. The concrete under bed must be kept wet for at least four (4) hours before
the pea gravel mix is applied.
b) Pea grave washout mix shall be applied w/ pressure to obtain solid adhesion to the under bed & setting
bed. The finished surface shall be firm, even & monolithically applied. When the surface applied w/ pea
gravel mix has sufficiently set the cement paste shall be removed by use of sponge or water spraying
equipment used in this specialty trade in order to expose the pea quarter face but still intact.
1024.3.4 Curing, Cleaning & Finishing
As soon as possible as the pea gravel are exposed to desired appearance the surface shall be covered w/
damp burlap or other approved covers. At the proper time when surface are semi-dry & a table allow the
applied surface to cure.
1024.3.5 Protection
For proper curing, keep the pea gravel washout finish moistened for a period of at least seven (7) days by
thoroughly to produce a clean & sparkling appearance & protected until work has been accepted.
All works done under this item shall be measured in square meters/ lineal meter or part thereof for work
completed & accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The quantity determined in Item 1018.4 Method of Measurement shall be paid for @ the unit bid or contract
unit price as stated in the Bill of materials, tools & incidentals to complete this Item.
Page 95 of 120
1024 (a) Pea – Gravel Washout Finish ln / sq.m.
Item 1025 – Bush Hammered Finish
1025.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing al materials, labor, tools, & equipment, plant & other facilities &
undertaking the proper application of Bush Hammered finish complete required as shown on the Plans & in
accordance w/ this Specification.
The contractor shall submit for approval samples of each applied finish 300 mm x 300mm of different shades
to the Engineer. Approved samples shall be kept for future reference.
1015.2.1 Cement
Cement shall be ordinary gray Portland cement conforming w/ the specification requirement defined in item
700, hydraulic Cement. One brand of Portland cement shall be used throughout the plaster mortar mix.
1025.2.2 Adobe Aggregate
Adobe aggregate shall be crushed & pulverized to an approved graded size improving its mixing ability as
coarse aggregate.
Wall surfaces to be rendered w/ bush hammered finish shall be scratch coated w/ plaster cement mortar & be
made true to plane. Plumbed & squared. The scratch coat must be properly cured w/n seven days.
1025.3.2 Mixture of Adobe Plaster Mortar
Adobe plaster shall be a mixture of Portland cement, crushed & pulverized graded adobe stones. It shall be
uniformly mixed in the proportion by volume of one part Portland cement & two parts adobe aggregates ( 1:2
proportion ).
1025.3.3 Application Procedure
1025.3.3.1 Before any application work is commenced all wood moulds for horizontal & vertical groove joints
shall be first established & set. The scratch coat has to reason for seven days.
1025.3.3.2 Surfaces to be applied w/ adobe plaster mortar shall be thoroughly moistened w/ fog spray.
1025.3.3.3 Adobe plaster mortar shall be floated to a true & even surface. It may also be floated / troweled to
a hard flutted surface w/ series of grooves also known as corduroy finish.
1025.3.3.4 As soon as the plastered finish is hard enough to react hammering, the surface is textured by
hammering w/ an ax or hatchet leaving or exposing the natural appearance of the aggregate composition of
mortar mixture.
10.25.3.4 Workmanship
Bush hammered finish shall be level, plumbed squared & true to a tolerance of 3 mm w/o 3 m w/o caves,
crack blisters, pits crazing, discolorations, projections or other imperfections. Plastering work shall be formed
carefully around angles, contours & cants. Special care shall be taken to prevent sagging & consequent
dropping of applications. There shall be no junction marks in the finish where one provide vertical & horizontal
groove joints.
Upon completion of the work all surfaces shall be cleaned w/ steel brush & water to removed loose particles
leaving the cleaned surfaces in its natural appearance. When cleaned surfaces in its natural appearance.
When cleaned surfaces dries spray a coat of water repellant.
Bush hammered finish shall be measured per area actually done in square meter completed & accepted to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Page 96 of 120
The work quantified & determined in the preceding section or as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid
for @ the Contract unit bid w/c price & payment constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools,
equipment & other incidentals necessary to complete this item.
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number Description Method of Measurement
1025 (a) Bush hammered finish sq. m

1025 (b) Fluted bush hammered finish sq. m
Item 1026 – Pebble Washout Finish
1026.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing all materials, labor, tools & equipment required in undertaking the proper
application of pebble washout finish as shown on the Plans & in accordance w/ this Specification.
1026.2.1 Pebble
Pebble shall be well graded stones sized ranging from # 4 to # 10 rounded specie like Luna Stones, Boracay,
etc.
1026.2.2 Cement
Cement shall be Portland type conforming to item 700, hydraulic Cement. It can be of gray or white specie
depending on the tone or color scheme approved.
1026.2.3 Colored Cement
Colored cement shall be powder type pigmented used to obtain the desired shade & color of finish.
All pebble washout finish shall be done by men experience & qualified to do this particular type of trade. The
contractor shall submit @ least two samples for each type of pebble washout finish to the Engineer/ Architect
for approval showing its color, texture & design patterns.
Surface to receive pebble washout finish shall be clean of all projection, dust loose particles & foreign
matters. It shall be thoroughly wetted w/ clean water before application of scratch coat mortar. When surface
has sufficiently set scratch w/ hard broom.
1026.3.2 Mixture
Pebble washout finish mix shall consist of one part Portland cement & two parts pebble measured by volume
or a proportion equivalent to 1:2. Mixtures shall be in approved containers to ensure that the specified
materials are controlled & accurately measured. Mixtures measured by shovel or shovel counts will not be
permitted. Unless specified otherwise pebble washout mix shall be in the proportion by volume in approved
mixing machines or mortar boxes. The aggregates introduced & mixed in such a manner that the materials
will be uniformly distributed throughout the mass. A sufficient amount of water shall be added gradually & the
mass further mixed until a mortar plasticity necessary for the purpose intended is obtained. Mortar boxes,
pans etc. where mixtures are mixed shall be keep clean & free from debris or dried mortar.
a) Before any application, work is started the Contractor shall establish all wood mould for vertical &
horizontal groove lines after the scratch coat has seasoned for seven days in the case of masonry wall or
concrete columns, beams, parapets, etc.
b) In the case of finish flooring application & the like the slope of drainage should be properly provided &
design pattern properly placed. The proposed under bed shall be done to a level of 16 mm below the finish
floor line to accommodate the pebble washout mix.
c) The prepared surfaces to receive the pebble washout mix shall be kept damp for @ least four (4) hours
before the application work is commenced.
d) Pebble washout finish mix shall be applied w/ pressure to obtain solid adhesion to the prepared surface.
e) The applied surface shall be firm, even & monolithically applied, then allowed to set initially.
Page 97 of 120
f) When the applied surface has initially set to withstand the removal & cement paste on the outer surface so
that the pebbles are partly exposed or by means of paint brush & water, or by means exposed in their natural
texture appearance.
a) Pebble washout finish shall be leveled, plumbed, square true w/n a tolerance of 3 mm in 3 m w/o caves,
cracks, blisters, pits crazing, discoloration, projections, or other imperfections.
b) Special care shall be taken to prevent sagging & consequent drooping of applications.
c) There shall be no invisible junction marks in the finish surface where one day work adjoins another.
d) Where required or directed by the Engineer Architect provide vertical & horizontal groove joints.
a) When the pebble washout surface has finally set the surface shall be kept wet or moist for @ least six
days.
b) After all other trade have been completed the pebbles washout finish surfaces shall be saturated w/ diluted
hydrochloric acid & cleaned w/ steel brush.
c) Allow the clean surface to dry then apply a coat of silicon water repellant to protect the natural physical
appearance of the pebble washout finish.
Pebble washout finish shall be measured in square meters lineal meters or part thereof for work actually
completed & accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer /Architect.
The work done under this item as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for @ the contract unit bid w/c
price & payments constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools, equipment & incidentals
1026 (a) Pebble washout ln / sq.m.
Item 1027 – Cement Plaster finish
1027.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all cement plaster materials, labor, tools & equipment required in
undertaking cement plaster finish as shown on the plans & in accordance w/ this Specification.
1027.2.1 Cement
Portland cement shall conform w/ the requirements as defined in Item 700, Hydraulic Cement.
1027.2.2 Hydrated Lime
Hydrated lime shall conform w/ the requirements as defined in Item 701, Hydrated Lime.
Fine aggregates shall be clean, washed sharp river sand & free from dirt, clay, organic matter or other
but in no case shall such sand be derived from stone unsuitable for use as coarse aggregates.
1027.3.1 Mixture
a) Mortar mixture for brown coat shall be freshly prepared & uniformly mixed in the proportion by volume of
one part Portland Cement, three (3) parts sand & one fourth (1/4) part hydrated lime.
Page 98 of 120
b) Finish coat shall be pure Portland Cement properly graded conforming to the requirements of item 700,
Hydraulic Cement & mixed w/ water to approved consistency & plasticity.
a) After removal of formworks reinforces concrete surfaces shall be roughened to improve adhesion of
cement plaster.
b) Surfaces to receive cement plaster shall be cleaned of all projections. Dust, loose particles, grease &
bond breakers. Before any application of brown coat is commenced all surfaces that are to be plastered shall
be wetted thoroughly w/ clean water to produce a uniformly moist condition.
a) Brown coat mortar mix shall be applied w/ sufficient pressure starting from the lower portion of the surface
to fill the grooved & to prevent air pockets in the reinforced concrete / masonry work & avoid mortar mix
drooping. The brown coat shall be lightly broomed / or scratch before surface had properly set & allowed to
cure.
b) Finish coat shall not be applied until after the brown coat has seasoned for seven days & corrective
measures had been done by the Contractor on surfaces that are defective. Just before the application of the
finish coat, the brown coat surface shall be floated first to a true & even surface, then troweled in a manner
that will force the mixture to penetrate into the brown coat. Surfaces applied w/ finish coat shall then be
smooth w/ paper in a circular motion to remove trowel marks. Checks & blemishes. All cement plaster finish
shall be 10 mm thick minimum on vertical concrete and /or masonry walls.
Wherever indicated on the Plans to be “ Simulated Red Brick Finish “, the Contractor shall render brick design
on plaster surface before brown coat had properly set & then allowed to dry. Cement plaster shall not be
applied directly to :
a) Concrete or masonry surface that had been coated w/ bituminous compound and
b) Surfaces that had been painted or previously plastered.
Cement plaster finish shall be true to details & plumbed. Finish surface shall have no visible junction marks
where one (1) Day’s work adjoins the other. Where directed by the Engineer or as shown on the Plans vertical
& horizontal groove joints shall be 25 mm wide & 10 mm deep.
The work quantified & determined as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for @ the Contract Unit
Price w/c price constitutes full compensation including labor, materials, tools and equipment & incidentals
necessary to complete this Item.
1027 (a) Cement plaster finish sq. m
1027 (b) Simulated red bricks. Pn 142 sq. m.
Item 1028 – Synthetic Adobe
1028.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing synthetic adobe materials, labor, tools & equipment necessary &
undertaking synthetic adobe works as shown on the Plans & in accordance w/ this Specifications.
Portland cement shall conform w/ the Specification requirements defined in item 701 Hydraulic Lime. One
brand of Portland cement shall be used throughout the synthetic adobe mortar mix.
Walls to be applied w/ synthetic adobe shall be scratch coated w/ cement plaster & be made true to plane,
level, plumbed & squared. The scratch coat must be properly cured w/n seven days.
1028.3.2 Mixture
Page 99 of 120
Synthetic adobe tool finish shall be a mixture of crushed & pulverized adobe stones & Portland cement. It
shall be uniformly mixed in the proportion by volume of one part Portland cement & two parts crushed &
pulverized adobe stones. Where approved to blend sea shell or marble chips the same shall be premixed.
The contractor shall establish all wood mould for groove joints after the prepared surface has seasoned for
seven days. The surface shall be evenly moistened w/ fog spray. Synthetic adobe plaster mix shall be floated
to a true & even surface. It may also be troweled to a hard flutted surface w/ series of grooves. As soon as the
plastering is hard enough, the surface is textured by means of line hammering to produce the desired external
effect.
1028.3.4 Types of Textural Tool Finish
a) Bush hammered synthetic adobe finish
The applied adobe plaster when appropriate to react shall be finished w/ fine hammering. The textured
surface shall expose the natural appearance of the aggregate composition of mix.
b) Flutted bush hammered finish
The applied surface of series of groove w/ wood mould patterns shall be textured by fine hammering exposing
the aggregate composition to the natural appearance.
c) Piqueta tool finish
The applied surface shall be textured by using an ax or hatchet leaving parallel line markings improving its
textural appearance.
Synthetic adobe finish shall be level, plumbed squared & true to a tolerance of 3 mm w/o caves, cracks
blisters, pits, crazings, discolorations, projections or other imperfections. Plaster work shall be formed
carefully around angels, contours & cants. Special care shall be taken to prevent sagging & consequent
dropping of applications. There shall be no junction marks in the finish where one day work adjoins another.
Where required & as directed by the Engineer provide vertical & horizontal groove joints.
Upon completion of the work & surfaces had completely set clean w/ water & steel brush so that loose particle
shall be removed leaving the exposed surface in its natural appearance.
Synthetic adobe tool finish shall be measured in square meters or part thereof for work actually completed &
accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The work quantified & determined in the preceding section 1031.4 Method of measurement shall be paid for
@ the Contract unit price w/c price & payment constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools &
equipment & incidentals necessary to complete this item.
Item 1403 – Rubber Dock Fenders
1403.1 Description
This pay item shall consist of special approved type of quality of unused natural or synthetic rubber by
extrusion process.
Rubber Dock Fenders shall be extruded natural rubber strong durable, high resistant to weather, salt water &
abrasion. These pay item shall be homogenous throughout, free from impurities, pored or weak sections,
cracks, tats bubbles & other defects detrimental to the services where they are intended. This pay item shall be
installed as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
The amount to be paid for shall be the actual number of sets of Rubber Dock Fenders installed of placed of
special quality as specified accepted & finished.
Page 100 of 120

The number of sets of Rubber Dock Fenders as stated above, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per
sets installed. The price & installation of the rubber dock fenders in place, & for all labor, materials, equipment
or tools & other incidentals necessary to complete this pay item.
Inst. of Rubber Dock Fenders sets
Item 1404 – Filter Fabric
1404.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing & placing of one or more layers of material, each so graded so as to
function as an effective filter against the adjoining layers all in accordance w/ this specifications & conforming
to the thickness, elevations & extent shown on the Plans for the purpose of preventing the erosion of fine
materials through adjoining coarser materials.
The materials shall conform to the specifications stated below, otherwise the Engineer shall conform to the
specifications stated below, otherwise the Engineer shall require the contractor to procure a more suitable
materials or add materials of such a grain size to produce the required mixture before the work is commenced.
In this case the contractor to shall provide the Engineer w/ all necessary information as to the composition &
quality of the materials he intends to use in the filters, as well as of the materials w/c will be used adjacent to
the filters. The design of a filter shall be in general be based on the following specification :
Hate Filter Fabric Type C50.002 or equivalent
Material : Warp – polyethylene

Weft – polypropylene
Colour : Black
Mesh size : U.V stabilized
Permeability to water +0.06 – 0.15 mm
D90 : 240 um ( Sieve analysis )

Tensile strength Warp – 230 daN/5cm
Weft – 260 daN/5 cm
Weight : 225 g/ m
Standard Width : 350 mm
Make – up : Rolled in cardboard core
Then filter shall be laid in such a way that the rules governing the design can be applied to any position of the
filter layer in situ.
Filters placed on the exposed slopes of areas reclaimed w/ dredged material shall consist of two layers, an
inner layer 80 cm. in thickness consisting of material graded according to the attached diagram & an outer
evenly graded layer of coarser materials, 6-20 cm. in grain size, making up the total filter thickness specified
on the plans.
Filter materials shall be measured by the square meters of the thickness specified on the plan either in
vertical or sloping position perpendicular to the faces. Location & boundaries of the filter shall be so designated
on the plan except work on additional areas in the original Plan w/c are found necessary during construction
shall be measured accordingly.
All work performed 7 measured as provided in the preceding section shall be paid for @ the contract unit
price per square meter for filter of the specified thickness, w/c price shall include furnishing of labor,
equipment, tools, materials, supplies & incidentals necessary to complete the work.
1404 Filter Material Square Meter
Item 1703 – Dredging
1703.1 Description
This item shall consist of the excavation of river beds, bottom of creeks, or esteros, and other bodies of water
Page 101 of 120

for the purpose of deepening or removal of unsuitable soil layers & disposal of same @ areas shown on the
Plans or as established by the Engineer.
1703.2.1 Construction Surveys & Reference Elevation
All elevations shall be referred to the datum plane specified on the Plans.
A pre- construction survey shall be undertaken by the Contractor under the control of the Engineer to confirm
that the work has been executed to the prescribed lines & grades @ regular intervals of time w/c serve as a
basis for the computation of the actual volume of dredging materials.
1703.2.2 Equipment
The Contractor shall provide & mobilize @ the jobsite the minimum number & type of dredging equipment
specified in the information to Bidders.
Equipment necessary for the proper prosecution of the work shall be in good working condition & shall have
been approved by the Engineer, both as to type & condition before the commencement of the construction the
contractor shall at all times provide sufficient equipment w/ corresponding experienced operators to enable
continuous prosecution of the work & its completion @ the required contract time. The Contractor shall furnish
the Engineer w/ boats, boatmen, laborers, materials necessary for his inspection of the progress of the work &
the measurement of the work completed. Where the actual field condition so requires, additional adequate
equipment shall also be provided by the Contractor.
1703.2.3 Execution of the Work
The dredging work shall start at the downstream section of the project & shall be undertaken by the
Contractor w/n the limits shown on the Plans & in accordance w/ the Specifications & approved work
schedule.
1703.2.4 Materials to be Dredged
If the dredged materials are scheduled to be used as fill material, any remarkable change in the quality of the
dredged materials shall be reported to the Engineer to obtain appropriate direction.
1703.2.5 Dredging tolerance ( Over depth )
The dredging shall be executed according to the depth or elevations indicated on the Plans. No elevation
higher than the elevation indicated shall be tolerated. An allowance of 200 mm shall be acceptable for
over dredging, but in no case shall the entire dredging area shall be dredged to allowable 200 mm tolerance.
All quantities due to over dredging shall be @ the Contractor’s expense. In case of excessive over dredging (
beyond the 200 mm tolerance ) the Contractor shall on his account backfill the over dredged areas and / or
takes all necessary measures as approved by the Engineer to protect the stability of nearby structures.
1703.2.6 Dredging Slopes
All dredging slopes shall be to the specified gradient & w/n the limits specified on the approved Plans.
1703.2.7 Dredging Channels & Basins
The dredging operation shall start @ downstream reaches moving towards the upstream reaches as
practicable as possible. The theoretical boundaries of dredging are shown on the Plans. The dredging shall
be carried out to the specified depth w/ the permissible over dredging specified in Sub – Section 1603.2.5.
The preferred degree of slope between the original bottom & the indicated dredging level is 1 ( vertical ) to 4
( horizontal) for layers of clay & a to 6 layer of sand & silty sand & 1 to 10 for layers of mud or silt. After
dredging the river to the prescribed lines & grades, river banks shall be trimmed manually to the lines and
grades shown on the plans or as established by the Engineer.
173.2.8 Dredging Adjacent River Training Structures
In addition to the requirements mentioned in Subsection 1603.2.7 the maximum permissible over dredging is
200 mm. The contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety of any permanent structures on the subject
area.
1703.2.9 Disposal of Spoils
To accommodate the dredged materials, small dikes & drainage system shall be constructed in the approved
spoil bank area. The spoil bank & the open drainage channel shall be provided in high water channel to
facilitate the flow of water from the dredged material to the river. Where needed, a drainage stilling basin shall
be provided to minimize draining out of the dredged soil material w/ the effluent through the drainage channel
of the river. During dredging operations, precautionary measures shall be observed to avoid the destruction of
small dikes due to water seepage or overtopping of the dike. The dredged materials shall be deposited as flat
as possible w/n the spoil bank area.
Page 102 of 120

Dredging will be measured by cubic meter of the quantity actually dredged from the original river bed to the
neat lines & grades as shown on the Plans & as established by the Engineer subject to the conditions of
subsections 1703.2.5 Dredging tolerances.
1703.2.11 Basis of Payment
The cost of dredging shall be paid based on the computed volume of dredged materials multiplied by the
contract unit price for the particular pay item shown on the Bid Schedule, w/c price & payment shall constitute
full compensation for dredging, handling & disposal including labor, equipment, tools & incidentals necessary
1603 ( 1 ) Dredging – soils Cubic Meter
Item 1704 - Embankment
1704.1 Description
This item shall consist of spreading materials taken from channel excavation & dredging structure excavation,
sides borrow or borrow haul into all embankments for levee & inspection roads & all other embankments
indicated on approved Plans; moisture conditioning & then compacting said materials into the desired degree
of compaction. All in accordance w/ the approved Plans ; Moisture conditioning & then compacting said
materials into the desired degree of compaction, all in accordance w/ the approved Plans & Specifications or
as directed by the Engineer. All works associated w/ side borrow & borrow haul operations & overhaul for
levee & inspection roads embankments are considered.
1704.2 Materials Requirement
Materials for embankments & structure Backfills shall be taken from channel excavation & dredging, structure
Excavation, side borrow or borrow haul designated by the Engineer. The materials for the embankments shall
not contain any stump. Brush, weed, root, turf, clod & other organic matters. Clay or other materials shall be
broken & beaten & no accumulation @ the foot of side slopes of embankment will be permitted. Earth fill
materials shall make due allowance for consolidation & settlement whether compaction is specified or not
such that levels, widths & dimensions of the finished surfaces shall not be less than the levels & dimensions
shown on the drawings.
Placing & Compaction

Prior to the commencement of earth fill, the contractor shall carry out under the direct supervision & to the
satisfaction of the Engineer a series of field test to determine the optimum condition of compaction & the
minimum number of passes for each type of equipment necessary to compact to the required specification
hereafter stated for each type of fill materials. The cost of carrying out such test shall be included in the Unit
Prices for earth fill in the Bill of Quantities. No fill material shall be placed when, in the opinion of the Engineer,
satisfactory work cannot be done on account of heavy rain or other adverse conditions. Earth fill shall be
constructed horizontally to the full width of the embankment in uniform thickness not to exceed 20 cm after
compaction. Obtaining & placing of materials shall be blended sufficiently to secure the highest impermeability
& stability of the compacted fill. If the surface of any layer of embankment is too dry or smooth to bond properly
w/ the layer of material to be placed thereon, it shall be moisture and /or scarified in an approved manner to
provide satisfactory bending surface before the next succeeding layer is placed. The moisture content of the
soil shall be carefully controlled either by natural dying or wetting w/ water equipment. The fill material shall be
compacted to a density of not less than 100% of the maximum dry density. The moisture content of fill
materials shall be to +4% of the optimum moisture content. In so far as practicable as determined by the
Engineer, watering of the material shall be performed @ the site of stockpiles but such watering shall be
supplemented by sprinkling @ the time of compaction, if necessary. If the moisture content is beyond the
suitable range, the operation shall not proceed, except w/ the specific approval of the Engineer, until the
material has been wetted or allowed to dry out w/n the required range of the moisture content. No adjustment
in price shall be made on account of any operation of the Contractor in wetting or drying the materials or on
account of any delays occasioned thereby. When the materials has been conditioned as herein above
specified & the scarified to bond subsequent layer as specified in his specification, it shall be compacted by
soil compactors or by mechanical tamper & such other compacting equipment as the nature of soil dictates to
achieve @ least the prescribed degree of compaction. Prior to the commencement of the earth compaction,
compacting equipment to be used shall be approved by the Engineer. At the end of each day, or whenever
operations are suspended by any reason or whoever, the surface shall be left smooth & slightly crowned to
shed water. Preventive measures shall be looked into the contractor to prevent the formation of cracks on the
levee embankment especially during the dry season
Preparation of Surface under Embankment
No materials shall be placed on any portion of embankment foundations until such foundation has been
cleared, approved by the Engineer for placing fill. Whenever unfavorable or unsuitable soil foundation for
embankment such as organic & highly compressible soil are encountered, the contractor shall provide
countermeasures approved by the Engineer for such soil foundation before proceeding to the construction of
embankment and / or floodwall. Test pits, trenches & cavities made for the removal of unsound foundation
Page 103 of 120

materials or for the inspection of the surface foundation shall be filled w/ selected materials. Foundation
material w/c has no such density in undisturbed condition as prescribed for the fill material shall be moistured
& compacted by compacting equipment or shall be removed & refill or shall be treated w/ the special manner
directed by the Engineer. The foundation surface under all embankment shall be scoured w/a plow or a ripper,
making open furrows perpendicular to resultant seepage path of the water not less than 20 cm deep below the
stripped @ interval of not less than one (1) meter. This scarified foundation surface upon w/c compacted fill will
be placed will be moisture – conditioned immediately prior to placing of fill upon the surface to the same
condition as specified for compacted fill. If the placing of fill has been suspended, the surface of the fill shall be
prepared as crowned shape before fill placing operations resumed.
Fill adjacent to Structures

Fill material adjacent to structures shall be placed in such a manner as to ensure that they can be satisfactorily
compacted w/o damage to the structures. Compaction adjacent to all structures shall be carried out by hand or
by suitable hand operated plant. Unless otherwise specified.
Soil Test
The owner shall provide all the testing equipment & apparatus necessary to carry out various soil test, the
Contractor shall shoulder all expenses incurred for carrying out said soil test including the provision for the
testing laboratory. All the testing staff, laborer 7 consumable necessary for carrying out his test. All test result
in the form of report shall be furnished to the Owner. The contractor is obliged to follow the result of the tests.
Expenses for extra soil test ordered by the Engineer for his own purpose shall be borned by the Owner.
However, obtaining samples & transporting of the same to the laboratory shall be borne by the Contractor. The
test to be performed by the Contractor prior to the commencement of the earthwork and every time when the
said characteristics changes, shall include the following :
(a) Field Density ( unit weight ) Test

(b) Compaction Test
(c) Particle size distribution test
(d) Specific gravity
(e) Moisture content test
(f) Liquid limit & plastic limit test
(g) Direct shear test or tri axial compression test
The field moisture content of the compacted fill shall be made @ least once per 4000 to 6000 cubic meters of
earth fill. The Engineer shall prepare soil test programme depending on the quality of the Contractor’s
earthwork operation schedule. Should test results prove that changes in the embankment material are
necessary in order to obtain the prescribed compacted fill, these changes of obtaining of suitable material shall
be @ the Contractor’s expense.
Measurement shall be done in cubic meter of embankment in its final accepted compacted position ( less the
volume for gravel metal ) regardless of the origin of the material & the required degree of compaction.
The volume measured, regardless of the type of the embankment or origin of materials whether from channel
excavation, dredging, side borrow, borrow haul or from overhaul, as provided above shall be paid @ the
contract Unit Price per cubic meter w/c price & payment shall constitute full compensation for any side borrow,
borrow haul & overhaul operation made stripping of foundations ( where necessary ) spreading, blending,
moisture conditioning & compaction & trimming of side slopes ( where necessary including all labor, tools,
equipment 7 all incidentals & subsidiary works, necessary for the successful of the work described under this
item. Provided, however, that payment shall only be made after presentation by the Contractor of a certification
issued by the DPWH Materials Testing Engineer to the effect that the constructed embankment measured &
covered by such progress payment has attained the required degree of compaction.
Part E Mechanical
Item 1200 – Air Conditioning & Refrigeration System
1200.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing & installation of air conditioning, refrigeration & ventilation system,
inclusive of necessary electrical connections, ductworks, grilles, pipes & condensate drains & all other
necessary accessories, ready for service in accordance w/ the Plans & Specifications.
The types, sizes, capacities, quantities & power characteristics of the compressor, evaporator, condenser
chilled water pump & condenser water pump shall be specified or as shown on the plans.
1200.2.1 Refrigerant Pipes
Refrigerant pipes shall be copper tubing, type L or K or black steel pipe, Schedule 40 for size of 100 mm
Page 104 of 120

diameter & larger, screw type for size fitting designed expressly for brazing.
1200.2.2 Pipe for Cooling Water
Chilled & condenser cooling water pipes shall be black steel pipe, schedule 40. Pipe & fittings for size 50 mm
diameter & smaller shall be screwed type. Pipes & fittings for size 62 mm diameter & larger shall be welded or
flanged type.
1200.2.3 Pipe Insulations
Insulations shall be preformed fiber glass or its equivalent.

The insulating materials shall be covered w/ 100 mm x 13 mm thick polyethylene film w/c shall be overlapped
not less than 50 mm. Pipe insulations shall be adequately protected @ point of support by means of suitable
metal shield to avoid damage from compression. Insulated pipes, valves & fittings located outdoors shall be
provided w/ metal jackets.
1200.2.4 Ductworks
Ducts shall be galvanized sheet steel of not less than the following gages :
1. No. 26 for 300 mm wide & smaller

2. No. 24 for 350 mm to 750 mm wide
5.No. 18 for 2275 mm to 2500 mm or larger.
6. For aluminum sheets use one gage higher.
Joints & stiffeners of ducts using slip joints shall be as follows :
a. 300 mm wide & smaller, w/o bracing

b. 325 mm to 750 mm wide, brace w/ 25 mm x 25 mm x 3 mm steel angles
c. 775 mm to 1500 mm , brace w/ 31 mm x 31mm x 3 mm steel angles
d. 1525 mm up, brace w/ 38mm x 38mm x 3 mm steel angles
Stiffeners shall be located not more than 1200mm from each joint.
1200.2.5 Ductwork Insulation
The application insulation materials shall be rigid board made of styropor or equivalent 25 mm thick for ground
& top floor, 13 mm thick for intermediate floor. Galvanized metal bands for ducts shall be secure & spaced 300
mm minimum center to center & corners shall be protected w/ galvanized metal angles.
1200.2.6 Diffusers
The type, shape, capacity, size & location shall be as shown in the Plans.
Diffusers shall be complete w/ frame & gasket, equalizing deflector & volume control as indicated or specified
& shall e submitted for approval before mass fabrication & installation.
1200.2.7 Dampers
Dampers shall be of same materials as duct, at least one gage heavier & shall have accessible location,
complete w/ locking device for adjusting & locking damper in position. Where necessary, splitters, butterflies &
louvers damper deflecting vanes for control of air volume & direction & for balancing the system shall be
provided whether or not they are indicated on the Plans.
1200.2.8 Fire Damper
Main duct shall be provided w/ proper fire dampers of the fusible link actuated type. Access door shall be
provided in ductwork for renewal of fusible link & to reset damper.
1200.2.9 Equivalent Foundation
Foundation shall be provided & shall conform to the recommendation of the manufacturer of the equipment.
Equipment shall be leveled on foundation by means of jacks or steel wedges. All spaces between equipment
bases & concrete foundation shall be filled w/ cement mortar.
1200.2.10 Electrical Works
Power supply shall be provided by the Contractor @ the pull box installed inside the machine room & shall
furnish & install the main circuit breaker & starter w/ suitable ratings & capacities, conduits, wirings, fittings,
devices & all other equipment & electrical connections needed to complete the electrical installation of the
system. All electrical works shall comply w/ the latest edition of the Philippine Electrical Code, & requirements
of the local power company.
Page 105 of 120

The air conditioning system shall be entirely automatic in operation & shall not require the presence of an
attendant except for periodic inspection for lubrication. All equipment & materials shall be inspected upon
delivery & shall be tested after installation. Pipings shall not be buried, concealed, or insulated until it has been
inspected, tested & approved. Walls, floors & other parts of the building & equipment damaged by contractor in
the prosecution of the work shall be replaced as shown on the Plans.
1200.3.1 Operating Tests
Refrigerating equipment shall be tested for 8 – hours per day for three consecutive days or longer when so
directed, under the supervisions of manufacturers qualified & authorized representative, who will make
necessary adjustments & instruct designated plant operating personnel for each operation & maintenance of
refrigerating equipment & controls. Operating test of complete air conditioning system shall be 6 hours
minimum for each system. Tests of air flow, temperature & humidity shall be made to demonstrate that each
complies w/ the requirements of the Plans & Specifications.
1200.3.2 Guarantee & Service
All equipment, materials & workmanship shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from date of
acceptance at any time w/n the period of guarantee and upon notification, the contractor shall repair & rectify
the deficiencies, including replacement of parts or entire units.
1200.3.3 Miscellaneous
The owner shall be provided w/ three (3) bound copies “AS BUILT” diagrams, shop drawings, part lists, serial
number & inventory of equipment including manufacturers operating & maintenance manuals. Regular
maintenance of installed equipment.
The work under this item shall be measured either by set, piece, length, square meter actually placed &
installed as shown on the Plans. Compressor, condenser & evaporator shall be measured by set, grilles,
diffusers & valve by piece, pipe by length, duct & insulation by square meter.
All work performed & measured & as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for @ the Unit Bid or
Contract Unit Price w/c payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools &
(a) Compressor, Condenser & Evaporator set

(b) Diffuser, Grilles & Valves piece
(c) Pipes length
(d) Ducts & Insulation square meter
(e) Pipe Insulation meter
Item 1201 – Water Pumping System
1201.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing & installation of water pumping system, inclusive of all pipings & pipe fitting
connections, valves, controls, electrical wirings, tanks & all accessories ready for service in accordance w/ the
approved Plans & Specifications.
1201.2.1 Water Pump
The type, size, capacity, location, quantity & power characteristics shall be as specified or as shown on the
Plans.
1201.2.2 Overhead Tank
The tank shall be provided w/ manhole, cover, drain pipes, distribution pipe outlet, overflow pipes & air vent.
Suitable float switch or electrode shall be provided in the tank to stop & start the operation of the pump.
1201.2.3 Pneumatic Tank
Tank shall be designed for twice the maximum total dynamic pressure required & shall have the following
accessories.
a) A suitable pressure switch to stop pump if pressure required is attained.

b) Air volume control device to maintain correct air volume inside the tank.
c) Pressure relief valve should be installed on top of the tank.
Page 106 of 120

d) Electrode to be connected in the motor pump control to control the water level.
e) Air compressor shall be provided for tank of 3,785 liters to maintain air pressure inside the tank.
1201.2.4 Air Compressor
The air compressor shall be electric motor driven w/ sufficient capacity. The compressor shall be V-belt driven
& both motor & compressor shall have V-sheaves on their flywheels. The compressor & motor shall be
mounted on a base made of structural steel w/ anchor clips drilled to permit securing to a foundation.
1201.2.4 Air Compressor
The air compressor shall be electric motor driven w/ sufficient capacity. The compressor shall be V-belt driven
& both motor & compressor shall have V- sheaves on their flywheels. The compressor & motor shall be
mounted on a base made of structural steel w/ anchor clips drilled to permit securing to a foundation.
1201.2.5 Pipes & Fittings
All pipes & fittings shall be G.I. pipe Schedule 40. All pipings 100 mm & larger shall be welded or flanged while
smaller sizes shall be screwed.
1201.2.6 Valves
A gate valve followed by a check valve shall be placed between discharge of pump & tank to prevent back flow
of water when pump stops.
1201.2.7 Foundation
Refer to sub – section 1200.2.9 – Air Conditioning System
Refer to sub – section 1200.2.10 – Air Conditioning System.
Exposed pipings shall be provided w/ concrete saddle or steel clamps or hangers to secure them firmly to the
building structures. Pipe threads shall be lubricated by white lead, red lead, Teflon or other approved
lubrication before tightening. Piping supports shall be placed @ 3 m interval or less.
1201.3.1 Test
Appropriate test shall be done to demonstrate that the system complies w/ the requirements of the Plans &
Specifications.
Refer to sub – section 1200.3.2 – Air Conditioning System.
Refer to sub – section 1200.3.3 – Air conditioning System
The work under this Item shall be measure either by set, length & piece actually placed & installed as indicated
on the Plans. Equipment shall be measure by set, pipes by length, valves & fittings by piece.
All work performed & measured & as provided for in this Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the Unit Bid or
incidentals necessary to compete this Item.
Item Description Unit of Measurement
(a) Pump & Water Tank set

(b) Air Compressor set
(c) Pipe Length
(d) Valves & Fittings piece
Item 1202 – Automatic Water Sprinkler System
1202.1 Description
Page 107 of 120

This Item shall consist of furnishing & installation of Automatic Water Sprinkler System, inclusive of all pipings
& pipe fittings connections, valves, controls, electrical wiring connection & all other accessories ready for
service in accordance w/ the Plans & Specifications.
1202.2.1 Fire Pump
The type, size, capacity & quantity & power characteristics shall be specified or as shown on the plans. The
fire pump shall be diesel engine driven & capable of delivering a minimum of residual pressure of 103 kPa @
the top – most & remotest sprinkler. The pump unit shall be supplied w/ relief valve, gate valve, suction gauge
& discharge pressure gauge. The diesel engine shall be design specially intended for an automatic water
sprinkler protection system. A drop in system pressure due to the operation of one sprinkler pressure shall be
triggered a series of automatic operations that will result in the instanteneous operation of the engine to drive
the fire pump w/ the aid of a battery automatic controller. Then required accessories are : tachnometer, oil
pressure gauge, temperature gauge & control panel. A diesel fuel day tank shall be provided to supply the
engine for a minimum of two (2) hours running time. A fuel storage tank shall be asphalt coated w/ necessary
pipings & fittings for connection.
1202.2.2 Jockey Pump
Jockey pump shall be electric motor driven, 220V,3-phase, 60 hertz, power connection. The capacity to be
supplied shall not be less than that indicated on the Plans.
1202.2.3 Sprinkler Head
a) Type – spray unit, pendant & upright unit

b) Flow capacity,83 LPM per head
c) Pressure rating
1) Residual pressure -103 kPa minimum
2) Maximum pressure – 1035 kPa
d) Temperature rating – fusing @ 57,5 °C
e) Finish – chrome – pendant – chrome or brass upright
f) Pipe Thread – 13mm nominal
g) Stock of extra heads & tools required
1) Pendant & upright – 6 pcs. For 300 sprinkler, 12 pcs. For 300 to 1000 sprinkler, 24 pcs, for 1000 sprinkler
above.
2) Sprinkler tongs – 2 pcs.
3) Sprinkler wrench – 2 pcs.
1202.2.4 Alarm Check Valve & Fire Alarm System
a) The alarm assembly shall be constructed & installed that any flow of water from the sprinkler system equal
to or greater than that from the single automatic head shall result in an audible & visual signed in the vicinity of
the building.
b) The alarm apparatus shall be substantially supported & so located & installed that all parts shall be readily
accessible for inspection, removal & repair.
c) The actual water flow, through the use of a test connection, shall be employed to test the operation of the
sprinkler alarm units as a whole.
d) An approved identification sign shall be installed near the outdoor alarm device in a conspicuous positions.
“ Sprinkler Fire Alarm” when bell rings call Fire Department & Police.
1202.2.5 Alarm & Supervisory System
The alarm & supervisory system of the automatic water sprinkler shall include the monitoring of the following :
a) Water switch @ each floor of the building.

b) Fire pump & jockey pump running condition & power supplies.
c) Level of water in the reservoir
d) Control Valves
The water flow switches on each floor of the building shall be connected to the fire alarm system & annunciator
in such manner that the operation of any sprinkler system will activate the fire alarm system, w/ the location of
the operating water flow switch simultaneously indicated in the annunciator panel.
1202.2.6 Pipes & Fittings
Pipes shall be B.I Schedule 40. Screw fittings shall be used for inside piping. Welding & torch cutting shall not
be permitted. Piping shall be painted w/ red enamel paint.
1202.2.7 Siamese Twin
The Siamese twin shall be 64 mm x 64 mm x 102 mm, 90°C female coupling national standard thread, skive
type, w/ protective coupling cap & joint lug.
1202.2.8 Pipe Hangers
Page 108 of 120

Pipe hangers shall be steel bars, 3 mm minimum thickness, w/ corrosion protection.
a) Anchorage in concrete – expansion shield should preferably be used in a horizontal position in the sides of
concrete beams,
b) Expansion shield in vertical position. When pipes 102 mm & larger are supported entirely by expansion
shield in the vertical position, the supports shall be spaced not more than 3 m apart.
c) For pipe running through concrete beams use sleeves @ least two (2) sizes larger than the piping.
1202.2.9 Foundation
Refer to sub-section 1200.2.9, Air Conditioning System
1202.2.10 Electrical Work
Refer to sub – section 1200.2.10, Air Conditioning System
1202.3.1 Acceptance Tests
System operation & maintenance chart shall be submitted to the Owner upon completion of the Contract. This
shall include the locations of control valves & care of the new equipment. Marked instructions & identification
sign boards : These sign boards shall be made of # 14 gauge B.I sheet w/ baked enamel finish paint & letter
instructions are shown on the Plans. Additional sign boards as may be required & not specified herewith shall
be furnished @ no extra cost. Sign boards shall be mounted on the equipment or wall nearest the equipment
for easy identification & reading. Paints shall be basically gloss fire red & white.
A. Conduct of Tests – shall be by the Sprinkler System Contractor in the presence of an inspector or Authority
having jurisdiction.
B. Flushing of Underground Connections – To remove foreign materials w/c may have entered the piping
during installation of same as required before sprinkler piping is connected.
C. Hydrostatic Test
1. The Pressure – All systems, including piping shall be tested hydrostatically @ not less than 1378 kPa
pressure for two (2) hours, or at 344.5 kPa in excess of the maximum static pressure when the maximum static
pressure is in excess of 1033.5 kPa.
2. Operating Test – All control valves shall be fully closed & opened under water pressure to insure roper
operation. Use clean, non – corrosive water.
3. Fire Department Connection – Piping between the check valve in the fire department inlet pipe & the outside
connection shall be tested the same as the balance of the system.
D, Test of Drainage Facilities – Tests of drainage facilities shall be made while the control valve is wide open.
The main drain valve shall be opened & remain open until the system pressure stabilizes.
E. Test Certificate – Upon completion of work, inspection & tests made by the contractor’s representative &
witnessed by an owner’s representative, a test certificate shall be filled cut & signed by both representative.
1202.3.2 Maintenance Service
a) The contractor shall provide free of charge, maintenance service of the system for a period of at least one
(1) year reckoned from the date of acceptance of the work by the Engineer.
b) Upon completion of the work & all tests, the services of one or more qualified engineers shall be provided
by the contractor for a period of not less than five (5) working days to instruct & train the representative of the
owner in the operation & maintenance of the fire protection system.
Refer to sub-section 1200.3.3, Air Conditioning System
The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, piece, length actually placed & installed as indicated
on the Plans. Fire pump & jockey pump shall be measured by set, sprinkler heads, valves and fittings by piece,
pipes by length.
Page 109 of 120

All work performed & measured & as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for in the Bill of
Quantities shall be paid for @ the Unit Bid or Contract Unit Price w/c payment shall constitute full
compensation including labor, materials, tools & incidentals necessary to complete this item.
a) Fire & Jockey Pumps set
b) Sprinkler head, valves & fittings piece
c) Pipes length
Item 1203 – Electric Elevator
1203.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing & installation of electric elevators, inclusive of all necessary wirings, rails,
concreting of machine room floor slabs & all other accessories ready for service in accordance w/ the Plans &
Specifications.
1203.2.1 Traction or Hydraulic Machine
The type, size, capacity, speed, quantity. Location & power characteristics shall be as specified or as shown
on the Plans.
1203.2.2 Car Bodies & Platform
Car bodies shall be of furniture steel, smooth & not lighter than gage no.14. The car platform shall consist of
structural steel frame w/ wood flooring so treated against the attack of termites. The undersides of the
platform shall be covered w/ sheet steel w/c hall be treated to prevent corrosion before the wooden platform is
laid. The rubber tiles floor covering shall be not less than 3 mm thick, of approved design, color & quality, and
shall be laid in 1.5 mm thick asphalt.
The car shall be wired & fitted w/ a compact ceiling type electric combination fan& light fixture controlled by a
flush type standard switch w/n the car.
1203.2.3 Car Doors
The type of doors shall be specified on the project Specifications or as shown on the plans. The car doors
shall be provide w/ electric interlock designed to prevent operation of the elevator unless all the doors are
locked in the closed position or to prevent opening of any doors when the car is not in proper position.
1203.2.4 Hoist way Entrance & Doors
All hoist way entrance shall be provided w/ ornamental steel furniture w/ furnished trimmings of such design to
match the interior of the car. The hoist way entrance shall be properly reinforced where hangers, doors
control & other fittings are to be attached. The same electric interlock for car doors shall prevent opening of
my doors when the car is not in proper position. The type & size of the hoist way entrance & doors shall be
shown the Plans.
1203.2.5 Counterweight & guide Rails
Counter weight shall be of cast iron made in section properly shaped for adjusting the total weight, & fitted
into suitable guide shoes & structural steel framing. Guides for the cars & counterweights shall be planned
steel, erected plumbed, & secured to heavy steel brackets. Guides for the car shall have a section weighing
not less than 19 kg / m & counterweight guides shall have a section weighing not less than 12 kg. / m. The
elevator & counterweight shall be fitted w/ guide rail lubrication, preferably of the automatic type.
1203.2.6 Annunciator System
An electric annunciator call system w/ push buttons @ each entrance on each floor shall be provided. It shall
be of the electric lamp indicating type sowing “UP” and “DOWN” calls for the intermediate landing.
1203.2.7 Hall Position Indicators
Hall position indicator shall be electric multi – lighted panel type, shall be installed @ each entrance on each
floor.
1203.2.8 Car Position Indicator
Page 110 of 120

A car position indicator shall be provided inside the car @ the most convenient location & visible to all
passenger in the car.
1203.2.9 Operating Devices
The operating device shall consist of bank of buttons in the car numbered to correspond to the various floor
served. Button shall be placed @ each floor landing to bring the car to the floor by momentary pressure of the
respective button. An emergency stop button shall be provided in independently of the operating device.
1203.2.10 Controlling Devices
The controlling device shall be held inoperative until all the car doors & hoist ways doors are properly closed.
A hall time relay shall be provided to render the car inoperative from any hall button from a predetermined
period of time after the car stopped @ a landing in response to a hall call. Reverse phase relay shall be
mounted in the controller conveniently located & easily accessible to the operator.
1203.2.11 Foundation
Refer to subsection 1200.2.9, Air Conditioning System
1203.3.3 Construction Requirements
1203.3.1 Elevator Machine Room
The location of the machinery room & its principal dimension shall be as shown on the Plans. The machinery
shall be properly aligned, balanced & pinned to the base plate in order to eliminate undue vibrations. All
foundations shall be insulated from the machine room floors & other portion of building structure w/ cork board
or the equivalent to minimize the transmission of vibration & noise throughout the building structure.
1203.3.2 Car
An emergency exit located @ the top of the car & opening outward shall be provided. It shall be not less than
406 mm in width by 635 mm in length.
1203.3.3 Capacity, loading & Speed
The elevator shall be capable of starting, accelerating, retarding & stopping w/ safety & accuracy as to
loading, in either direction, w/ dead & live loads ranging from no load to full rated load, and to 331/3 overload.
The acceleration & retardation shall be done uniformly & smoothly as much as practicable to eliminate
discomfort to passenger. The speed variation of the elevator shall not exceed 15% plus or minus w/ load
ranging from load to full load where variation in the power supply voltage does not exceed 5% and the
variation of current frequency does not exceed 1 %.
Refer to sub –section 1200.3.3, Air Conditioning System
The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, piece, length actually placed & installed as shown
on the Plans. Traction or Hydraulic Machine & car shall be measured by set, Hoist way doors, counter weight,
Guide rails, annunciator & hall position indicators by piece, electrical wire & conduit by length.
All work performed 7 measured as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the Unit Bid or
Contract Unit Price w/c payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools and
(a) Traction or Hydraulic Machine & car set

(b) Hoist way doors, counter weight, Guide rails piece
Annunciators, & hall position indicators
(c) Electrical Wires & Conduits length
Page 111 of 120

Item 1204 –Electric Dumb Waiter
1204.1 Description
This Item shall consist of Furnishing & installation of electric dumbwaiters, inclusive of all necessary wirings &
other accessories ready for service in accordance with the approved Plans & Specifications.
1204.2.1 Machines
Machines for dumbwaiter consisting of motor, brake, worm & gear drive supported by ball roller bearing shall
be assembled into one compact unit. The type, size, capacity, speed, quantity, location & power
characteristics shall be as specified or as shown on the Plans.
1204.2.2 Car
a) Car shall be constructed of sheet steel w/ reinforced angle iron frame.

b) Metal car section shall be riveted, welded or bolted together.
c) Cars may be provided w/ hinged, permanent or removable steel shelves.
1204.2.3 Controls & Signals
Push button fixtures @ each landing arranged for either “ Call & send” or multi- button operation, depending
upon the number of floors served, shall be installed. Each floor shall be provided w/ landing board of two (2)
registered push buttons, one (1) call button & one (1) dispatch button, to enable calling & sending of the car.
This push button board shall be located beside the service opening. When operating a sending button, a
buzzer sounds & “Car here” lamp lighted @ the receiving station to advice personnel to empty the car. The “In
Use” lamp shall be lighted & shall respond to either call or send signals.
1204.2.4 Controller
The controller shall regulate starting & stopping of dumbwaiters & shall contain protective devices designed to
prevent motor damage from possible overload or excess current.
1204.2.5 Limit Switches
Terminal limit switches which are operated automatically by car movement shall stop the dumbwaiter @ the
upper & lower terminals.
1204.2.6 Door Contacts & Mechanical Locks
Door contacts & mechanical locks shall be provided on each hoist way door to prevent dumbwaiter operation
unless door is closed, & to prevent opening of doors unless car is @ landing.
Refer to sub – section 1200,2,10, Air Conditioning System
1204.3.1 Hoist way
Hoist way shall be fully enclosed for fire protection.
1204.3.2 Machine Room
Refer to sub – section 1203.3.1 Elevator Machine Room
1204.3.3 Guarantee & Service & Miscellaneous
Refer to sub – section 1200.3.2 & 1200.3.3, Air Conditioning System
The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, piece, length actually placed & installed as
indicated on the Plans. Machine shall be measured by set, car, door,& cable by piece, electric wires &
conduits by length.
All work performed & measured as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for @ the Unit Bid or
Contract Unit Price w/c payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools, &
Page 112 of 120

(a) Machine set

(b) Car, door & cable piece
(c) Electric wires & conduits length
Item 1205 – Oxygen, Nitrous oxide, Vacuum & Fuel Gas System
1205.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing & installation of oxygen, nitrous oxide, vacuum & gas, inclusive of pipes,
outlets, fittings connections, w/ the approved Plans & Specifications.
1205,2,1 Oxygen Manifold
Oxygen manifold shall consist of two (2) banks of fully charged oxygen cylinders, all connected to a common
header. Each bank shall be provided w/ a ball type pressure check valve, pressure regulating valve & shut off
valve. The manifold shall be equipped w/ alarm system w/c shall provide an audio – visual switchover warning
signal. It shall also include the necessary facilities for actuating the remote combination switch – over & Hi –
low line pressure alarm panels. The Hi & low pressure warning shall operate when the pressure in the main
varies 20% above or below normal line of 345kPa (50 psi). The alarm control shall include one (1) mercury
tube type adjustable pressure switch for energizing the switch over alarm circuit & one (1) double mercury tube
pressure switch for energizing the Hi – low pressure alarm circuit. A single control box shall contain 220/ 24
volt transformer, relays for actuating all alarm panels, an audio – visual switch over alarm panel containing
“Normal” & ” Reserve Supply in Use” warning lights, a momentary switch & automatic reset to shut – off the
buzzer.
1205.2.2 Nitrous Oxide cylinders, all connected to a common header. Each bank shall be complete w/
pressure regulators, safety valve set 483 kPa, all necessary fittings, & adapters to complete the assembly. The
audio – visual alarm shall include pressure switches, isolating valve 220/24 volt transformer & remote alarm
panel, consisting of pilot light, buzzers, momentary switch for silencing the buzzer & automatic reset relay.
1205.2.3 Fuel Gas Manifold
Fuel Gas manifold shall consist of two (2) banks of fully charged gas cylinders, all connected to a common
header. Each cylinder connection shall be provided w/ a cylinder valve. The manifold control shall include two
(2) shut-off valve, automatic throw over manifold, pressure regulator & relief valve.
1205.2.4 Vacuum Pumps
Vacuum pumps shall be duplex type each w/ a capacity to handle the total load w/o loss of vacuum in the
system. The duplex vacuum pumps shall be provided w/ sequence master alternator to automatically reserve
the sequence of operation from single to both units in the event that one pump can not bring the system to the
desired vacuum level in the case of heavy demand.
1205.2.5 Humidifier
The humidifier shall be of jet & bubbles type w/c the aspirator element injects water into stream of oxygen. The
humidifier bottles shall be pliable, heat resistant & shall be sufficiently transparent to permit the water level to
be easily seen & w/ usable water capacity @ least 300 cc. The unit shall have integral warning whistle w/c
operates in conjunction w/ a pressure limiting valve to indicate any obstruction in the supply tubing.
1205.2.6 Vacuum Trap Bottles
Vacuum trap bottles complete w/ adapter connection to the vacuum outlet shall consist of a wall bracket. The
cap shall also have a positive sealing overflow shut – off valve fluid assembly for closing off the vacuum in the
event the collection bottles become full. The collection bottles shall have cubic centimeter graduation &
imprinted operating instructions. The vacuum regulator shall be diaphragm type w/ regulator mechanism &
gauged housed in a simple compact case.
1205.2.7 Service Outlet
All wall outlets shall be double or triple units for the following services; oxygen, nitrous oxide & vacuum, The
outlet shall be surface mounted type w/ satin finish stainless steel cover plate suitable for exposed piping
system. Each service outlet shall consist of an outlet valve w/ outlet thread, dust cap & chain, nameplate
specifying gas service. The safety keyed coupler shall be installed to provide a gas seal when equipment is
disconnected.
1205.2.8 Pipes, Valves & Fittings
Page 113 of 120

All pipings shall be of seamless type “K” hard tampered copper tubing suitable for silver brazing except pipings
for gas w/c shall be of B.I pipe Schedule 40. Joints & fittings for copper tubing shall be cast bronze designated
for brazing. Screwed connections shall be applied w/ thin paste of litharge & glycerin to the external only. Shut
off valves shall be furnished & installed as indicated in the drawings & shall be provided w/ boxes to avoid
tampering.
1205.2.9 Equipment Foundation
Refer to Sub –section 1200.2.9 Air Conditioning System
Refer to sub –section 1200.2.10, Air Conditioning System
1205.3.1 Pipes, Valves & Fittings
All pipings, tubing’s, valves & fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of oil, grease or other combustible materials
by washing in hot solution of sodium carbonate or trisodium phosphate mixed in the proportion of 373 grams to
11.4 liter of water. Scrubbing & continuous agitation of the parts shall be employed whenever necessary to
remove all deposits & insure complete cleaning. After washing, all materials shall be rinsed thoroughly w/ clean
hot water.
All pipings shall be spaced correctly for adequate support of all lines so that weight shall be on the support &
not on the joints. Horizontal pipings of 16 mm (5/8 inch) & larger shall be supported 3m (10ft.) a part. For 13
mm (1/2 inch) & smaller they shall be supported 1.52 m (5ft.) a part. On vertical lines the support shall be one
on each storey for piping 25mm ( one inch ) & smaller, for larger piping one support for each two storey.
The work under this item shall be measured either by set, length, piece actually placed & installed as indicated
in the Plans. Qxygen, nitrous oxide, gas manifold & duplex vacuum pump shall be measured by set, humidifier
vacuum trap bottles, outlet & valves by piece, pipes by length.
All work performed & measured and as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the Unit Bid or
Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
a) Oxygen, Nitrous Oxide, Gas Manifold & Duplex

Vacuum pump set
b) Humidifier, Vacuum Trap Bottle, outlets, valve piece
c) Pipes & Tubing’s length
Item 1206 – Heating System
1206.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing & installation of Heating System, inclusive of pipes & fittings, insulation,
motor control, electrical wirings & other accessories ready for service in accordance w/ the approved Pans &
Specifications.
1206.2.1 Boiler
The type, size, capacity, location, quantity & power characteristics shall be as specified or as shown on the
Plans.
The boiler shall be provided w/ the following:
a) The combination light & heavy oil burner w/ regulating valve for maintaining proper air – fuel mixture.
b) Blower complete w/ motor & starter
c) Rotary gear type oil pump assembly & oil electric pre – heater.
d) Control panel shall be made of metal drip proof cabinet w/ hinged cover, fully wired & complete w/ switches,
Page 114 of 120

fuses & safety devices.
e) Modultrol motor to operate air valve & fuel regulating valve.
f) Feed water pump, electric motor driven w/ a capacity as indicated on the Plans.
g) Condense receiver tank
h) Feed water pump control
1206.2.2 Pipings, Fittings & Valves
All piping materials shall be B.I Schedule 40, except as otherwise specified. The size of the fittings. Pipings,
valve, etc. shall not be less than those indicated on the drawings.
1206.2.3 Oil Transfer Pump
The pump shall be rotary gear type, w/ cast iron casing. All parts of the pump that will be in contact w/ the
liquid shall be made of hardened steel. The rotary pump shall be electric motor driven capable of transferring &
pumping heavy fuel from the surface fuel storage tank outside the building to the day tank inside the boiler
room @ a rated capacity. The suction side of the pump shall be provided w/ stainer & foot – valve.
1206.2.4 Fuel Storage Tank
The fuel storage tank shall be made of steel – welded construction inclusive of piping connections, valves &
fittings, pipe connection, pipe drain & manhole frame. The tank shall be painted w/ one coat of primer & two
coats of anti – corrosive asphalt paint.
1206.2.5 Fuel Day Tank
The fuel day tank shall be made of welded steel plate & provided w/ hinged cover on top, supply & overflow
pipe connections, drain connection, glass column gauge &valves. The tank shall be painted w/ one coat of
primer & two coats of finish paints.
1206.3.1 Piping Connection
Piping connection to the equipment shall be capped or plugged during installation to keep dirt or foreign
materials out of the system. All screwed joints shall be tapped w/ threads properly cut. The joints shall be
made perfectly tight w/ a mixture of graphite or oil applied w/ a brush to the pipe threads. All flanged joints shall
be face true, packed & made perfectly squared. All horizontal run pipes shall be supported. Suspended pipes
shall have adjustable expansion pipe hangers w/ bolted hinged loops & turn buckles or other approved
devices. Pipes supported from side walls shall have expansion hook plates or bracket supports spaced not
greater than 3 m apart. All steam & condensate pipes lines shall be insulated w/ 85% magnesia of not less
than 50 mm thick. Insulation shall be finished w/ inter lapping white cotton cloth tightly wound around &
painted.
1206.3.2 Testing
All steam & condensate piping installations shall be subjected to hydrostatic test @ a pressure of not less than
1378KPa, continuously for a period of 24 hours before installation of pipe to insure that all joints are properly
connected.
The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, length, & piece actually placed & installed as
indicated on the Plans, Boiler fuel pump, storage tank & day tank including foundation shall be measured by
set, pipes by length, valves & fittings by piece.
All work performed & measured as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for @ the Unit Bid or
Item Description Unit of Measurement
a Boilers, Fuel Pump, Storage

Tank & Fuel Day Tank including foundation set
b Pipes length
Page 115 of 120

c Valves & Fittings pieces
Item 1207 – Boiler
1207.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the furnishing of all equipment, materials, tools & labor necessary for the completion
of the steam laundry in accordance w/ the approved plans, Specifications general condition of the contract.
All materials & equipment shall be brand new & shall conform w/ the standards or equivalent set by the
Product Agency, set by the Department of Trade & Industry if such a standard has been established for the
particular type of materials & equipment to be used. The type, size, capacity. Location, quantity 7 power
characteristics shall be specified or inducted on the Plans.
1207.2.1 Boiler
The boiler shall be constructed w/ the drum electrically welded throughout, w/ the front & rear fuel gas return
chamber & shall be solidly mounted together with auxiliaries on a common grated surface steel base to form a
complete structure unit. The boiler shall be fully automatic in its operation. The boiler shall be provided
complete w/ the following :
a) The combination light & heavy oil burner with regulating valve for maintaining proper air – fuel mixture,
primary air fan motor, gas electric ignition system w/ accessories, tools & burner accessories.
b) Blower complete w/ motor & starter
c) Rotary gear type oil pimp assembly & oil electric pre- heater & steam final heater, corresponding
accessories, such as viscosity & temperature control, regulating valve, trap & lines.
d) Control panel shall be made of metal drip proof cabinet w/ hinged cover, fully wired & complete w/ switches,
fuses, safety devices, w/ the following features :
1) Operating Control ( Steam Pressure Operated )

2) Combination control – programming devices & electric combustion control.
3) Air safety switch to automatically close main valve & stop burner if air supply is interrupted.
e) Modulator motor to operate air valve & fuel regulating valve, synchronized to automatically supply burner w/
proper amount of air & fuel @ all firing rates.
f) Feed water pump, capacity as indicated on the plans, electric motor driven & condensate receiver tank w/c
shall include a low water level alarm & shut – off burner device, boiler water level regulation for feed pump,
float valve in automatic & manual operation of the feed pump.
g) A water softener complete w/ dissolving tank, testing equipment for softened water monitoring & water
meter shall provide for the feed water requirement of the boilers.
1207.2.2 Heat Exchanger
The tank shall be provided w/ manhole, drain & relief valve thermometer tapping, cold water inlet arranged for
flanged connection located @ the bottom side near steam coil header & hot water outlet arranged for flanged
connection located @ the top. The tank shall subjected to a pressure of 1033.5 kPa. The heat exchanger shall
be fully insulated w/ glass fiber or other approved mineral insulation of not less than 75 mm thick. The surface
of the insulation shall be fitted w/ metal jacket & shall be painted the same as the boiler. The tank shall be
electrically welded throughout & provided w/ removal steam heating coil assembly of seamless copper tubing
w/ both ends of each tube expanded in a common header making each tube free to expanded & contract
independently of the others. The cover of the steam coil heads shall be provided w/ connection for steam
supply lines the hot water storage tank.
1207.2.3 Pipings, fittings & Valves
All piping material materials shall be B.I Schedule 40, except as otherwise specified. The size of the fittings,
pipings, valve, etc., shall not be less than those indicated on the drawings. Piping connection to the equipment
shall be capped or plugged during installation to keep dirt or foreign materials out of the system. All screwed
joints shall be tapped w/ threads properly cut. The joints shall be made perfectly tight w/ a mixture of graphite
or oil applied w/ a brush to the pipe threads. All flanged joints shall be face true, packed & made perfectly
squared. All horizontal runs pipes shall be supported. Suspended pipes shall have adjustable expansion pipe
hangers w/ bolted hinged loops & turn buckles or other approved devices. Pipes supported from side walls
shall have expansion hook plates or bracket supports spaced not greater than 3 m apart. All steam,
condensate & hot water pipe lines shall be insulated w/ 85% magnesia, perform of not lessmthan50mm.
Insulation shall extend to cover fittings & valve leaving only handles insulated. The insulation shall be finished
w/ inter lapping white cotton cloth tightly wound around & painted.
1207.2.4 Oil Transfer Pump
The pump shall be rotary, gear type, w/ cast iron casing. All parts of the pump that will be in contact w/ the
liquid shall be made of ferrous materials. The shaft shall be made of hardened steel. The rotary pump shall be
electric motor driven capable of transferring & pumping heavy fuel from the sub – surface fuel storage tank
outside the building to the day tank inside the boiler room @ a rated capacity. The suction side of the pump
shall be provided w/ strainer & foot – valve. A by – pass line w/a pressure relief valve shall be pipe installed
between pump and discharge gate valve. The by – pas line shall be piped back to the fuel storage tank.
Page 116 of 120

1207.2.5 Fuel Storage Tank
The fuel storage tank shall be steel – welded construction inclusive of piping connections, valve & fittings, pipe
connection to transfer pump, overflow pipe from day tank, vent connection, capped drain & manhole. The tank
shall be painted w/ one coat of primer & two coats of anti corrosive asphalt paint.
1207.2.6 Fuel Day Tank
Fuel day tank shall be made of steel plate & welded & provided w/ hinged cover on top, supply & overflow pipe
connections, drain connection, glass column gauge & valves. The tank shall be painted w/ one coat of primer &
two coats of finish paints.
Refer to structural
Refer to Electrical
1207.3.1 Testing
a) All steam & condensate piping installation shall be subjected to hydrostatic test @ a pressure of not less
than 1378 kPa, continuously for a period of 24 hours before installation of pipe insulation to insure that all joints
are properly connected.
b) All hot water pipes shall be hydrostatically tested of not less than 689 kPa continuously for 24 hours
before installation of pipe insulation.
Refer to 1200.3.2 Air Conditioning System
The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, length, & piece actually place & installed as
indicated on the plans. Equipment shall be measured by set, pipes by length, valves & fittings by piece. The
complete work, as measured in accordance w/ this sub- item & accepted by the engineer shall be the basis for
payment.
All work performed & measured as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for @ the unit bid or
contract unit price w/c payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools & incidentals
necessary to complete this Item.
Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
(a) Steam Boilers, Air Compressor, set

Heat exchanger & Fuel pump
(b) Pipes W/ insulation length
(c) Values & Fittings piece
ITEM 1011 – ROLLING UP DOORS
1011.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing all plant, labor, tools, equipment & rolling up door required as shown
on the plans & in accordance w/ this Specification.

Rolling up door shall be surfaced mounted type design for exterior service opening as indicated on the
plan. Component parts shall conform w/ the following materials specifications:
Page 117 of 120

1. Curtain – shall be manufactured of interlocking curved or flat slats, rolled
from galvanized &
bonderized steel, aluminum or stainless steel as the case maybe. Slats shall be of size & thickness to
windstand 0.957 KPa windload.
Curtain is composed of :
a) Interlocking slats shall roll up on a drum supported @ head of opening on brackets

& shall be balanced by helical springs.
b) Endlocks – shall be malleable iron riveted to each ends of slats. .These are called
continuous when they reinforce both ends of all slats, alternate when every other
slats.
c) Bottom bar – shall be manufactured from two equal sized angles, minimum 3 mm
thick bolted back to back w/ appropriate half slat @ lowest edge of curtain. In
addition, exterior door shall have compressible & replaceable rubber or vinyl
weather seal attached to bottom rail.
2. Counter balance barrel assembly – shall include spring barrel w/c serves as
load carrying beam
encases counter balance mechanism & provide axis around curtain coils. As it arises barrel rings are
involute shapes of malleable iron to assure proper counter balance for all points of travel Oil tempered
torsion type counter balance springs are wound from heat treated steel, to provide accuracy I
balancing door.
3. Hood – shall be manufactured from .60 mm thick ( minimum ) galvanized sheet metal, flanged @ top
for attachment to header & flanged @ bottom to provide longitudinal stiffness. Hood shall enclose
curtain coil & counter balance mechanism.
4. Brackets – shall be made of precisely formed plate w/ permanently sealed ball bearings, designed to
enclose end of the curtain coil & provide support for counter balance pipe @ each end.
5. Guides – shall be fabricated from structural steel angles or precision roll formed channels & angles.
Especially adaptable for doors exposed to heavy wind pressure. Designed w/ groove depths varying
from 50 mm to 150mm depending upon the width of the door, & set cut from the face of the face of
the wall to facilitate the travel of the curtain.
Doors shall be mechanically operated & w/ provision for manual operation by means of hand chain.
Accessories needed for the satisfactory performance of the door shall be built w/ the unit.
10113.3.1 Erection / Installation
a) Set & install structural steel angles properly aligned, plumb, level, square true to profile section & rigidly
anchored w/ adjacent concrete surface walls.
b) Allow all adjacent items of work to be completed before any installation work is started except the
installation of structural steel angles.
c) Assemble rolling up doors in accordance w/ the manufacturers instruction manual or as indicated in the
shop drawing approved.
d) All anchors & insets for guides, brackets & other accessories shall be located accurately.
1011.3.2 Locking Devices
Curtain shall be located @ each end of bottom bar by concealed slide bolts w/c shall engage a lock
wedge in each guide. A plunger type cylinder lock is provided as standard equipment.
1011.3.3 Warranty
Upon completion & before final acceptance of the equipment, the Contractor shall furnish the DPWH /
Owner a written guaranty stating that the rolling up door equipment & accessories are free from
defects.The guaranty shall be for the period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of work.
Any part of the equipment that becomes defective during the term of the guaranty shall be replaced &
made good by the contractor @ his own expense a manner satisfactory to the DPWH / Owner.
The work executed under this item shall be measured by actual units of rolling up door installed @
jobsite complete & ready for service. The computed unit shall bear type of materials & area of
opening covered & shall be accepted by the Engineer.
1011.3.5 Basis of Payment
Page 118 of 120

The accepted work quantified & provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for @ the unit Bid price
w/c constitutes full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools,equipment & other
Payment shall be made under;
1011(a) Rolling up door (indicate metal door

Size & type of curtain slats) unit / set
1000 – Termite Control Work
1000.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing & applying termite control chemicals, including the use of equipment & tools in performing such
operations in accordance w/ this Specification.
Termite control chemicals or toxicants shall be able to immediately exterminate termites or create barriers to discourage entry of
subterranean termites into the building areas. The toxicants may be classified into the following types & according to use:
Type I. Liquid Termicide Concentrate
This type of toxicant shall be specified for drenching soil beneath foundations of proposed buildings. The concentrate shall be
diluted w/ water in the proportions of 1 liter of concentrate material 65 liters of water or as specified by the Manufacturer.
Type II. Liquid Termicide Ready Mixed Solution
This type of toxicant w/c comes in ready mixed solution shall be used as wood preservative by drenching wood surfaces to the point
of run-off,
Type III. Powder Termicide
This type of toxicant shall be applied to visible or suspected subterranean termite mounds & tunnels where termites are
exterminated through trophallaxes method ( exchange or nourishment between termites white greeting each other meeting.
Before any termite control work is started, thorough examination of the site shall be undertaken so that the appropriate method of
soil poisoning can be applied.
The Contractor shall coordinate w/ other related trades through the Engineer to avoid delay that may arise during the different
phases of application of termite control chemicals.
1000.3.1 Soil Poisoning
There are two methods usually adopted in soil poisoning w/c are as follows :
1. Cordoning . This method is usually adopted when there is no visible evidence of termite infestation.
Trenches in concentric circles, square or rectangles are dug 150mm to 220mm wide & least one meter
a part & applied with type I working solution @ the rate of 8 liters per linear meter.
2. Drenching. When soil show termite infestation, this method shall be applied. The building area shall be thoroughly drenched w/ type I
working solution @ the rate of 24 liters per square meter. When Powder Termicide is to be applied to eradicate subterranean termites,
careful application & precaution shall be given considering that this toxicant is fatal to animal & human lives.
At the time soil poisoning is to be applied, the soil to be treated shall be in friable condition w/ low moisture content so as to allow
uniform distribution of the toxicant agents, Toxicant shall be applied @ least twelve ( 12 ) hours prior to placement of concrete w/c
shall be in contact w/ treated materials.
Treatment of soil on the exterior sides of the foundation walls, grade beams & similar structures shall be done prior to final grading &
planting or landscaping work to avoid disturbance of the toxicant barriers by operations.
Areas to be covered by concrete slab shall be treated before placement of granular fill used as capillary water barrier @ a rate of 12
liters per square meter w/ type I working solution after it has been compacted & set to require elevation. Addition Treatment shall be in
contact w/ treated materials.
Treatment of the soil on the exterior sides of the foundation walls, grade beams & similar structures shall be done prior to final grading
& planting or landscaping work to avoid disturbance of the toxicant barriers by such operations.
Areas to be covered by concrete slab shall be treated before placement of granular fill used as capillary water barrier @ a rate of 12
liters per square meter w/ type I working solution after it has been compacted & set to required elevation. Additional Treatment shall be
applied as follows:
1. In critical areas such as utility openings for pipes, conduits & ducts, apply additional treatment @ the rate of 6 liters per linear
meter in a strip 150 mm to 200 mm wide.
2. Along the exterior perimeter of the slab & under expansion joint @ the rate of 2.5 liters per linear meter
in a strip 150 mm to 200mm wide in a shallow trench.
1000.3.3 Wood Protection
Where the application of wood preservative is necessary, the Contractor shall use Type II working solution as recommended by the
manufacturer.
All wood materials not pressure treated as specified in item 1003 – Carpentry & joinery shall be treated
Page 119 of 120

w/ Type II ready mixed solution as herein called for or as directed by the engineer.
1000.3.4 Guarantee
The contractor shall guarantee the work for one (1) year after final acceptance.
Liquid termite control chemicals or toxicants shall be measure by actual number of liters used in the cordoning & drenching wood
surfaces, While powder chemical / toxicant shall be measured by kilograms applied to suspected subterranean termite mounds &
tunnels. The quantity to be paid for shall be determined & accepted by the Engineer.
The accepted quantities, measure as prescribed in Section 10 shall be paid for @ the Contract Unit Price for furnishing & applying
termite control chemicals including the use of equipment & tools, labor & incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this
item.
Pay Item Number Description Unit of measurement
1000 (a) Soil Poisoning Liter
Page 120 of 120

Bldg. Spec and Volume 3 Completed (Autosaved) (Autosaved) (Autosaved) (Autosaved) (Autosaved) (Autosaved) 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bldg. Spec and Volume 3 Completed (Autosaved) (Autosaved) (Autosaved) (Autosaved) (Autosaved) (Autosaved) 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Building Specifications

EXCAVATION, FILLING AND GRADING

PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

3-1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2. Standard Specifications and Codes

3-4 PLAIN CONCRETE

3-5 PROPORTIONING OF CONCRETE

3-6 DETERMINING CONCRETE PROPORTIONS

Method – 1 without Preliminary Test

Method – 2 For combination of materials previously evaluated or to be established by trial

TABLE 3-1 MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WATER CEMENT

Specified Maximum permissible water cement ratio

2500 7-1/4 0.642 6-1/4 0.554

3000 6-1/2 0.576 5-1/4 0.465

3500 5-3/4 0.510 4-1/2 0.399

4000 5 0.443 4 0.354

3-7 CONCRETE TEST

B. Compression Slump Test

3-9 MIXING CONCRETE

A. Site Mixed Concrete

3-10 READY MIXED CONCRETE

3-11 HANDLING AND PLACING CONCRETE

hat has partially hardened shall not be re-tampered for use.

3-13 CURING AND PROTECTION

3-14 METAL REINFORCEMENT

Deformed & Plain Billet Steel ( ASTM A 615 )

Deformed Rail – Steel & Plain

Deformed A X b – Steel & Plain

If reinforcing bars are to be welded, these ASTM specifications shall be supplemented by

Bar and rd mats for concrete reinforcement ASTM A 187

Cold – Draw Steel Wire for ( ASTM A 82 )

Welded steel wire fabric ( ASTM A 185 )

Wire & Strands for pre stressed ASTM A 416

Tensile strength fs’ 1000MPa

2. Mill Certificate and Test

3-15 PLACING OF REINFORCEMENT

3-16 STORAGE OF MATERIALS

Columns, Shear and bearing walls - 3 days

3-18 OTHER FORMS

3-19 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES

3-20 FINISHING OR FORMED SURFACE

3-21 FINISHING OF SLAB

3-24 CONCRETE FLOOR ON FILL

3-25 HANDLING AND PLACING OF CONCRETE

3-26 GRADATION OF AGGREGATES

3-27 STORAGE OF MATERIALS

3. Reinforcing Steel Bars

3-28 REBAR SPACING AND COVER

3-30 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

Notation : The notations used in these regulations are defined as follows :

F’c = compressive strength of concrete

Concrete Proportions & Consistency

Sampling & Testing of Structural Concrete

900.3.6 Strength Test of Concrete

To conform to the requirements of this Item :

900.3.7 Splitting Tensile Test of Concrete

Batching shall conform to the requirements of item 405, Structural Concrete.

900.4 Concrete Surface Finishing : General

This shall be in accordance w/ item 407. Concrete Structures.

900.5 Curing Concrete ( see subsection 407 )

900.6 Acceptance of Concrete

900.7 Method of Measurement

900.8 Basis of Payment